SWV2563 Yaskawa G5 Drive Manual 2 15 12

User Manual: SWV2563

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 297 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Cover
Contents
GPD 515/G5 SIMPLIFIED START-UP PROCEDURE
QUICK REFERENCE FOR GPD 515/G5 PARAMETERS
CURRENT RATINGS & HORSEPOWER RANGE
WARNING/CAUTION STATEMENTS
1 - RECEIVING AND INSTALLATION
- 1.1 General
- 1.2 Receiving
- 1.3 Physical Installation
- 1.4 Electrical Installation
2 - INITIAL START-UP (“LOCAL” CONTROL)
- 2.1 Pre-power Checks
- 2.2 Control Method Selection
- 2.3 Changing the Language on the Digital Operator
- 2.4 Calculating Motor Parameters
- 2.5 Test Run Using Digital Operator ("Local" Control)
- 2.6 Pre-operation Considerations
- 2.7 Storage Function
3 - OPERATION AT LOAD
4 - DIGITAL OPERATOR
- 4.1 General
- 4.2 Display and Keypad
- 4.3 Digital Operator Menu Trees
- 4.4 Basic Programming
- 4.5 Modes of Operation
5 - PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
- 5.1 General
- 5.2 Accel/Decel Time
- 5.3 Accel/Decel: S-Curve Characteristics
- 5.4 Access Level
- 5.5 Auto-restart
- 5.6 Automatic Frequency Regulator (AFR) Gain
- 5.7 Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR)
- 5.8 Carrier Frequency
- 5.9 Critical Frequency Rejection
- 5.10 DC Injection Braking
- 5.11 Digital Operator Display Selection
- 5.12 Display – Monitor (at Power-up) Selection
- 5.13 Droop
- 5.14 Dwell
- 5.15 Encoder (PG) Parameters
- 5.16 Energy Saving Operation
- 5.17 External Fault Inputs
- 5.18 Frequency Reference Bias/Gain
- 5.19 Frequency Reference Input Signals (Auto/Manual)
- 5.20 Frequency Reference Loss Detection
- 5.21 Frequency Reference Retention
- 5.22 Frequency Reference Upper & Lower Limits
- 5.23 Hunting Prevention
- 5.24 Jog Reference
- 5.25 Local/Remote and Reference Selection
  - 5.25A Local/Remote Selection
  - 5.25B Multiple Speed Reference Configuration [Multi-step Speed Operation]
- 5.26 Miscellaneous Parameters
- 5.27 Miscellaneous Protective Functions
- 5.28 MODBUS Control
- 5.29 Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru
- 5.30 Multi-function Analog Inputs (Term. 14 & 16 )
- 5.31 Multi-function Analog Monitor Output (Term. 21-23)
- 5.32 Multi-function Input Terminals (Term. 3-8)
  - • Local/Remote
  - • External Base Block
  - • Speed Search
  - • Timer Function
  - • Sample/Hold Command
  - • Up/Down Frequency Setting
  - • Trim Control
- 5.33 Multi-function Output Terminals (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27)
  - • Frequency or Speed Detection Output Signals
- 5.34 Phase Loss Detection – Input
- 5.35 Phase Loss Detection – Output
- 5.36 PID Control
- 5.37 Reset Codes; 2-Wire, 3-Wire Initialization
- 5.38 Slip Compensation
- 5.39 Stall Prevention
- 5.40 Stopping Method
- 5.41 Thermal Overload Protection
- 5.42 Torque Compensation
- 5.43 Torque Control (Command)
- 5.44 Torque Detection
- 5.45 Torque Limit
  - 5.45.1 Two Motor Operation
- 5.46 User Parameters
- 5.47 V/f Pattern - Standard
- 5.48 V/f Pattern - Custom
- 5.49 Zero-Servo Control
- 5.50 Zero Speed Control
6 - FAULT INDICATION & TROUBLESHOOTING
- 6.1 General
- 6.2 Auto-Tuning Faults and Corrective Actions
- 6.3 Displaying Faults
- 6.4 Troubleshooting Flowcharts
- 6.5 Diode and IGBT (Transistor) Module Resistance Test
- 6.6 Checking Encoder Pulses
Appendix 1 - LISTING OF PARAMETERS
Appendix 2 - SPECIFICATIONS
Appendix 3 - CAPACITY & CONTROL METHOD RELATED PARAMETERS
Appendix 4 - GPD 515 /G5 SPARE PARTS
Appendix 5 - GPD 515/G5 DIMENSIONS
Appendix 6 - DYNAMIC BRAKING CONNECTIONS
Index
Rear Cover

GPD 515/G5 Technical Manual 04/01/02 SWV: 01114

GPD 515/G5 Drive

Technical Manual

Models: GPD515C- and CIMR-G5M Document Number: TM 4515

GPD 515/G5 Drive

YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.

Drives Division 16555 W. Ryerson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151, U.S.A.

Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (262) 782-3418

Internet: http://www.drives.com

YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.

Chicago-Corporate Headquarters

2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.

Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (847) 887-7310

Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com

MOTOMAN INC.

805 Liberty Lane, West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A.

Phone: (937) 847-6200 Fax: (937) 847-6277

Internet: http://www.motoman.com

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-0022, Japan

Phone: 81-3-5402-4511 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580

Internet: http://www.yaskawa.co.jp

YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA.

Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo-SP, Brasil CEP: 04304-000

Phone: 55-11-5071-2552 Fax: 55-11-5581-8795

Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com.br

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH

Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany

Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-888-301

MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB

Box 504 S38525, Torsas, Sweden

Phone: 46-486-48800 Fax: 46-486-41410

MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH

Kammerfeldstrabe 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany

Phone: 49-8166-900 Fax: 49-8166-9039

YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.

1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, Scotland, United Kingdom

Phone: 44-12-3673-5000 Fax: 44-12-3645-8182

YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION

Paik Nam Bldg. 901 188-3, 1-Ga Euljiro, Joong-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Phone: 82-2-776-7844 Fax: 82-2-753-2639

YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.

Head Office: 151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, Singapore

Phone: 65-282-3003 Fax: 65-289-3003

TAIPEI OFFICE (AND YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION)

10F 146 Sung Chiang Road, Taipei, Taiwan

Phone: 886-2-2563-0010 Fax: 886-2-2567-4677

YASKAWA JASON (HK) COMPANY LIMITED

Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong

Phone: 852-2803-2385 Fax: 852-2547-5773

BEIJING OFFICE

Room No. 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club,

21 Jianguomanwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China

Phone: 86-10-6532-1850 Fax: 86-10-6532-1851

SHANGHAI OFFICE

27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China

Phone: 86-21-6553-6600 Fax: 86-21-6531-4242

SHANGHAI YASKAWA-TONJI M & E CO., LTD.

27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China

Phone: 86-21-6533-2828 Fax: 86-21-6553-6677

BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO., LTD.

30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing 100083 China

Phone: 86-10-6232-9943 Fax: 86-10-6234-5002

SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.

7, Yongchang-North Street, Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area,

Beijing 100076 China

Phone: 86-10-6788-0551 Fax: 86-10-6788-2878

YEA, TAICHUNG OFFICE IN TAIWAIN

B1, 6F, No.51, Section 2, Kung-Yi Road, Taichung City, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Phone: 886-4-2320-2227 Fax:886-4-2320-2239

Document Number: TM4515 (Supercedes: YEA-TOA-S616-10.11 and 10.12) 04/01/2002 Software Version: 01114

Data subject to change without notice.

GPD 515/G5 SIMPLIFIED START-UP PROCEDURE ............. i
QUICK REFERENCE FOR GPD 515 PARAMETERS ............... xiv
CURRENT RATINGS & HORSEPOWER RANGE  .................... xvii
WARNING/CAUTION STATEMENTS ..................................... xviii
WARRANTY REGISTRATION  .................................................. xxi
INSTALLATION  ....................................................................... 1-1
1 General  ....................................................................................... 1-1
2 Receiving .................................................................................... 1 -1
3 Physical Installation .................................................................... 1 - 1
4 Electrical Installation  .................................................................. 1- 2
4.1 Main Circuit Input/Output  ..................................................... 1- 2
4.2 Grounding ............................................................................. 1-11
4.3 Auxiliary Input and Output Power Option Devices ............... 1-11
4.3a Conformance to European EMC Directive  ............................ 1-13
4.4 Control Circuit ...................................................................... 1-15
4.5 Interconnection - 2-Wire Control (Fig. 1-3)  ........................ 1-20
4.6 Interconnection - 3-Wire Control (Fig. 1-4)  ........................ 1-22
4.7 Encoder/PG-X2 Connections  ................................................ 1-24
INITIAL START-UP (“LOCAL” CONTROL) ......................... 2-1
1 Pre-power Checks  ...................................................................... 2-1
2 Control Method Selection ........................................................... 2-2
2a Power On and Preliminary Checks – Open Loop 
Vector Control ............................................................. 2 - 3
2b Power On and Preliminary Checks – Flux Vector Control ...... 2-6
2c Power On and Preliminary Checks – V/f Control .................. 2-11
2d Power On and Preliminary Checks – V/f with PG 
Feedback Control  ....................................................... 2-14
3 Changing the Language on the Digital Operator  ...................... 2-19
4 Calculating Motor Parameters ................................................... 2-20
5 Test Run Using Digital Operator ("Local" Control) ................... 2-24
6 Pre-operation Considerations .................................................... 2-27
7 Storage Function  ...................................................................... 2-27
OPERATION AT LOAD ........................................................... 3-1
DIGITAL OPERATOR ............................................................... 4- 1
1 General  ....................................................................................... 4-1
2 Display and Keypad .................................................................... 4-1
3 Digital Operator Menu Trees ...................................................... 4-4
4 Basic Programming ..................................................................... 4 - 8
5 Modes of Operation  ................................................................... 4-9
Release Date 4/01/2002
xi
CONTENTS
SUBJECT PAGE
PARAGRAPH

xii
PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES  ................................................ 5- 1
1 General  ....................................................................................... 5-1
2 Accel/Decel Time ....................................................................... 5 - 3
3 Accel/Decel: S-Curve Characteristics  ........................................ 5 - 6
4 Access Level  .............................................................................. 5-7
5 Auto-restart ............................................................................... 5-7
6 Automatic Frequency Regulator (AFR) Gain .............................. 5- 8
7 Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR)  ............................................ 5-9
8 Carrier Frequency ...................................................................... 5-12
9 Critical Frequency Rejection  ..................................................... 5-13
10 DC Injection Braking .................................................................. 5-14
11 Digital Operator Display Selection  ............................................ 5-17
12 Display – Monitor (at Power-up) Selection  ............................... 5-19
13 Droop  ........................................................................................ 5-19
14 Dwell ......................................................................................... 5-20
15 Encoder (PG) Parameters  ......................................................... 5-21
16 Energy Saving Operation ........................................................... 5-26
17 External Fault Inputs ................................................................. 5-28
18 Frequency Reference Command Bias/Gain  ............................... 5-29
19 Frequency Reference Input Signals (Auto/Manual)  .................. 5-31
20 Frequency Reference Loss Detection  ....................................... 5-33
21 Frequency Reference Retention ................................................ 5-33
22 Frequency Reference Upper & Lower Limits  ............................ 5-34
23 Hunting Prevention  ................................................................... 5-35
24 Jog Reference  ........................................................................... 5-36
25 Local Remote and Reference Selection  .................................... 5-39
25 A Local Remote Selection  ....................................................... 5-39
25 B Multiple Speed Reference Configuration [Multi-step 
Speed Operation] .......................................................... 5-40
26 Miscellaneous Parameters  ......................................................... 5-44
27 Miscellaneous Protective Features ............................................ 5-46
28 MODBUS Control  ....................................................................... 5-48
29 Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru ............................................. 5-50
30 Multi-function Analog Inputs (Term. 14 & 16 )  ....................... 5-53
31 Multi-function Analog Monitor Output (Term. 21-23) .............. 5-57
32 Multi-function Input Terminals (Term. 3-8) .............................. 5-58
• Local/Remote  ................................................................... 5-62
• External Base Block  .......................................................... 5-63
• Speed Search .................................................................... 5-64
• Timer Function .................................................................. 5-66
• Sample/Hold Command  .................................................... 5-66
• Up/Down Frequency Setting  ............................................ 5-67
• Trim Control ...................................................................... 5-69
SUBJECT PAGE
CONTENTS - Continued
PARAGRAPH

5.33 Multi-function Output Terminals (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27) ......... 5-70
• Frequency or Speed Detection Output Signals  ................ 5-73
5.34 Phase Loss Detection – Input  ................................................... 5-77
5.35 Phase Loss Detection – Output  ................................................ 5-77
5.36 PID Control ................................................................................ 5-78
5.37 Reset Codes; 2-Wire, 3-Wire Initialization  ................................ 5-83
5.38 Slip Compensation  .................................................................... 5-84
5.39 Stall Prevention ......................................................................... 5-86
5.40 Stopping Method ....................................................................... 5-88
5.41 Thermal Overload Protection  .................................................... 5-90
5.42 Torque Compensation ............................................................... 5-93
5.43 Torque Control (Command) ...................................................... 5-95
5.44 Torque Detection ...................................................................... 5-98
5.45 Torque Limit  ............................................................................ 5-101
5.45.1 Two Motor Operation ............................................................... 5-104
5.46 User Parameters  ...................................................................... 5-106
5.47 V/f Pattern - Standard  ............................................................ 5-106
5.48 V/f Pattern - Custom  .............................................................. 5-108
5.49 Zero-Servo Control ................................................................... 5-110
5.50 Zero Speed Control .................................................................. 5-112
6 FAULT INDICATION & TROUBLESHOOTING ....................... 6-1
6.1 General  ....................................................................................... 6-1
6.2 Auto-Tuning Faults and Corrective Actions ............................... 6-6
6.3 Displaying Faults  ........................................................................ 6- 7
6.4 Troubleshooting Flowcharts ...................................................... 6-10
6.5 Diode and IGBT (Transistor) Module Resistance Test  .............. 6-27
6.6 Checking Encoder Pulses  .......................................................... 6-29
App. 1 LISTING OF PARAMETERS .................................................... A1-1
App. 2 SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................... A2-1
App. 3 CAPACITY & CONTROL METHOD 
RELATED PARAMETERS  ....................................................... A3-1
App. 4 GPD 515/G5 SPARE PARTS  ............................................... A4-1
App. 5 GPD 515/G5 DIMENSIONS .................................................. A5-1
App. 6 DYNAMIC BRAKING CONNECTIONS  ................................... A6-1
Index ..................................................................................................... I-1
xiii
SUBJECT PAGE
CONTENTS - Continued
PARAGRAPH

QUICK REFERENCE FOR GPD 515/G5 PARAMETERS (FACTORY SET)
PARAMETER FACTORY USER PARA.
NUMBER (7) SETTING SETTING REF.
A1-00 0 2.3
A1-01 2 5.4
A1-02 2 2.2
A1-03 0 5.37
A1-04 0000 p. A1-1
A2-01
thru (1) (1) (1)
A2-32
b1-01 1 5.25 A
b1-02 1 5.25 A
b1-03 0 5.40
b1-04 0 p. A1-2
b1-05 0 5.50
b1-06 1 p. A1-2
b1-07 0 p. A1-2
b1-08 0 5.26
b2-01 0.5 5.10
b2-02 50 5.10
b2-03 0.00 5.10
b2-04 0.00 5.10
b2-08 0 5.10B
b3-01 0 (6) 5.32 D
b3-02 100 5.32 D
b3-03 2.0 5.32 D
b4-01 0.0 5.32 E
b4-02 0.0 5.32 E
b5-01 0 5.36
b5-02 1.00 5.36
b5-03 1.0 5.36
b5-04 100.0 5.36
b5-05 0.00 5.36
b5-06 100.0 5.36
b5-07 0.0 5.36
b5-08 0.00 5.36
b5-09 0 5.36D
b5-10 1.0 5.36D
b5-11 0 5.36D
b5-12 0 5.36E
b5-13 0 5.36E
b5-14 1.0 5.36E
b6-01 0.0 5.14
b6-02 0.0 5.14
b6-03 0.0 5.14
b6-04 0.0 5.14
b7-01 0.0 5.13
b7-02 0.05 5.13
b8-01 80 5.16A
b8-02 0.0 5.16A
b8-03 0 5.16B
b8-04 Note 2 5.16B
b8-05 Note 2 5.16B
b9-01 5 5.49
b9-02 10 5.49
C1-01 10.0 5.2
C1-02 10.0 5.2
C1-03 10.0 5.2
C1-04 10.0 5.2
C1-05 10.0 5.2
C1-06 10.0 5.2
xiv
PARAMETER FACTORY USER PARA.
NUMBER (7) SETTING SETTING REF.
C1-07 10.0 5.2
C1-08 10.0 5.2
C1-09 10.0 5.2
C1-10 1 5.2
C1-11 0.00 5.2
C2-01 0.20 5.3
C2-02 0.20 5.3
C2-03 0.20 5.3
C2-04 0.00 5.3
C3-01 1.0 (6) 5.38
C3-02 200 (6) 5.38
C3-03 200 5.38
C3-04 0 5.38
C3-05 0 5.38
C3-06 0 5.38
C4-01 1.00 5.42
C4-02 20 (6) 5.42
C4-03 0.0 5.42
C4-04 0.0 5.42
C4-05 10 5.42
C5-01 20.00 (6) 5.7
C5-02 0.500 (6) 5.7
C5-03 20.00 (6) 5.7
C5-04 0.500 (6) 5.7
C5-05 5.0 p. A1-8
C5-06 0.004 5.7
C5-07 0.0 5.7
C5-08 400 p. A1-8
C6-01 10.0 (5) 5.8
C6-02 10.0 (5) 5.8
C6-03 0 (5) 5.8
C7-01 1 5.23
C7-02 1.00 5.23
C8-08 1.00 5.6
C8-09 50 5.6
C8-30 2 p. A1-9
d1-01 0.0 5.25 B
d1-02 0.0 5.25 B
d1-03 0.0 5.25 B
d1-04 0.0 5.25 B
d1-05 0.0 5.25 B
d1-06 0.0 5.25 B
d1-07 0.0 5.25 B
d1-08 0.0 5.25 B
d1-09 6.0 5.25 B
d2-01 100.0 5.22
d2-02 0.0 5.22
d3-01 0.0 5.9
d3-02 0.0 5.9
d3-03 0.0 5.9
d3-04 1.0 5.9
d4-01 0 5.21
d4-02 10 5.32 H
d5-01 0 5.43
d5-02 0 5.43
d5-03 1 5.43
d5-04 0 5.43
d5-05 10 5.43
d5-06 0 5.43
PARAMETER FACTORY USER PARA.
NUMBER (7) SETTING SETTING REF.
230V,
E1-01 460V or 5.48
575V (5)
E1-02 0 5.41
E1-03 F 5.47
E1-04 60.0 5.48
230.0V,
E1-05 460.0V or 5.48
575.0V (5)
E1-06 60.0 5.48
E1-07 3.0 (6) 5.48
E1-08 (2) (6) 5.48
E1-09 0.5 (6) 5.48
E1-10 (2) (6) 5.48
E1-11 0.0  5.48
E1-12 0.0  5.48
E1-13 0.0  5.48
E2-01 (5) 5.41
E2-02 (5) 2.4
E2-03 (5) 2.4
E2-04 4 2.4
E2-05 (5) 2.4
E2-06 (5) 2.4
E2-07 0.50 (5) 2.4
E2-08 0.75 (5) 2.4
E2-09 0.0 (5) 2.4
E2-10 (See Note 3) p. A1-13
E3-01 2 5.45.1
E4-01 60.0  230.0V, 5.45.1
E4-02 460.0V or 5.45.1
E4-03 60.0  575.0V (5) 5.45.1
E4-04 3.0 (6) 5.45.1
E4-05 (2) (6) 5.45.1
E4-06 0.5 (6) 5.45.1
E4-07 (2) (6) 5.45.1
E5-01 (5) 5.45.1
E5-02 (5) 5.45.1
E5-03 (5) 5.45.1
E5-04 4  5.45.1
E5-05 (5) 5.45.1
E5-06 (5) 5.45.1
F1-01 1024 5.15 A
F1-02 1 5.15 B
F1-03 1 5.15 C
F1-04 3 5.15 D
F1-05 0 5.15 E
F1-06 1 (8)
F1-07 0 5.15 F
F1-08 115 5.15 C
F1-09 0.0 (6) 5.15 C
F1-10 10 5.15 D
F1-11 0.5 5.15 D
F1-12 0 5.15 G
F1-13 0 5.15 G
F1-14 2.0 5.15 B
F2-01 0 (9)
F3-01 0 (10)

QUICK REFERENCE FOR GPD 515/G5 PARAMETERS (FACTORY SET)
xv
PARAMETER FACTORY USER PARA.
NUMBER (7) SETTING SETTING REF.
F4-01 2 (11)
F4-02 1.00 (11)
F4-03 3 (11)
F4-04 0.50 (11)
F4-05 0.0 (11)
F4-06 0.0 (11)
F5-01 0 (12)
F5-02 1 (12)
F6-01 0 (13)
F7-01 1 (14)
F8-01 1 
p. A1-17
F9-01 0 p. A1-17
F9-02 0 p. A1-17
F9-03 1 p. A1-17
F9-04 0 p. A1-17
F9-05 1 p. A1-17
F9-06 1 p. A1-17
H1-01 24 5.32
H1-02 14 5.32
H1-03 3 (0) (3) 5.32
H1-04 4 (3) (3) 5.32
H1-05 6 (4) (3) 5.32
H1-06 8 (6) (3) 5.32
H2-01 0 5.33
H2-02 1 5.33
H2-03 2 5.33
H3-01 0 5.19
H3-02 100.0 5.18
H3-03 0.0 5.18
H3-04 0 5.19
H3-05 0 5.30
H3-06 100.0 5.18
H3-07 0.0 5.18
H3-08 2 5.19
H3-09 1F 5.30
H3-10 100.0 5.18
H3-11 0.0 5.18
H3-12 0.00 
p. A1-19
PARAMETER FACTORY USER PARA.
NUMBER (7) SETTING SETTING REF.
H4-01 2 5.31
H4-02 1.00 5.31
H4-03 0.0 5.31
H4-04 3 5.31
H4-05 0.50 5.31
H4-06 0.0 5.31
H4-07 0 5.31
H5-01 1F 5.28
H5-02 3 5.28
H5-03 0 5.28
H5-04 3 5.28
H5-05 1 5.28
L1-01 1 5.41
L1-02 8.0 5.41
L2-01 0 5.29
L2-02 0.7 (5) 5.29
L2-03 0.5 (5) 5.32 D
L2-04 (5) 190, 5.29
L2-05 190 380, or 5.29
L2-06 0.0 546 (5) 
p. A1-21
L3-01 1 5.39
L3-02 150 5.39
L3-03 50  5.39
L3-04 1 5.39
L3-05 1 5.39
L3-06 160 5.39
L4-01 0.0 5.33
L4-02 2.0 5.33
L4-03 0.0 5.33
L4-04 2.0 5.33
L4-05 0 5.20
L5-01 0 5.5
L5-02 0 5.5
L6-01 0 5.44
L6-02 150 5.44
L6-03 0.1 5.44
PARAMETER FACTORY USER PARA.
NUMBER (7) SETTING SETTING REF.
L6-04 0 5.44
L6-05 150 5.44
L6-06 0.1 5.44
L7-01 200 5.45
L7-02 200 5.45
L7-03 200 5.45
L7-04 200 5.45
L8-01 0 5.27
L8-02 (5) 5.27
L8-03 3 5.27
L8-05 0 5.34
L8-07 1  5.35
L8-10 1 5.27
L8-17 1 5.27
L8-19 0 5.27
o1-01 6 5.12
o1-02 1 5.12
o1-03 0 5.11
o1-04 0 5.11
o1-05 0 5.11
o2-01 1 5.26
o2-02 1 5.26
o2-03 0 5.46
o2-04 (5) p. A3-1
o2-05 0 5.26
o2-06 1 5.26
o2-07 00000 5.26
o2-08 0 5.26
o2-09 1 
p. A1-26
U1-01
thru (4) —— (4)
U1-34
U2-01
thru (4) —— (4)
U2-14
U3-01
thru (4) —— (4)
U3-08
(1) To establish a custom User Access Level, refer to paragraph 5.4.
(2) Initial value is related to V/f curve selected by E1-03 setting.
(3) Settings in parentheses reflect 3-wire control initialization values.
(4) Monitor displays ( UX-XX ) are display or output selections, rather than parameter setup; therefore, user setting is not
possible.
(5) Factory setting depends on drive rating. See Table A3-1.
(6) Factory setting depends on Control Method ( A1-02 ).
(7) Not all parameters are accessible in all Access Levels ( A1-01 ) and Control Methods ( A1-02 ); see Section 5.
(8) Only effective with PG-D2 or PG-B2 option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-396.
(9) Only effective with AI-14B or AI-14U option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-296 or -295.
(10) Only effective with DI-08 or DI-16H2 option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-294 or -400.
(11) Only effective with AO-08, AO-12 or AO-12B2 option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-297 or -438.
(12) Only effective with DO-02C option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-402.
(13) Only effective with DO-08 option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-350.
(14) Only effective with PO-36F option card; see instruction sheet 2Y25-298.

xvii

Current Ratings & Horsepower Range

NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE

RATED CURRENT NOMINAL HORSEPOWER MODEL NO. MODEL NO.

INPUT RATING (AMPS) (150% OL) CIMR-G5M GPD515C-

3.2 0.75 20P41F A003

6 1 & 1.5 20P71F A006

8 2 21P51F A008

11 3 22P21F A011

17.5 5 23P71F A017

2 25 7.5 25P51F A025

3 33 10 27P51F A033

0 49 15 20111F A049

V 64 20 20151F A064

80 25 & 30 20181F A080

96 30 20221F A096

130 40 & 50 20300F A130

160 60 20370F A160

224 75 20550F A224

300 100 20750F A300

1.8 0.75 40P41F B001

3.4 1 & 2 40P71F B003

4.8 3 41P51F B004

8 5 43P71F B008

11 7.5 44P01F B011

14 10 45P51F B014

21 15 47P51F B021

27 20 40111F B027

4 34 25 40151F B034

6 41 30 40181F B041

0 52 40 40221F B052

V 65 50 40301F B065

80 60 40371F B080

96 75 40451F B096

128 100 40551F B128

165 125 40750F B165

224 150 41100F B224

302 200 & 250 41600F B302

340 300 41850F B340

450 350 42200F B450

605 400 & 500 43000F B605

3.5 2 51P51F C003

4.1 3 52P21F C004

6.3 5 53P71F C006

9.8 7.5 55P51F C010

12.5 10 57P51F C012

6 17 15 50111F C017

0 22 20 50151F C022

0 27 25 50181F C027

V 32 30 50221F C032

41 40 50301F C041

52 50 50371F C052

62 60 50451F C062

77 75 50551F C077

99 100 50751F C099

130 125 50900F C130

172 150 51100F C172

200 200 51600F C200

xviii

Data subject to change without notice.

WARNING

Do not touch circuit components until main input power has been turned off and

“CHARGE” lamp is extinguished. The capacitors are still charged and can be quite

dangerous.

Do not connect or disconnect wires and connectors while power is applied to the

circuit.

CAUTION

Know your application before using either Initialization function of A1-03 . This

parameter must be set to " 0 " for Drive mode operation.

" 1110 " = User Default Parameter Initialization

" 2220 " = Factory 2-Wire Control Initialization (Maintained RUN Contact)

" 3330 " = Factory 3-Wire Control Initialization (Momentary START/STOP

Contact)

Entering any Initialization code resets all parameters, and automatically returns

A1-03 setting to " 0 ". If the GPD 515 is connected for 3-Wire control and this param-

eter is set to " 2220 " (2-Wire Control Initialization), the motor may run in reverse

direction WITHOUT A RUN COMMAND APPLIED. Equipment damage or personal

injury may result.

CAUTION

When drive is programmed for auto-restart ( L5-02 = " 1 " thru " 10 "), the motor may

restart unexpectedly — personal injury may result.

IMPORTANT

Wiring should be performed only by qualified personnel.

Always ground the drive using ground terminal ( ). See paragraph 1.4.3, "Grounding".

Verify that the rated voltage of the drive matches the voltage of the incoming power.

Never connect main circuit output terminals T1, T2, and T3 to AC main circuit power supply.

All parameters have been factory set. Do not change their settings unnecessarily.

Do not perform a “HIPOT” or withstand voltage test on any part of the drive. Equipment

uses semi-conductors and is vulnerable to high voltage.

The Control PCB employs CMOS ICs which are easily damaged by static electricity. Use prop-

er electrostatic discharge (ESD) procedures when handling the Control PCB.

Any modification of the product by the user is not the responsibility of Yaskawa, and will

void the warranty.

xix

It is important that users of our products have a

totally satisfying ownership experience.

Training is one of the most effective ways to ensure

that satisfaction. Because of this conviction,

Yaskawa Electric has operated a full-time professional

training department since 1965.

Our trainers are full-time instructors, with a

wealth of “real-life” product experience gained

through field service at customer facilities. This

experience, combined with backgrounds in engineer-

ing and education, has earned national recognition

for our technical training programs.

Courses are conducted at the headquarters training

facility, in selected cities, and at customer sites.

Courses are available to cover all the issues of

concern to product users: application, theory of

operation, troubleshooting and repair, adjustment

and startup, operation, programming, network communication, and optimizing the functions of Yaskawa drives.

We work hard to make all of our products user-friendly, and our owner manuals easy to use.

In spite of that, the simple fact is that you will learn better and faster in a class environment combined with hands-on practice,

than by self-teaching when under the stress of a maintenance or operations problem.

On-Site Training and Customized Courses

Training courses are also provided at the user’s site. Course content can be customized to the specific installation and applica-

tion if requested. For further information about on-site training and courses specific to your installation and application, visit our

website at www.drives.com.

Please send training information on:

Name ______________________________________________________________________________________________

Position/Title ________________________________________________________________________________________

Company ___________________________________________________________________________________________

Address ____________________________________________________________________________________________

City _______________________________________________State _______________Zip __________________________

Phone______________________________________________________________________________________________

Fax ________________________________________________________________________________________________

Representative (if known): ______________________________________________________________________________

FAX this completed form to (847) 887-7185

Technical Training

TM 4515

The GPD 515/G5, hereafter referred to as the drive, is a general purpose sine-coded pulse

width modulated AC motor drive which generates an adjustable voltage/frequency three

phase output for complete speed control of most conventional squirrel cage induction

motors. Automatic stall prevention and voltage boost prevents nuisance tripping during load

or line side transient conditions. The drive will not induce any voltage line notching distortion

back to the utility line and maintains a displacement power factor of not less than 0.98

throughout its speed range.

When properly installed, operated and maintained, the drive will provide a lifetime of

service. It is mandatory that the person who operates, inspects, or maintains this

equipment thoroughly read and understand this manual before proceeding.

This manual primarily describes the GPD 515/G5, but contains basic information for the

operator control station as well. This manual is equally applicable to drives labelled

GPD 515 or G5.

The drive is thoroughly tested at the factory. After unpacking, verify the part numbers

with the purchase order (invoice). Any damages or shortages evident when the equipment

is received must be reported immediately to the commercial carrier who transported the

equipment. Assistance, if required, is available from your sales representative.

If the drive will be stored after receiving, keep it in its original packaging and store

according to storage temperature specifications in Appendix 2.

Location of the drive is important to achieve proper performance and normal operating life.

The unit should be installed in an area where it will be protected from:

• Direct sunlight, rain or moisture.

• Corrosive gases or liquids.

• Vibration, airborne dust or metallic particles.

When preparing to mount the drive, lift it by its base, never by the front cover. For

effective cooling as well as proper maintenance, the drive must be installed on a flat, non-

flammable vertical surface (wall or panel) using four mounting screws. There MUST be a

MINIMUM 4.7 in. clearance above and below the drive to allow air flow over the heat sink

fins. A minimum 1.2 in. clearance is required on each side on the drive.

A GPD 515/G5 in a free-standing floor-mount cabinet must be positioned with enough

clear-ance for opening the door of the cabinet; this will ensure sufficient air space for

cooling. Make sure air entering the drive is below 113°F (45°C) (for protected chassis

drives), or below 104°F (40°C) (for NEMA 1 drives), by adding a fan or other cooling

device, if needed. See environmental specifications in Appendix 2.

1-1

Section 1. RECEIVING AND INSTALLATION

1.1 GENERAL

1.2 RECEIVING

1.3 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION

All basic interconnections (using the Digital Operator) are shown in Figures 1-3 and 1-4.

1.4.1 Main Circuit Input/Output

Complete wire interconnections according to Table 1-2, Figure 1-3 and Figure 1-4. Be sure to

observe the following:

• Use 600V vinyl-sheathed wire or equivalent. Wire size and type should be determined by local

electrical codes.

• Avoid routing power wiring near equipment sensitive to electrical noise.

• Avoid running input and output wiring in the same conduit.

• NEVER connect AC main power to output terminals T1(U), T2(V), and T3(W).

• NEVER allow wire leads to contact metal surfaces. Short-circuit may result.

• NEVER connect power factor correction capacitors to the drive output. Consult

Yaskawa when connecting noise filters to the drive output.

• WIRE SIZING MUST BE SUITABLE FOR CLASS I CIRCUITS.

• When connecting motor to drive’s output terminals, include a separate ground wire. Attach ground

wire solidly to motor frame and to drive’s ground terminal.

• When using armored or shielded cable for connection between drive and motor, solidly connect

armor or shield to motor frame, and to drive’s ground terminal.

• Motor lead length should NOT EXCEED 164 feet (50 meters), and motor wiring should be run in

a separate conduit from other power wiring. If lead length must exceed this distance, reduce

carrier frequency (see paragraph 5.8) and consult factory for proper installation procedures.

• Use UL listed closed loop connectors or CSA certified ring connectors sized for the selected wire

gauge. Install connectors using the correct crimp tool recommended by the connector

manufacturer.

1-2

1.4 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

WIRE SIZE TERMINAL CLOSED-LOOP CLAMPING TORQUE

AWG mm2SCREW CONNECTOR STEEL COPPER

lb-in N-m lb-in N-m

20 0.5 M3.5 1.25 - 3.5 7.8 0.9 7.0 0.8

18 0.75 M4 1.25 - 4 13.0 1.5 10.4 1.2

16 1.25 M4 1.25 - 4 13.0 1.5 10.4 1.2

M4 2 - 4 13.0 1.5 10.4 1.2

14 2 M5 2 - 5 26.1 20.9 3.1 2.4

M4 3.5 - 4 13.0 1.5 10.4 1.2

12 3.5 M5 3.5 - 5 26.1 20.9 3.1 2.4

M4 5.5 - 4 13.0 1.5 10.4 1.2

10 5.5 M5 5.5 - 5 26.1 20.9 3.1 2.4

M5 8 - 5 26.1 20.9 3.1 2.4

88 M6 8 - 6 40.9 34.8 4.8 4.1

6 14 M6 14 - 6 40.9 34.8 4.8 4.1

4 22 M8 22 - 8 100.0 82.6 11.7 10.7

M8 38 - 8 100.0 82.6 11.7 10.7

238 M10 38 - 10 182.6 156.5 21.4 18.4

1/0 60 M10 60 - 10 182.6 156.5 21.4 18.4

3/0 80 M10 80 - 10 182.6 156.5 21.4 18.4

M10 100 - 10 182.6 156.5 21.4 18.4

4/0 100 M12 100 - 12 313.0 191.3 36.7 23.1

MCM300 150 M12 150 - 12 313.0 191.3 36.7 23.1

MCM400 200 M12 200 - 12 313.0 191.3 36.7 23.1

M12 325 - 12 313.0 191.3 36.7 23.1

MCM650 325 M16 325 - 16 313.0 191.3 36.7 23.1

1-3

HP TERMINAL WIRE SIZE

RATING TERMINAL SYMBOL SCREW AWG MM2

20P41F A003, L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, M4 14 - 10 2 - 5.5

20P71F A006 T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W),

21P51F A008 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M4 14 - 10 2 - 5.5

T2 (V), T3 (W)

M4 12 - 10 3.5 - 5.5

22P21F A011 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M4 12 - 10 3.5 - 5.5

T2 (V), T3 (W),

23P71F A017 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M4 10 5.5

T2 (V), T3 (W),

25P51F A025, L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M5 8 8

27P51F A033 T2 (V), T3 (W)

M5 10 - 8 5.5 - 8

20111F A049 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U), M6 4 22

T2 (V), T3 (W)

M6 8 8

20151F A064 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U), M8 3 30

T2 (V), T3 (W)

M6 8 8

20181F A080, L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U), M8 3 30

20221F A096 T2 (V), T3 (W)

M8 6 14

1 (r),

2 (

) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

20300F A130 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M10 4/0 100

, ⊕3, M8 4 22

1 (r),

2 (

) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

20370F A160 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M10 1/0 x 2P 60 x 2P

, ⊕3, M8 4 22

1 (r),

2 (

) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

20550F A224 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M10 1/0 x 2P 60 x 2P

, ⊕3, M8 3 30

1 (r),

2 (

) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

20750F A300 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M12 4/0 x 2P 100 x 2P

, ⊕3, M8 1 50

1 (r),

2 (

) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

SECTION A. 230V

NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE

TERMINAL

WIRE SIZE

MODEL NO. MODEL NO. TERMINAL SYMBOL

CIMR-G5M GPD515C– SCREW AWG mm2

Table 1-1. Typical Wire Sizing For Main Circuit*

* Consult local electrical codes for wire sizing requirements.

1-4

DRIVE TERMINAL WIRE SIZE

MODEL NO. TERMINAL SYMBOL SCREW AWG mm2

40P41F B001 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M4 14 - 10 2 - 5.5

T2 (V), T3 (W),

40P71F B003, L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M4 14 - 10 2 - 5.5

41P51F B004, T2 (V), T3 (W)

43P71F B008 M4 12 - 10 3.5 - 5.5

44P01F B011, L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M4 12 - 10 3.5 - 5.5

45P51F B014 T2 (V), T3 (W),

47P51F B021 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M4 8 - 6 8 - 14

T2 (V), T3 (W),

40111F B027, L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M5 8 - 6 8 - 14

40151F B034 T2 (V), T3 (W)

M6 8 8

40181F B041 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U), M6 6 14

T2 (V), T3 (W)

M8 8 8

1 (r),

2 (

) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

40221F B052 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U), M6 4 22

T2 (V), T3 (W)

M8 8 8

1 (r),

2 (

) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

40301F B065 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U), M8 4 22

T2 (V), T3 (W)

M8 8 8

1 (r),

2 (

) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

40371F B080 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U), M8 3 30

T2 (V), T3 (W)

M8 6 14

1 (r),

2 (

) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

40451F B096 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, ⊕3, T1 (U), M8 1 50

T2 (V), T3 (W)

M8 6 14

1 (r),

2 (

) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

40551F B128 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M10 4/0 100

, ⊕3, M8 4 22

1 (r),

2 200 (

200),

2 400 (

400) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

40750F B165 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M10 1/0 x 2P 60 x 2P

, ⊕3, M8 4 22

1 (r),

2 200 (

200),

2 400 (

400) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

41100F B224 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M10 1/0 x 2P 60 x 2P

, ⊕3, M8 3 30

1 (r),

2 200 (

200),

2 400 (

400) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

41600F B302 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M12 4/0 x 2P 100 x 2P

, ⊕3, M8 1 50

1 (r),

2 200 (

200),

2 400 (

400) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

41850F B340, L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕3, T1 (U), T2 (V), M16

MCM650 x 2P

325 x 2P

42200F B450, T3 (W)

43000F B605 M8 1/0 60

1 (r),

2 200 (

200),

2 400 (

400) M4 20 - 10 0.5 - 5.5

Section B. 460V

NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE

TERMINAL

WIRE SIZE

MODEL NO. MODEL NO. TERMINAL SYMBOL

CIMR-G5M GPD515C– SCREW AWG mm2

Table 1-1. Typical Wire Sizing For Main Circuit - Continued*

* Consult local electrical codes for wire sizing requirements.

1-5

DRIVE TERMINAL WIRE SIZE

MODEL NO.TERMINAL SYMBOL SCREW AWG mm2

51P51F C003, L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M4 14-10 2 - 5.5

52P21F C004 T2 (V), T3 (W)

53P71F C006 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M4 14-10 2 - 5.5

T2 (V), T3 (W)

12-10 3.5-5.5

55P51F C010 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M4 12-10 3.5-5.5

T2 (V), T3 (W)

57P51F C012 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M4 10 5.5

T2 (V), T3 (W)

12-10 3.5-5.5

50111F C017 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M5 10-6 5.5-14

T2 (V), T3 (W)

50151F C022 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T), , ⊕1, ⊕2, B1, B2, T1 (U), M5 8-6 8-14

T2 (V), T3 (W)

M6 10-6 5.5-14

50181F C027 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

⊕1, B1, B2, T1 (U), M6 8-6 8-14

50221F C032 T2 (V), T3 (W)

◆10-6 5.5-14

1 (r),

) M4 14 - 10 2 - 5.5

50301F C041 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M8 6-1/0 14-50

◆8-2 8-30

1 (r),

) M4 14 - 10 2 - 5.5

50371F C052 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M8 4-1/0 22-50

◆8-2 8-30

1 (r),

) M4 14 - 10 2 - 5.5

50451F C062 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M8 3-1/0 30-50

◆8-2 8-30

1 (r),

) M4 14 - 10 2 - 5.5

50551F C077 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M8 2-1/0 30-50

◆6-2 22-30

1 (r),

) M4 14 - 10 2 - 5.5

50751F C099 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M8 2/0-1/0 50-60

◆4-2 22-30

1 (r),

) M4 14 - 10 2 - 5.5

50900F C130 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M10 3/0-300 80-150

◆4-2/0 22-60

1 (r),

) M4 14 - 10 2 - 5.5

51100F C172 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M12 300-400 150-200

◆4-2/0 22-60

1 (r),

) M4 14 - 10 2 - 5.5

51600F C200 L1 (R), L2 (S), L3 (T),

⊕1, T1 (U), T2 (V), T3 (W) M12 350-400 180-200

◆3-2/0 30-60

1 (r),

) M4 14 - 10 2 - 5.5

Section C. 600V

NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE

TERMINAL

WIRE SIZE

MODEL NO. MODEL NO. TERMINAL SYMBOL

CIMR-G5M GPD515C– SCREW AWG mm2

◆Indicates terminal uses a pressure lug.

* Consult local electrical codes for wire sizing requirements.

Table 1-1. Typical Wire Sizing For Main Circuit - Continued*

SECTION A. 230V

TERMINAL FUNCTION

1 HP 3 TO 40 HP

L1 (R) Three phase Main circuit input power supply

L2 (S) 200 / 208 / 220V at 50 Hz; 200 / 208 / 220 / 230V at 60 Hz

L3 (T)

T1 (U) Three phase AC output to motor

T2 (V) 0V to max. input voltage level

T3 (W)

B2 DB Resistor terminals (B1 & B2) – – – – – –

⊕1 DC Reactor terminals (⊕1 & ⊕2)

⊕2 DC Bus terminals (⊕1 & ) – – – – – –

⊕3 – – – – – – DB Unit terminals (⊕3 & )

1(r) Power for heat sink fan:

) – – – – – –

1to

2: 230 VAC

Ground terminal (100 ohms or less)

SECTION B. 460V

TERMINAL FUNCTION 1 TO 60 HP

L1 (R) Three phase Main circuit input power supply

L2 (S) 380 / 400 / 415 / 460V at 50/60 Hz

L3 (T)

T1 (U) Three phase AC output to motor

T2 (V) 0V to max. input voltage level

T3 (W)

B2 DB Resistor terminals (B1 & B2) – – – – – –

⊕1 DC Reactor terminals (⊕1 & ⊕2)

⊕2 DC Bus terminals (⊕1 & ) – – – – – –

⊕3 – – – – – – DB Unit terminals (⊕3 & )

1(r) Power for heat sink fan: Power for heat sink fan:

)

1to

2: 230 VAC

1to

2200: 230 Vac

2200 (

200) – – – – – –

1to

2400: 460 Vac

2400 (

400) – – – – – –

Ground terminal

SECTION A. 230V

FUNCTION

New Model No. 20P41F - 20111F - 20151F 20181F 20300F - 20750F

TERMINAL CIMR-G5M 27P51F 20221F

Old Model No. A003 - A033 A049 - A064 A080, - A130 - A300

GPD515C- A096

1-6

Table 1-2. Terminal Functions and Voltages of Main Circuit

– – – – – indicates that terminals are not present.

SECTION B. 460V

FUNCTION

New Model No. 40P41F - 40151F 40181F - 40451F 40551F - 43000F

TERMINAL CIMR-G5M

Old Model No. B001 - B034 B041 - B096 B128 - B605

GPD515C-

L1 (R) Three phase Main circuit input power supply

L2 (S) 500 / 575 / 600V at 50 Hz / 60HZ

L3 (T)

T1 (U) Three phase AC output to motor

T2 (V) 0V to max. input voltage level

T3 (W)

B2 DB Resistor terminals (B1 & B2)

⊕1

⊕2

1(r) Power for heat sink fan:

)

1to

2: 600 VAC

DB Units terminals (⊕1 & ) (C041 to C200 only)

DC Bus terminals (⊕1 & )

DC Reactor terminals (⊕1 & ⊕2)

DC Bus terminals (⊕1 & )

Ground terminal (100 ohms or less)

SECTION C. 600V

FUNCTION

New Model No. 51P51F - 50151F 50181F - 50221F 50301F - 51600F

TERMINAL CIMR-G5M

Old Model No. C003 - C022 C027 - C032 C041 - C200

GPD515C-

1-7

Table 1-2. Terminal Functions and Voltages of Main Circuit

Main Circuit Configuration Block Diagrams 230V

CIMR-G5M20P41F to 27P51F

GPD515C-A003 to -A033

CIMR-G5M20111F to 20151F

GPD515C-A049 to -A064

CIMR-G5M20181F, 20221F

GPD515C-A080, -A096

CIMR-G5M20300F to 20750F

GPD515C-A130 to -A300

1-8

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Cooling Fan

(A011 to A033 only)

(RCC)

U (T1)

V (T2)

W (T3)

(DCL

Option)

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Cooling Fan

(RCC)

U (T1)

V (T2)

W (T3)

(DCL

Option)

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Internal

Cooling Fan

(RCC)

U (T1)

V (T2)

W (T3)

Cooling Fan

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Internal

Cooling Fan

(RCC)

U (T1)

V (T2)

W (T3)

Cooling Fan

When using DC input as main circuit

power, connect 230Vac to control power

transformer terminals l(r) and l(s).

When using DC input as main circuit

power, connect 230Vac to control power

transformer terminals l(r) and l(s).

1-9

Main Circuit Configuration Block Diagrams 460V

CIMR-G5M40P41F to 40151F

GPD515C- B001 to - B034

CIMR-G5M40181F to 40451F

GPD515C- B041 to - B096

CIMR-G5M40551F to 41600F

GPD515C- B128 to - B302

CIMR-G5M41850F to 43000F

GPD515C- B340 to - B605

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Internal

Cooling Fan

(RCC)

U (T1)

V (T2)

W (T3)

Cooling Fan

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Cooling Fan

(B008 to B034 only)

(RCC)

U (T1)

V (T2)

W (T3)

(DCL

Option)

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Internal

Cooling Fan

(RCC)

U (T1)

V (T2)

W (T3)

Cooling Fan

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

(RCC)

U (T1)

V (T2)

W (T3)

Cooling Fan

When using DC input as main circuit

power, connect 460Vac to control power

transformer terminals l1(r) and l2(s).

When using DC input as main circuit

power, connect 460Vac to control

power transformer terminals l1(r) and

l2400 (s400).

When using DC input as main

circuit power, connect 460Vac to

control power transformer

terminals l1(r) and l2400 (s400).

1-10

Main Circuit Configuration Block Diagrams 600V

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

Cooling Fan

(RCC)

U (T1)

V (T2)

W (T3)

(DCL

Option)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

(RCC)

U (T1)

V (T2)

W (T3)

Cooling Fan

L1 (R)

B2B1

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

Power

Supply

Control

Circuit

(RCC)

U (T1)

V (T2)

W (T3)

Cooling Fan

CIMR-G5M51P51F to 50151F

GPD515C- C003 to - C022

CIMR-G5M50181F to 50221F

GPD515C-C027 to -C032

CIMR-G5M50301F to 51600F

GPD515C-C041 to -C200

When using DC input as main circuit

power, connect 600Vac to control

power transformer terminals r and s.

When using DC input as main circuit

power, connect 600Vac to control

power transformer terminals r and s.

When using DC input as main

circuit power, connect 600Vac to

control power transformer

terminals r and s.

1.4.2 Grounding

•The drive must be solidly grounded using the main circuit ground terminal.

•If Drive is installed in a cabinet with other equipment, ground leads for all equipment should be

connected to a common low-impedance ground point within the cabinet.

•The supply neutral should be connected to the ground point within the cabinet.

•Select appropriate ground wire size from Table 1-1.

•Make all ground wires as short as practical.

•NEVER ground the drive in common with welding machines or other high power electrical

equipment.

•Where several drives are used, ground each directly to the ground point (see Figure 1-1). DO

NOT FORM A LOOP WITH THE GROUND LEADS.

•When connecting a motor to the drive’s output terminals, include a separate ground wire. Attach

ground wire solidly to motor frame and to drive’s ground terminal.

•When using armored or shielded cable for connection between drive and motor, solidly connect

armor or shield to motor frame, and to the drive’s ground terminal.

A disconnect device (circuit breaker, contactor, disconnect switch, etc.) should NOT be used as a

means of starting and stopping the drive or motor.

A disconnect device can be installed for emergency stop purposes, but when that disconnect

device is opened, there may be loss of electrical braking.

1-11

Figure 1-1. Grounding

A. Grounding of Three Drives

B. Grounding of Drive & Vector Control Motor (VCM)

PREFERRED NOT RECOMMENDED NOT

ACCEPTABLE

CORRECT NOT RECOMMENDED

1.4.3 Auxiliary Input and Output Power Option Devices

1-12

TRANSFORMER

INPUT

REACTOR

INPUT

RFI FILTER

C1(L3)

B1(L2)

A1(L1)

(L3)C2

(L2)B2

(L1)A2

CUSTOMER'S

3Ø A.C. LINE

POWER

SUPPLY

PANEL GROUND

SEE NOTE 2

(G)

RF NOISE

FILTER

SEE NOTE 5

SEE NOTE 3

L3L2L1

T2T1

INPUT

OUTPUT

Drive

PANEL GROUND

SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTES 3, 4

OUTPUT

REACTOR

OUTPUT

RFI FILTER

SEE NOTES 3, 4

A.C. MOTOR

123

456

OUT

T3T2T1

C1B1A1

C2B2A2

PANEL GROUND

SEE NOTE 2

SEE NOTE 6

REACTOR

+ 1

+ 2

PANEL

GROUND

SEE NOTE 2

ISOLATION

Figure 1-2. Customer Connection Diagram For Isolation Transformers, Input

Reactors, Input RFI Filters, DC Reactors, Output Reactors and Output RFI FIlters

NOTES

1. Connect drive ground terminal or panel to

earth ground. Always use low impedance

paths and connections.

2. Mount input and output RFI filters

physically

as close to the drive as possible (on the same

panel, if possible). Filters should have a solid

connection from filter ground terminal to the

cabinet ground point. If multiple input or

output RFI filters are used, they must be

wired in parallel.

3. Shield individual conductors with metallic

conduit, or use armored or shielded cable.

4. Connect output conduit armored cable or

shielded cable in a manner that allows it to

act as an unbroken shield from the drive

panel to the motor casing.

5. RF noise filter (different from RFI filter) part

no. 05P00325-0023 is a delta wye capacitor

network which is wired in parallel with the

drive input terminals. On the smaller drives

with die cast chassis, it must be mounted

externally. On the larger drives with sheet

metal chassis, it may be mounted inside the

area where the input power wiring enters the

drive. On units equipped with bypass, it may

be wired to the primary side of the circuit

breaker and mounted to the bypass panel or

sidewall.

6. Connection points:

Drive Terminals

Input

Power L1, L2, L3

Output Power

T1, T2, T3

Figure 1-2 is a factory guideline for proper wiring practices and relative locations within the electrical

path from the line to the load. It does not imply what devices are needed for a particular

application, nor does it show what devices were shipped with a particular order. Therefore,

disregard those items in the diagram which are not being used in your installation. However, it is

recommended that an input or DC reactor be used with models GPD515C-A003 thru -A064

(CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 20151F), -B001 thru -B034 (40P41F thru 40151F) , and -C003 thru -C062

(51P51F thru 51451F) when wired to a source of 600 kVA or greater. Mount all optional power

devices close to the drive, and keep electrical connections as short as possible.

1.4.3a Conformance to European EMC Directive

In order to conform to EMC standards, the following methods are required for line filter

application, cable shielding and drive installation. The following explains the outline of the

methods.

The line filter and the drive must be mounted on the same metal plate. The filter should

be mounted as close to the drive as practical. The cable must be kept as short as possible

and the metal plate should be securely grounded. The ground of the line filter and the

drive must be bonded to the metal plate with as much bare-metal contact as possible.

For main circuit input cables, a screened cable is recommended within the panel, and is

also suggested for external connections. The screen of the cable should be connected to

a solid ground. For the motor cables, a screened cable (max. 20 m) must be used and the

screen of the motor cable should be connected to ground at both ends by a short

connection, again using as much bare-metal contact as possible.

For more detailed explanation, refer to document EZZ006543, “Installation Guidelines For EMC

Directive using Yaskawa AC Drive Products.”

Table 1-2.1 and Figure 1-2A show the line filter list for EMC standards and the

installation/wiring of the drive and line filter.

Table 1-2.1. Line Filters for Drive

New Drive Model Old Drive Model Line Filter

Number Number Part Number Rated Mass Dimensions in mm(1)

CIMR-G5M GPD 515C- 05P00325- Current (A) (kg) L x W x D (2)

40P41F, B001,

40P71F B003 0106 8 1.8 320 x 143 x 46

41P51F, B004,

43P71F, B008, 0103 20 1.8 320 x 143 x 46

44P01F B011

45P51F, B014, 0104 30 3.0 350 x 213 x 51

47P51F B021

40111F, B027, 0105 60 5.3 435 x 268 x 56

40151F B034

40181F, B041, 0107 80 7.5 350 x 180 x 90

40221F B052

40301F B065 0108 100 13.8 420 x 200 x 130

40371F B080 0109 150 13.8 480 x 200 x 160

40451F B096 0110 160 25 480 x 200 x 160

40551F B128 0111 180 25 480 x 200 x 160

40750F, B165, 0112 300 25 480 x 200 x 160

41100F B224

41600F B302 0113 400 45 588 x 250 x 200

41850F B340 0119 500

42200F B450 0120 600

43000F B605 0121 900

1-13

(1) 1mm = 0.0394 inches

(2) D is the distance the filter will extend outward from the surface of the metal plate.

Consult Factory

1-14

Motor Cable

max. 20m

Cable Length

max. 40cm

L2 PEL1 L3

LINE

LOAD

FILTER

GPD

515/G5

T2 PET1 T3L1 L3PE L2

Ground Bonds (remove any paint)

Metal Plate

Figure 1-2A. Installation of Line Filter and GPD 515/G5

1.4.4 Control Circuit

All basic control circuit (signal) interconnections are shown in the appropriate diagram:

•Interconnections for external two-wire control in combination with the Digital Operator are

shown in Figure 1-3.

•Interconnections for external three-wire control in combination with the Digital Operator

are shown in Figure 1-4.

Make wire connections according to Figures 1-3, 1-4 and Table 1-3; observe the following:

•Signal Leads: Terminals 1-8 & 11; 12-17 & 33; and 21-27.

•Control Leads: Terminals 9 & 10 and 18-20.

•Use twisted shielded or twisted-pair shielded wire (20-16 AWG [0.5 – 1.25mm2]) for

control and signal circuit leads. The shield sheath MUST be connected at the drive end

ONLY (terminal 12). The other end should be dressed neatly and left unconnected

(floating). See Figure 1-2B.

•Signal leads and feedback leads (PG) must be separated from control leads

main circuit leads and any other power cables to prevent erroneous operation caused

by electrical noise.

•Lead length should NOT EXCEED 164 feet (50 meters). Wire sizes should be determined

considering the voltage drop.

•All AC relays, contactors and solenoids should have RC surge supressors installed across

their coils.

•All DC relays, contactors and solenoids should have diodes installed across their coils.

1-15

TO GPD 515

SIGNAL

TERMINALS

TO SHIELD

SHEATH

TERMINAL

(TERM. 12)

WRAP BOTH ENDS

OF SHEATH WITH

INSULATING TAPE

CRIMP

CONNECTION

SHIELD SHEATH

OUTER JACKET

DO NOT

CONNECT

EXTERNAL

CIRCUIT

Figure 1-2B. Shielded Sheath Termination

1-16

1-17

TERMINAL FUNCTIONS LEVELS

12-WIRE CONTROL: Forward Run / Stop signal Run at closed, stop at open (See NOTE 2)

(See NOTE 1)

3-WIRE CONTROL: Run signal Run at closed (See NOTE 2)

22-WIRE CONTROL: Reverse Run / Stop signal Run at closed, stop at open (See NOTE 2)

(See NOTE 1)

3-WIRE CONTROL: Stop signal Stop at open (See NOTE 2)

3External fault input Fault at closed (see NOTES 2 & 3). When the

External Fault input is applied, the drive’s Fault

relay trips (shutdown) and the motor coasts to a

stop. The Digital Operator displays “ EF3 ” failure.

4Fault Reset input (external) Fault Reset at closed (see NOTES 2 & 3). The

Fault Reset input will reset the Fault relay, if the

drive is in “stopped” condition. Both Forward

Run/Stop signal and Reverse Run/Stop signal

must be OPEN.

5Multi-step Speed Reference 1 Effective when closed (See NOTES 2 & 3)

6Multi-step Speed Reference 2 Effective when closed (See NOTES 2 & 3)

7Jog Reference Run at preset jog frequency when closed

8External baseblock Drive output stops when closed

9, 10 Multi-function contact output (N.O.). Contact capacity:

One of 18 functions are available, by setting 250 Vac at 1A or less

of parameter H2-01 . 30 Vdc at 1A or less

11 Sequence control input common Sequence control input 0 V

for terminals 1-8.

12 Connection for shield sheath of signal leads – – – –

13 Frequency reference analog input (voltage); 0 to +10V (20K ohms)

auto input – can be changed to manual by –10 to +10V (20K ohms)

setting of parameter H3-01 .

14 Frequency reference analog input (current); 4-20mA (250 ohms)

can be changed to voltage input by setting of

parameter H3-08 and cutting jumper J1.

15 Frequency reference power supply +15V (Control power supply for frequency setting:

max 20 mA)

17 Frequency reference analog input common 0 V

18 Multi-function contact output Closed at fault

(N.O./N.C.). Contact capacity:

19 Open at fault 250 Vac at 1A or less

30 Vdc at 1A or less

20 Common

TERMINAL FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION / SIGNAL LEVELS

Table 1-3. Terminal Functions and Signals of Control Circuit

1-18

TERMINAL FUNCTIONS LEVELS

21 Multi-function analog monitor 1 (+) Output current Type of analog signal (operation parameter) to be

22 Multi-function analog monitor (–) or output output is selected by setting of parameters H4-01

frequency is and H4-04 .

23 Multi-function analog monitor 2 (+) selectable Monitor output: 0 to +11V; 2 mA maximum

25 Multi-function open collector One of 18 functions Photocoupler insulation output: +48V, 50 mA

output 1 available, by setting maximum

26 Multi-function open collector of parameters H2-02

output 2 and H2-03 .

27 Multi-function open collector output common 0V

33 Frequency reference power supply –15V Control power supply for frequency setting:

max 20 mA

TERMINAL FUNCTIONS DESCRIPTION / SIGNAL LEVELS

NOTES:

1. When Forward Run and Reverse Run inputs are both closed for more than 500 ms, the Digital

Operator displays a blinking “ EF ”alarm code and the motor (if rotating) is decelerated by the

drive to a stop. This stop condition is not stored by the drive (on Digital Operator, red LED at

STOP key does not light); IF ONE OF THE INPUTS IS OPENED, THE MOTOR WILL

IMMEDIATELY START UP AGAIN.

2. Terminals 1-8 source +24 Vdc (8mA max.) and operate in a Low = True (ON) configuration when

connected to terminal 11.

When using relays for input to terminals 1-8, use relays with highly reliable contacts (for very

small current) with a capacity of 30 Vdc or more and rated current of 100mA or higher. When

using transistor (open collector) input, use transistors with rated voltage of 35 Vdc or more and

rated current of 100mA or more.

3. These terminals are multi-function inputs. The indicated functions are their settings, based on a

2-Wire reset. For 3-Wire reset definitions, and other settings, see descriptions for “Multi-

Function Input Terminals”, parameters H1-01thru H1-06, in paragraph 5.32.

Table 1-3. Terminal Functions and Signals of Control Circuit - Continued

1-19

1-20

1.4.5 Interconnection – 2-Wire Control Operation - Figure 1-3.

Notes referred to in figure 1-3.

✱– Indicates components not supplied.

✱✱– Branch circuit protection (circuit breaker or input fuses) must be supplied by customer.

■■– Indicates customer connection terminal. Wire only to terminals shown. Note that not all terminals

shown are available in all ratings – see Tables 1-1 and 1-2.

( ) – Indicates alternate terminal marking, i.e., (R) and L1.

▲– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters

H1-01 through H1-06 . See paragraph 5.32.

●– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters

H2-01 through H2-03 . See paragraph 5.33.

♦– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters

H3-01, -04, -05, -08, & -09. See paragraphs 5.19 & 5.30.

■– Function labels and signal levels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings

of parameters H4-01 & H4-04. See paragraph 5.31.

1. If only a remote Manual Speed pot (1RH) is used, 3SS is not needed; in that case, a jumper must be

added between terminals 5 and 11. This jumper will override both the Auto and Digital Operator

frequency references, regardless of the programming of parameter b1-01. If you are using a remote

speed command or the Digital Operator, DO NOT install this jumper. See paragraph 5.19.

2. The Drive Electronic Thermal Overload function (parameters L1-01, L1-02 ) meets standards set by

UL and cUL for motor thermal overload protection. If local code requires separate mechanical overload

protection, an overload relay should be installed, interlocked with the drive as shown. It should be the

manual reset type to prevent automatic restart following a motor fault and subsequent contact

reclosure after cool down.

3. Insulated twisted shielded wire is required.

2-conductor #18 GA. (Belden #8760 or equivalent). 3-conductor #18 GA. (Belden #8770 of equivalent).

Connect shield ONLY AT DRIVE END. Stub and isolate other end.

4. Digital Operator is standard on every drive. Remote operators, as shown, may not be required.

5. Customer to connect terminal to earth ground (100 Ωor less, 230V; 10 Ωor less, 460V and 600V).

6. Wire only one of the inputs as an Auto Reference. If H3-09 is set to “ 1F “, terminals 13 and 14 are

added for the internal frequency reference.

7. If the Dynamic Braking (DB) option is used, wire per Appendix 6 instructions.

8. An optional DC reactor may be added for harmonic attenuation, if needed; see separate instruction sheet

for wiring.

9. If application does not allow reverse operation, b1-04, Reverse Run Prohibit, should be set to “ 1 ”

(Reverse Run Disabled), and the Reverse Run/Stop input can be eliminated.

10. If supplying the drive with DC voltage instead of 3ø AC, remove jumpers from terminals l1 and l2

and connect a separate 1ø AC supply to l1 and l2 instead.

11 . Use l1 (R) and l2 (S) for single-phase input. Note that for drives up through GPD515C-A064, -B034, and

-C032 (CIMR-G5M20151F, 40151F, and 50221F) must be derated by 50%. Consult factory for derating

of larger drives.

1-21

380V

400/

415V 440V 460V

Voltage Selector

3ø POWER SUPPLY (SEE NAMEPLATE DATA)

1ø POWER SUPPLY (SEE NOTE 11)

1CB ✱✱

GPD 515/G5

L1 L2 L3

+15Vdc

(20mA MAX)

MAN REF. IN

(0 TO ±10Vdc)

FWD

▲

●

FWD

RUN/STOP

COM

SHIELD

4-20mA

(250

0 TO ±10Vdc

(20K

SEE

NOTE 4

4-20mA

0-10V

ISOLATED

AUTO

REFERENCE ✱

SEE NOTE 6

1OL ✱

SEE

NOTE

EXT. FAULT ✱

EXT. FAULT RESET

1PB ✱

SEE

NOTE 3

TERM. 12

1R ✱

MAN SPEED

1RH ✱

SEE NOTE 1

AUTO

MAN

3SS ✱

1SS ✱

SEE

NOTE 1

REV

EXT. FAULT

FAULT RESET

AUTO/MAN

MULTI-STEP

FREQ SELECT

JOG

SPEED

COAST STOP

(BASE BLOCK)

0 VOLTS

RUN CONTACT

RY1

FAULT CONTACTS

RY2

ANALOG

OUTPUT

OPEN

COLLECTOR

CIRCUIT

OPEN

COLLECTOR

CIRCUIT

RY CONTACTS

CAPACITY:

1A AT 250Vac

1A AT 30Vdc

MULTI-FUNCTION

MONITOR OUTPUT

0 to +10V or

–10 to +10V,

2mA MAX.

MULTI-

FUNCTION

OPEN

COLLECTOR

OUTPUTS

CAPACITY:

50mA AT 48Vdc MAX.

AC MOTOR ✱

(T2)

(T1) (T3)

G T1 T2 T3

(GPD515C-B041 thru -B096)

FACTORY SET FOR 460V

EARTH

GROUND

SEE NOTE 5

1OL ✱

SEE NOTE 2

L1 L2 L3

BASIC INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM FOR 2-WIRE CONTROL

(R) (S) (T) (r)

(E) (U) (V) (W)

2SS ✱

REV

RUN/STOP

■

♦

TERMINALS 1-8:

IF INPUT FROM RELAY CONTACTS:

RATED 30Vdc OR MORE,

100mA OR MORE

IF OPEN COLLECTOR INPUT:

RATED 35Vdc OR MORE,

100mA OR MORE

FOR WIRING

DYNAMIC

BRAKING

OPTION

SEE NOTE 7

COOLING

FAN

POWER

(GPD515C-A080 [CIMR-G5M20151F] AND ABOVE;

GPD515C-B041 [CIMR-G5M40151F] AND ABOVE;

GPD515C-C027 [CIMR-G5M50221F] AND ABOVE)

SEE NOTE 10

♦

+ 1

+ 2

▲

SEE

NOTE 9

ANALOG

OUTPUT

FOR OPTIONAL

DC REACTOR

SEE NOTE 8

–

■

♦

SEQ REF

DRIVE FWD REV REMOTE

DIGITAL OPERATOR

JVOP-130

DATA

ENTER

FWD

REV RESET

RUN STOP

JOG

LOCAL

REMOTE MENU ESC

T1 T2 T3

(U) (V) (W)

AC MOTOR ✱

(T2)

(T1) (T3)

ALTERNATE

MOTOR CONNECTION

33 –15Vdc

(20mA MAX)

+ 3

–

Figure 1-3. 230, 460 or 600V Interconnections - 2-Wire Control

(with parameters b1-01 = 1, b1-02 = 1, H1-01 = 24, H1-02 = 14, H1-03 = 3,

H1-04 = 4, H1-05 = 6, and H1-06 = 8 )

See Figure 1-5 for Closed-loop PG connections

1-22

1.4.6 Interconnection – 3-Wire Control Operation Figure 1-4.

Notes referred to in figure 1-4.

✱– Indicates components not supplied.

✱✱– Branch circuit protection (circuit breaker or input fuses) must be supplied by customer.

■■– Indicates customer connection terminal. Wire only to terminals shown. Note that not all terminals

shown are available in all ratings – see Tables 1-1 and 1-2.

( ) – Indicates alternate terminal marking, i.e., (R) and L1.

▲– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters H1-01

through H1-06 : H1-01= 24, H1-02= 14, H1-03= 0, H1-04= 3, H1-05= 4, H1-06 = 6.

See paragraph 5.32.

●– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters

H2-01 through H2-03 . See paragraph 5.33.

♦– Function labels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings of parameters

H3-01, -04, -05, -08, & -09. See paragraphs 5.19 & 5.30.

■– Function labels and signal levels shown for these terminals are determined by factory settings

of parameters H4-01 & H4-04. See paragraph 5.31.

1. If only a remote Manual Speed pot (1RH) is used, 2SS is not needed; in that case, a jumper must be

added between terminals 6 and 11. This jumper will override both the Auto and Digital Operator

frequency references, regardless of the programming of parameter b1-01. If you are using a

remote speed command or the Digital Operator, DO NOT install this jumper. See paragraph 5.19.

2. The Drive Electronic Thermal Overload function (parameters L1-01, L1-02 ) meets standards set

by UL and cUL for motor thermal overload protection. If local code requires separate mechanical

overload protection, an overload relay should be installed, interlocked with the drive as shown. It

should be the manual reset type to prevent automatic restart following a motor fault and subsequent

contact reclosure after cool down.

3. Insulated twisted shielded wire is required.

2-conductor #18 GA. (Belden #8760 or equivalent). 3-conductor #18 GA. (Belden #8770 of equivalent).

Connect shield ONLY AT DRIVE END. Stub and isolate other end.

4. Digital Operator is standard on every drive. Remote operators, as shown, may not be required.

5. Customer to connect terminal to earth ground (100 Ωor less, 230V; 10 Ωor less, 460V and 600V).

6. Wire only one of the inputs as an Auto Reference. If H3-09 is set to “ 1F “, terminals 13 and 14 are

added for the internal frequency reference.

7. If the Dynamic Braking (DB) option is used, wire per Appendix 6 instructions.

8. An optional DC reactor may be added for harmonic attenuation, if needed; see separate instruction sheet

for wiring.

9. If application does not allow reverse operation, b1-04, Reverse Run Prohibit, should be set to “ 1 ”

(Reverse Run Disabled), and the Forward/Reverse input can be eliminated.

10. If supplying the drive with DC voltage instead of 3ø AC, remove jumpers from terminals l1 and l2

and connect a separate 1ø AC supply to l1 and l2 instead.

11 . Use l1 (R) and l2 (S) for single-phase input. Note that for drives up through GPD515C-A064, -B034, and

-C032 (CIMR-G5M20151F, 40151F, and 50221F) must be derated by 50%. Consult factory for derating

of larger drives.

CAUTION

Before running, parameter A1-03 must be set to " 0 ". Resetting drive constant A1-03

to " 2220 " may cause the motor to run in the reverse direction WITHOUT A RUN

COMMAND, and possibly result in damage to the equipment or personal injury.

1-23

380V

400/

415V 440V 460V

Voltage Selector

3ø POWER SUPPLY (SEE NAMEPLATE DATA)

1CB ✱✱

GPD 515/G5

L1 L2 L3

+15Vdc

(20mA MAX)

MAN REF. IN

(0 TO ±10Vdc)

RUN

▲

●

RUN

COM

SHIELD

4-20mA

(250

0 TO ±10Vdc

(20K

SEE

NOTE 4

4-20mA

0-10V

ISOLATED

AUTO

REFERENCE ✱

SEE NOTE 6

1OL ✱SEE

NOTE

EXT. FAULT ✱

EXT. FAULT RESET

3PB ✱

SEE

NOTE 3

TERM. 12

1R ✱

MAN SPEED

1RH ✱

2K / 2.5K

SEE NOTE 1

FWD

REV

1SS ✱

1PB ✱

SEE

NOTE 1

STOP

EXT. FAULT

FAULT RESET

AUTO/MAN

MULTI-STEP

FREQ SELECT

JOG

SPEED

0 VOLTS

RUN CONTACT

RY1

FAULT CONTACTS

RY2

ANALOG

OUTPUT

OPEN

COLLECTOR

CIRCUIT

OPEN

COLLECTOR

CIRCUIT

RY CONTACTS

CAPACITY:

1A AT 250Vac

1A AT 30Vdc

MULTI-FUNCTION

MONITOR OUTPUT

0 to +10V or

–10 to +10V,

2mA MAX.

MULTI-

FUNCTION

OPEN

COLLECTOR

OUTPUTS

CAPACITY:

50mA AT 48Vdc MAX.

AC MOTOR ✱

(T2)

(T1) (T3)

G T1 T2 T3

(GPD515C-B041 thru -B096)

FACTORY SET FOR 460V

EARTH

GROUND

SEE NOTE 5

L1 L2 L3

BASIC INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM FOR 3-WIRE CONTROL

(R) (S) (T)

(E) (U) (V) (W)

2PB ✱

STOP

■

♦

TERMINALS 1-8:

IF INPUT FROM RELAY CONTACTS:

RATED 30Vdc OR MORE,

100mA OR MORE

IF OPEN COLLECTOR INPUT:

RATED 35Vdc OR MORE,

100mA OR MORE

FOR WIRING

DYNAMIC

BRAKING

OPTION

SEE NOTE 7

COOLING

FAN

POWER

(GPD515C-A080 [CIMR-G5M20151F] AND ABOVE;

GPD515C-B041 [CIMR-G5M40151F] AND ABOVE;

GPD515C-C027 [CIMR-G5M50221F] AND ABOVE)

SEE NOTE 10

♦

+ 1

+ 2

▲

SEE NOTE 9

ANALOG

OUTPUT

FOR OPTIONAL

DC REACTOR

SEE NOTE 8

–

■

♦

SEQ REF

DRIVE FWD REV REMOTE

DIGITAL OPERATOR

JVOP-130

DATA

ENTER

FWD

REV RESET

RUN STOP

JOG

LOCAL

REMOTE MENU ESC

FWD/REV

AUTO

MAN

2SS ✱

1OL ✱

SEE NOTE 2

T1 T2 T3

(U) (V) (W)

AC MOTOR ✱

(T2)

(T1) (T3)

ALTERNATE

MOTOR CONNECTION

33 –15Vdc

(20mA MAX)

+ 3

–

Figure 1-4. 230, 460 or 600V Interconnections - 3-Wire Control

(with parameters b1-01 = 1, b1-02 = 1, H1-01 = 24, H1-02 = 14, H1-03 = 0,

H1-04 = 3, H1-05 = 4, and H1-06 = 6 )

See Figure 1-5 for Closed-loop PG connections

1-24

1.4.7 Encoder Feedback

If either the Flux Vector (A1-02 = 3) or Volts Per Hertz with Encoder (A1-02 = 1) control method is

desired, an encoder feedback board for the drive is required.

The drive can accept many types of encoder feedback. Table 1-4 shows which option board is

needed for each type of encoder.

Table 1-4. Encoder feedback option board types.

The PG-X2 card also has a connector TA2 which provides processed PG signal output for

use by an external pulse monitor. This connection can be made according to Figure 1-5.

+12V (200mA) 1 White D D 6

0V 2 Black F F 1

+5V 3 No Connection No Connection No Connection No Connection

A+ 4 Red A A 3

A–5 Green H H 8

B+ 6 Brown B B 2

B–7 Yellow I I 7

SHIELD TA3 Shield E No Connection 10

PG-X2 EPC (1) DYNAPAR DYNAPAR LAKESHORE/

FUNCTION TERMINAL MODEL H-20 (2) HS-35 NORTHSTAR

TA1 755A (Pin #) SL-56

Table 1-5. Encoder (PG) Connection

(1) For PG, EPC Model 755A, Orange and Blue wires are not used.

(2) For PG, Dynapar H-20, pins C, G, and J are not used.

Option

Board

PG-X2

PG-W2*

PG-B2

PG-D2

PG-A2

Control

Method(s)

ALL

All, Except

Flux Vector

All, Except

Flux Vector

Electrical Input

Scheme

Quadrature,

Line Driver

Dual Input,

Quadrature, Line

Driver

Quadrature,

Single Ended

Line Driver

Single Ended

Required Signals From Encoder

A+, A-, B+, & B- (Z+, Z- optional)

A+, A-, B+, B-, (Z+, Z- optional)

A, B, & Common

A+ & A-

A & Common

*Accepts inputs from two encoders. Primarily used with custom software.

The most common encoder used with the drive is the Quadrature, Line Driver style

encoder. When an encoder of this type is used, a PG-X2 option board must be

mounted onto the drive. The encoder then wires to the PG-X2 option board.

Table 1-5 and Figure 1-5 show connections for the PG-X2 and some typical encoders.

1-25

TA1

GPD 515/G5

panel or

enclosure

PG-X2 Card

TA2

TB1

PG input

per

Table 1-9

Factory wiring —

TB1 to TA1

Isolated Power Supply

+12V

+5V

A+

A-

B+

B-

Z+

Z-

TA3

N/C

Line Driver

Pulse

Factory Connection

(to control terminal 12)

Shield

Line Receiver

120 ‰

Pulse

Optical

Isolation

Monitor

Ouptut

RS422

Compatible

300kHz

ouptut max.

Customer supplied.

Refer to Section 2.2b or 2.2d (PG-X2) to calculate frequency.

NOTE:

Wiring distance from GPD 515/G5

to pulse monitor: 100m or less.

(3)

300 KHz

input max.

(2)

(1)

(2)

(1)

(2)

Z pulses not requred for most applications.

(3)

A+

A-

B+

B-

Z+

Z-

Figure 1-5. PG-X2 Card Input/Output Connections

• Verify wires are properly connected and no erroneous grounds exist.

• Remove all debris from the drive enclosure. Check for loose wire clippings.

• Verify all mechanical connections inside the drive are tight.

• Verify motor is not connected to load.

• Apply input power only after the front cover is in place. DO NOT remove the front

cover or Digital Operator while input power is on.

• For 460V, GPD515C-B041 thru -B096 (CIMR-G5M40P41F thru 40451F):

Verify that the drive power voltage select connector, located at lower left corner inside

drive chassis (see Figure 2-1), is positioned correctly for the input power line voltage.

Voltage is preset to 460V at the factory. Reposition, if required, to match nominal line

voltage.

23CN 24CN 25CN 26CN 22CN FU2

21CN

TB1

380V 400/415V 440V 460V

20CN

•

••

•

Figure 2-1a. Power Voltage Selection in 460V drive

2.1 PRE-POWER CHECKS

Section 2. INITIAL START-UP ("LOCAL" CONTROL)

For 600V, GPD515C-C027 thru -C200

(CIMR-G5M50181F thru 51600F).

Verify that the drive power voltage select

connector, located at lower left corner

inside drive chassis (see Figure 2-1b), is

positioned correctly for the input power line

voltage. Voltage is preset to 600V at the

factory. Reposition, if required, to match

nominal line voltage.

Figure 2-1b.

Power Voltage Selection

in 600V Drive

2-1

2-2

• Determine the proper control method for the application using Figure 2-2.

NOTE: For a more complete determination of control method, consult factory.

• If the selected control method requires a PG encoder on the motor, verify that a PG-X2

card is installed in the drive (see separate option installation sheet for details) and that all

encoder wiring is correct.

• Proceed to the correct Power On and Preliminary Checks procedure:

POWER ON AND PRELIMINARY CHECKS

Control Method Section

Open Loop Vector 2.2a

Flux Vector 2.2b

V/ f 2.2c

V/f with PG Feedback 2.2d

START

Is the load

Variable Torque?

(Pump or Fan)

YES

High

Starting Torque

and/or Zero Speed

Control?

Speed

Regulation

Better than

± 3%?

YES

Vector Control

V/F Control

PG (Encoder)

Required

On Motor

PG (Encoder)

Required

On Motor

PG-X2

Option Card

Required

PG-X2

Option Card

Required

Use Open

Loop Vector

Control

Method

Use Flux

Vector

Control

Method

Use V/f

Control

Method

Use V/f

w/ PG Fdbk

Control

Method

Figure 2-2. Control Method Selection Flowchart

2.2 CONTROL METHOD SELECTION

2-3

Apply input power to the drive.

If the display is not in English,

go to section 2.3, “CHANGING

THE LANGUAGE ON THE

DIGITAL OPERATOR”.

Set the control method of the Press , then

drive to Open Loop Vector.

(Set A1-02 to 2.)

NOTE: The drive leaves Press , then twice

the factory set for

Open Loop Vector

control — this step

may not be required. Press , then set drive to Open Loop

Vector using:

Write value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

Set parameter access level to Press , then

Advanced. This allows all

parameters to be viewed and

modified.

Press , then

Press , then set drive to Advanced

using:

Write value to memory by pressing:

briefly, then

2.2a POWER ON AND PRELIMINARY CHECKS - OPEN LOOP VECTOR CONTROL

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

** Main Menu **

Initialize

Control Method

V/F Control

A1-02= 2

Open Loop Vector

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

Control Method

Open Loop Vector

Entry Accepted

** Main Menu **

Initialize

Access Level

Quick Start

A1-01= 4

Advanced Level

Access Level

Advanced Level

Entry Accepted

2-4

Check the motor rotation using Press , then

the JOG function.

NOTE: The frequency

reference for this

operation comes If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are

from d1-09 and is on, press

factory set to 6 Hz.

WARNING

THE NEXT KEY-PRESS

WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR

TO MOVE; TAKE APPRO-

PRIATE PRECAUTIONS.

Press & hold

The motor should ramp up to

speed, and rotation should be

counter-clockwise if the FWD

light is on. Rotation should be RUN light will illuminate

clockwise if the REV light is on.

If rotation is incorrect, reverse Release

any two motor leads, then

repeat the motor rotation check.

Run the Auto-Tuning routine:

WARNING

THE MOTOR WILL MOVE

WHEN AUTO-TUNING IS

EXECUTED! TAKE

PROPER PRECAUTIONS!

CAUTION

Motor should be discon-

nected from the load before

executing the auto-tuning

routine.

NOTE: If the motor cannot be

disconnected from the

load, or if Auto-Tuning

fails, motor parameters

should be entered

manually. See section

2.4 for the procedure.

Enter the motor nameplate Press , then 3 times

values needed to perform Auto-

tuning

2.2a (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR

JOG

DATA

ENTER

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 6.00 HZ

LOCAL

REMOTE

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

2-5

Press twice

Set the correct Nameplate voltage of the motor,

using:

Write the value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

Enter the current and the rest of the parameters

following a similar procedure to that of the motor

nameplate voltage.

When all of the parameters Press

are entered, execute Auto-

Tuning.

The drive will first output Press

current to the motor, then run

the motor at a high speed.

During tuning, the following

message will appear:

If no problems are encountered,

the following message will

appear:

• If a problem occurs during

Auto-Tuning execution,

see section 6.2, AUTO

TUNING FAULTS AND

CORRECTIVE ACTIONS.

Proceed to section 2.5,

“TEST RUN USING DIGITAL

OPERATOR”

2.2a (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR

Rated Voltage

400.0 VAC

Rated Voltage

460.0 VAC

Rated Voltage

460.0 VAC

Tuning Ready ?

Press RUN key

Tune Proceeding

XX HZ X.XX A

Tune Successful

Tune Aborted

"Reason"

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

RUN

RESET

Entry Accepted

2-6

•Ensure motor is disconnected from load. To assure safety, disconnect the coupling or

belt which connects the motor with the machine, so that motor operation is isolated

prior to test operation.

•Verify the encoder to be used meets the following criteria: Line driver type (8830,

88C30), output pulse levels of 5-12V, and quadrature (A+, A–, B+, B–). Power supply

for the encoder from the PG-X2 card is capable of 200mA @ 12VDC or 200mA @ 5VDC.

Do not use both of these power supplies simultaneously.

•Verify that the encoder PPR (pulses per revolution) and expected motor speed do not

exceed the bandwidth of the PG-X2 card, using the following formula:

300,000 Hz ≥1.2 x (Max Speed in RPM / 60) x PPR of encoder

NOTE: Speed in RPM = 120 x frequency / number of motor poles

Example: Encoder PPR = 1024, Maximum speed = 1750 RPM

300,000 Hz ≥1.2 x (1750 / 60) x 1024

300,000 Hz ≥35,840 Hz – Acceptable

Apply input power to the drive.

If the display is not in English,

go to section 2.3, “CHANGING

THE LANGUAGE ON THE

DIGITAL OPERATOR”.

Set the control method of the Press , then

drive to Flux Vector (Set

A1-02 to 3.)

Press , then twice

Press , then set drive to Flux

Vector using:

Write value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

2.2b POWER ON AND PRELIMINARY CHECKS - FLUX VECTOR CONTROL

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

** Main Menu **

Initialize

Control Method

Open Loop Vector

A1-02= 3

Flux Vector

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

Control Method

Flux Vector

Entry Accepted

2-7

Set parameter access level to Press , then

Advanced. This allows all

parameters to be viewed and

modified.

Press , then

Press , then set drive to Advanced

using:

Write value to memory by pressing:

briefly, then

Set PG Pulses/Rev to the Press , then twice

correct value. (NOTE: For a

Yaskawa vector motor, the

correct value is 1024.)

Press , then 4 times

Press 3 times

Set the correct PPR, using:

Write value to memory by pressing:

briefly, then

2.2b (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

** Main Menu **

Initialize

** Main Menu **

Programming

Access Level

Quick Start

A1-01= 4

Advanced Level

Access Level

Advanced Level

Group F

Options

PG Pulses/Rev

00600

PG Pulses/Rev

01024

PG Pulses/Rev

F1-01= 1024

Entry Accepted

RESET

Entry Accepted

2-8

Display motor speed. Press , then ,

then

Press , then 4 times

Rotate the motor shaft counter-

clockwise by hand (as viewed

from the load end of the motor).

• As the shaft is turned

counter-clockwise, a low

positive speed should be

indicated.

• As the shaft is turned

clockwise, a low negative

speed should be indicated.

• If the speed doesn’t change

when the motor shaft is

rotated, check encoder

wiring and connections.

The pulses from the encoder

can also be checked; see

section 6.6, “CHECKING

ENCODER PULSES.”

• If the polarity is wrong,

switch the channels on the

input to the PG-X2 card

(on terminal block TA1,

swap wires at terminals

4 & 6 and swap wires at

terminals 5 & 7).

2.2b (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

Function U1

Monitor

Motor Speed

U1-05= 0.00 HZ

Motor Speed

U1-05= 2.38 HZ

Motor Speed

U1-05=- 1.47 HZ

2-9

Check the motor rotation using Press , then

the JOG function.

NOTE: The frequency

reference for this

operation comes If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are

from d1-09 and is on, press

factory set to 6 Hz.

WARNING

THE NEXT KEY-PRESS

WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR

TO MOVE; TAKE APPRO-

PRIATE PRECAUTIONS.

Press & hold

The motor should ramp up to

speed, and rotation should be

counter-clockwise if the FWD

light is on. Rotation should be RUN light will illuminate

clockwise if the REV light is on.

If the motor does not accelerate

smoothly or oscillates, reverse Release

any two motor leads, then

repeat the motor rotation check.

Run the Auto-Tuning routine:

WARNING

THE MOTOR WILL MOVE

WHEN AUTO-TUNING IS

EXECUTED! TAKE

PROPER PRECAUTIONS!

CAUTION

Motor should be discon-

nected from the load before

executing the auto-tuning

routine.

NOTE: If the motor cannot be

disconnected from the

load, or if Auto-Tuning

fails, motor parameters

should be entered

manually. See section

2.4 for the procedure.

Enter the motor nameplate Press , then 3 times

values needed to perform Auto-

tuning

2.2b (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

JOG

DATA

ENTER

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 6.00 HZ

LOCAL

REMOTE

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

2-10

Press twice

Set the correct Nameplate voltage of the motor,

using:

Write the value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

Enter the current and the rest of the parameters

following a similar procedure to that of the motor

nameplate voltage.

When all of the parameters Press

are entered, execute Auto-

Tuning.

The drive will first output Press

current to the motor, then run

the motor at a high speed.

During tuning, the following

message will appear:

If no problems are encountered,

the following message will

appear:

• If a problem occurs during

Auto-Tuning execution, see

section 6.2, AUTO TUNING

FAULTS & CORRECTIVE

ACTIONS .

Proceed to section 2.5,

“TEST RUN USING DIGITAL

OPERATOR”

2.2b (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Rated Voltage

400.0 VAC

Rated Voltage

460.0 VAC

Rated Voltage

460.0 VAC

Tuning Ready ?

Press RUN key

Tune Proceeding

XX HZ X.XX A

Tune Successful

Tune Aborted

"Reason"

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

RUN

RESET

Entry Accepted

2-11

Apply input power to the drive.

If the display is not in English,

go to section 2.3, “CHANGING

THE LANGUAGE ON THE

DIGITAL OPERATOR”.

Set the control method of the Press , then

drive to V/f Control.

(Set A1-02 to 0.)

Press , then twice

Press , then set drive to V/f

Control using:

Write value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

Set parameter access level to Press , then

Advanced. This allows all

parameters to be viewed and

modified.

Press , then

Press , then set drive to Advanced

using:

Write value to memory by pressing:

briefly, then

2.2c POWER ON AND PRELIMINARY CHECKS - V/f CONTROL

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

** Main Menu **

Initialize

Control Method

Open Loop Vector

A1-02= 0

V/F Control

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

Control Method

V/F Control

Entry Accepted

** Main Menu **

Initialize

Access Level

Quick Start

A1-01= 4

Advanced Level

Access Level

Advanced Level

Entry Accepted

2-12

Select the drive input voltage, Press , then twice

then select an appropriate V/f

pattern. Refer to section 5.38,

“V/F PATTERN – STANDARD”

or 5.39, “V/F PATTERN –

CUSTOM”. Press , then 3 times

NOTE: A standard V/f pattern

for a 60 HZ motor is

pattern 1 (60 HZ

Saturation). Press

Press twice, then set the drive to the

nominal input line

voltage using:

Write to memory by pressing:

briefly, then

Press twice, then

Then set the drive to desired V/F pattern

using:

Write to memory by pressing:

briefly, then

2.2c (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

** Main Menu **

Programming

Group E

Motor

Function E1

V/F Pattern

Entry Accepted

Input Voltage

460 VAC

Input Voltage

E1-01= 460 VAC

E1-03= F***

User Defined V/F

E1-03= 1

60 HZ Saturation

V/F Selection

60 HZ Saturation

Entry Accepted

2-13

Check the motor rotation using Press , then

the JOG function.

NOTE: The frequency

reference for this

operation comes If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are

from d1-09 and is on, press

factory set to 6 Hz.

WARNING

THE NEXT KEY-PRESS

WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR

TO MOVE; TAKE APPRO-

PRIATE PRECAUTIONS.

Press & hold

The motor should ramp up to

speed, and rotation should be

counter-clockwise if the FWD

light is on. Rotation should be RUN light will illuminate

clockwise if the REV light is on.

If rotation is incorrect, reverse Release

any two motor leads, then

repeat the motor rotation check.

Proceed to section 2.5,

“TEST RUN USING DIGITAL

OPERATOR”

2.2c (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

JOG

DATA

ENTER

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 6.00 HZ

LOCAL

REMOTE

2-14

•Ensure motor is disconnected from load. To assure safety, disconnect the coupling or

belt which connects the motor with the machine so that motor operation is isolated,

prior to test operation.

•Verify the encoder to be used meets the following criteria: Line driver type (8830,

88C30), output pulse levels of 5-12V, and quadrature (A+, A–, B+, B–). Power supply

for the encoder from the PG-X2 card is capable of 200mA @ 12VDC or 200mA @ 5VDC.

Do not use both of these power supplies simultaneously.

•Verify that the encoder PPR (pulses per revolution) and expected motor speed do not

exceed the bandwidth of the PG-X2 card, using the following formula:

300,000 Hz ≥1.2 x (Max Speed in RPM / 60) x PPR of encoder

NOTE: Speed in RPM = 120 x frequency / # of motor poles

Example: Encoder PPR = 1024, Maximum speed = 1750 RPM

300,000 Hz ≥1.2 x (1750 / 60) x 1024

300,000 Hz ≥35,840 Hz – Acceptable

Apply input power to the drive.

If the display is not in English,

go to section 2.3, “CHANGING

THE LANGUAGE ON THE

DIGITAL OPERATOR”.

Set the control method of the Press , then

drive to V/f w/PG Feedback

(Set A1-02 to 1.)

Press , then twice

Press , then set drive to V/F w/PG

Fdbk using:

Write value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

2.2d POWER ON AND PRELIMINARY CHECKS - V/f WITH PG FEEDBACK

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

** Main Menu **

Initialize

Control Method

Open Loop Vector

A1-02= 1

V/F w/PG Fdbk

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

Control Method

V/F w/PG Fdbk

Entry Accepted

2-15

Set parameter access level to Press , then

Advanced. This allows all

parameters to be viewed and

modified.

Press , then

Press , then set drive to Advanced

using:

Write value to memory by pressing:

briefly, then

Set PG Pulses/Rev to the Press , then twice

correct value. (NOTE: For a

Yaskawa vector motor, the

correct value is 1024.)

Press , then 4 times

Press 3 times

Set the correct PPR, using:

Write value to memory by pressing:

briefly, then

2.2d (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

** Main Menu **

Initialize

** Main Menu **

Programming

Access Level

Quick Start

A1-01= 4

Advanced Level

Access Level

Advanced Level

Group F

Options

PG Pulses/Rev

00600

PG Pulses/Rev

01024

PG Pulses/Rev

F1-01= 1024

Entry Accepted

RESET

Entry Accepted

2-16

Select the drive input voltage, Press , then twice

then select an appropriate V/F

pattern. Refer to section 5.38,

“V/F PATTERN – STANDARD”

or 5.39, “V/F PATTERN –

CUSTOM”. Press , then 3 times

NOTE: A standard V/F pattern

for a 60 HZ motor is

pattern 1 (60 HZ

Saturation). Press

Press twice, then set the drive to the

nominal input line

voltage using:

Write to memory by pressing:

briefly, then

Press twice, then

Then set the drive to desired V/F pattern

using:

Write to memory by pressing:

briefly, then

2.2d (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

** Main Menu **

Programming

Group E

Motor

Function E1

V/F Pattern

Entry Accepted

Input Voltage

460 VAC

Input Voltage

E1-01= 460 VAC

E1-03= F***

User Defined V/F

E1-03= 1

60 HZ Saturation

V/F Selection

60 HZ Saturation

Entry Accepted

2-17

Display motor speed. Press , then ,

then

Press , then 4 times

Rotate the motor shaft counter-

clockwise by hand (as viewed

from the load end of the motor).

• As the shaft is turned

counter-clockwise, a low

positive speed should be

indicated.

• As the shaft is turned

clockwise, a low negative

speed should be indicated.

• If the speed doesn’t change

when the motor shaft is

rotated, check encoder

wiring and connections.

The pulses from the encoder

can also be checked; see

section 6.6, “CHECKING

ENCODER PULSES.”

• If the polarity is wrong,

switch the channels on the

input to the PG-X2 card

(on terminal block TA1,

swap wires at terminals

4 & 6 and swap wires at

terminals 5 & 7).

2.2d (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

Function F1

Monitor

Motor Speed

U1-05= 0.00 HZ

Motor Speed

U1-05= 2.38 HZ

Motor Speed

U1-05=- 1.47 HZ

2-18

Check the motor rotation using Press , then

the JOG function.

NOTE: The frequency

reference for this

operation comes If either or both of the SEQ and REF lights are

from d1-09 and is on, press

factory set to 6 Hz.

WARNING

THE NEXT KEY-PRESS

WILL CAUSE THE MOTOR

TO MOVE; TAKE APPRO-

PRIATE PRECAUTIONS.

Press & hold

The motor should ramp up to

speed, and rotation should be

counter-clockwise if the FWD

light is on. Rotation should be RUN light will illuminate

clockwise if the REV light is on.

If rotation is incorrect, reverse Release

any two motor leads, then

repeat the motor rotation check.

Proceed to section 2.5,

“TEST RUN USING DIGITAL

OPERATOR”

2.2d (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

JOG

DATA

ENTER

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 6.00 HZ

LOCAL

REMOTE

2-19

Power ON

Bring up the Main Menu and Press , then ,

go to Initialize mode.

then

Change the language. Press , then select the correct

language using:

Write value to memory. Press

briefly, then

Return to operating mode. Press , then

2.3 CHANGING THE LANGUAGE ON THE DIGITAL OPERATOR

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

DATA

ENTER

[ Display in Wrong

Language ]

A1-00= 0

English

Select Language

English

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

Entry Accepted

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

2-20

This procedure can be used as an alternative to auto-motor tuning. If the motor being used

with the drive did not pass motor auto-tuning or if the motor cannot be disconnected from

the load, the motor parameters need to be calculated and entered manually.

This procedure only applies to the Open Loop Vector Control method & the

Flux Vector Control method.

The following information used in the calculation formulas is usually listed on the motor

nameplate. If no-load current is not marked on the nameplate and the motor manufacturer

is not able to supply it, use the default value of (0.3 x IFLA) = INLA.

Motor Voltage (V) Vm

Motor Rated Speed (RPM) NR

Motor Rated Frequency (Hz) fR

Motor Synchronous Speed (RPM) NS(NS= f

R*120 / number of motor poles)

Full Load Amps (FLA) IFLA

No-Load Amps (NLA) INLA

Enter the Maximum frequency Press , then twice

( E1-04 ). For constant torque

applications, set to motor

nameplate frequency. For

constant horsepower

applications, set to maximum Press , then 3 times

frequency desired.

Press twice

Press twice, then

Set the maximum frequency using:

Write value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

2.4 CALCULATING MOTOR PARAMETERS

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

** Main Menu **

Programming

Group E

Motor

Input Voltage

E1-01= 460 VAC

Max. Frequency

0060.0 HZ

Max. Frequency

0060.0 HZ

Max. Frequency

E1-04= 60.0 HZ

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

RESET

Entry Accepted

2-21

Enter the Base frequency Press twice , then

( E1-06 ). This value can be

obtained from the motor

nameplate (rated

frequency).

Set the base frequency using:

Write value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

Enter the maximum motor Press , then

voltage ( E1-05 ). This value

can be obtained from the

motor nameplate (rated

voltage).

Set the maximum voltage using:

Write value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

2.4 (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

DATA

ENTER

Base Frequency

0060.0 HZ

Base Frequency

0060.0 HZ

Max. Voltage

400.0 VAC

Max. Voltage

460.0 VAC

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

RESET

Base Frequency

E1-06= 60.0 HZ

Entry Accepted

Max. Voltage

E1-05= 460.0 VAC

Entry Accepted

2-22

Enter the motor rated full load Press , then

amps ( E2-01 ). This value can

be obtained from the motor

nameplate (motor full load

amps).

Press twice

Set the FLA using:

Write value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

Enter the motor rated slip Press , then

( E2-02 ). This value can be

calculated using the following

formula:

E2-02 = (Ns - Nr) x 60 x 0.7

Set motor rated slip using:

Nr = nameplate rated speed

Ns = synchronous speed

Ns = fRx 120 / # of motor poles

Write value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

2.4 (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Function E2

Motor Setup

Motor Rated FLA

001.00 A

Motor Rated FLA

E2-01= 1.20 A

Motor Rated FLA

001.20 A

ESC

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

RESET

Entry Accepted

Motor Rated Slip

02.90 HZ

Motor Rated Slip

1.08 HZ

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

RESET

Motor Rated Slip

E2-02= 1.08 Hz

Entry Accepted

2-23

Enter the motor no-load current Press , then

( E2-03 ). This value can some-

times be obtained from the

motor nameplate. If it is

unavailable, use the following

formula to calculate it: Set motor no load current using:

1-5 HP:

INLA = IFLA x 0.50

5-15 HP:

INLA = IFLA x 0.40

> 15 HP:

INLA = IFLA x 0.30 Write value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

Enter number of motor poles Press , then

( E2-04 ).

(Assuming an fRof 50 or 60 Hz)

Rated Speed Set number of motor poles using:

(RPM) # of motor poles

2400-3600 2

1300-1800 4

900-1200 6

660-900 8

Write value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

Parameters E2-05 to E2-09 :

Factory set values are

acceptable.

2.4 (continued)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

No-Load Current

000.60 A

No-Load Current

000.32 A

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

RESET

No-Load Current

E2-03= 0.32A

Entry Accepted

Number of Poles

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

RESET

Number of Poles

E2-04= 4

Entry Accepted

Note:

This step is not required for

Open Loop Vector Control

method (A1-02=0).

2-24

The operation shown in Figure 2-3 and described in Table 2-5 is for a standard 60 Hz

motor.

Power ON Press , then

If either the SEQ or REF lights Press SEQ and REF lights are off,

are on, they should be turned DRIVE and FWD lights are on.

off by pressing the LOCAL/

REMOTE key. This will set the

drive so it can be completely

controlled by the Digital

Operator.

Table 2-5. Test Run With Digital Operator

OUTPUT

FREQUENCY

–

REVERSE

RUN

CHANGE FREQ.

REFERENCE

POWER

FREQUENCY

SETTING

FORWARD

RUN

STOP

FWD

ROTATION

AT 15HZ

REV

ROTATION

AT 60HZ

REV

ROTATION

AT 15HZ

ACCEL

DECEL

➀➁➂

➃

➄

➅

Figure 2-3. Example of Simple Operation

2.5 TEST RUN USING DIGITAL OPERATOR ("LOCAL" CONTROL)

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

LOCAL

REMOTE

DATA

ENTER

2-25

Set a run frequency of 15 Hz. Press

Set the frequency to 15 using:

Write the value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

Display the output frequency. Press , then

Run the motor in the forward Press RUN light comes on and motor

direction. ramps up to speed.

NOTE: Output frequency may be

slightly higher than the

frequency reference,

depending on the control

method selected.

Run the motor in the reverse Press RUN light remains on. FWD light

direction. goes out and REV light comes on.

The motor ramps down to zero

speed, then ramps up in the

opposite direction.

NOTE: output frequency may be

slightly higher than the

frequency reference,

depending on the control

method selected.

Table 2-5. Test Run With Digital Operator - Continued

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref

000.00 HZ

Frequency Ref

015.00 HZ

Frequency Ref

015.00 HZ

Output Freq

U1-02= 0.00 HZ

Output Freq

U1-02= 15.00 HZ

Output Freq

U1-02= -15.00 HZ

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

Entry Accepted

RESET

ESC

FWD

REV

RUN

2-26

Change the frequency Press , then twice

reference from 15 Hz to

60 Hz.

Change the frequency using:

Write the value to memory by pressing

briefly, then

Display the output frequency. Press , then

NOTE: Output frequency may be

slightly higher than the

frequency reference,

depending on the control

method selected.

Stop the motor. Press The STOP light turns on, and the

RUN light blinks during the decel-

eration of the motor.

Table 2-5. Test Run With Digital Operator - Continued

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref

015.00 HZ

Frequency Ref

060.00 HZ

Frequency Ref

060.00 HZ

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

Entry Accepted

RESET

Output Freq

U1-02= -60.00 HZ

Output Freq

U1-02= 0.00 HZ

ESC

STOP

2-27

• After completing the Test Run, connect the motor to the load.

• Additional control circuit wiring can be added, and parameters in the drive can be

programmed to configure the drive system to your specific application, including “Remote”

(2-wire or 3-wire) Control. See Section 5 for description of programmable features, and

also see instruction sheets for any options included with the drive.

• Record all parameter values (see Quick Reference sheets at the front of this manual).

The drive uses internal NV-RAM to store information when power is removed or in the event

of a power failure. Therefore, when power is reapplied, operation will begin at the same

state as when power was removed.

The following information is stored:

• Last Main Speed Reference setting and forward/reverse selection from Digital

Operator.

• The sequence of failure conditions that occurred before power was removed

(including content of a " CPF " failure).

2.6 PRE-OPERATION CONSIDERATIONS

2.7 STORAGE FUNCTION

2-28

3-1

After completing the start-up, and programming of parameters, turn off the AC main

circuit power. Make additional wiring connections required for the external control

functions selected by the parameter programming. Connect the driven machine to the

motor. Verify that the driven machine is in running condition, and that no dangerous

conditions exist around the drive system.

CAUTION

When starting and stopping the motor, use the operation signals (RUN/STOP,

FWD/REV), NOT the magnetic contactor on the power supply side (if present).

Run the motor under load with control by the Digital Operator using the same procedure

as for the Test Run (Table 2-5). If the Digital Operator is used in combination with

external commands or external commands only are used, the procedure must be altered

accordingly.

For preset starting (one-touch operation after setting the frequency), perform the

following:

1. Set the speed and press RUN. Motor accelerates, at the rate corresponding to the

preset accel time, to the preset speed. The accel time ( C1-01 ) is set too short

relative to the load if the RPM of the accelerating motor does not increase

smoothly, or if a fault is displayed on the Digital Operator.

2 . Press STOP. Unless coast to stop operation has been selected (by programming

of b1-03 ), the motor decelerates, at the rate corresponding to the preset decel

time ( C1-02 ), to a stop.

Section 3. OPERATION AT LOAD

3-2

4-1

All functions of the GPD 515/G5 are accessed using the Digital Operator. In addition to

controlling motor operation, the operator can enter information into the drive memory to

configure the drive to the application by entering the Program mode.

The Digital Operator has a 2 line by 16 character LCD display. Both numeric and alpha-

numeric data can appear on the display.

Indicator lamps and keys on the Digital Operator are described in Figure 4-1.

Figure 4-1. Digital Operator

JOG

ESC

DIGITAL OPERATOR

JVOP-130

REMOTE

SEQ

REF

RUN

STOP

FWD

REV

Frequency Ref

U1-01 = 0.00 Hz

FWD

REV

DRIVE

DATA

ENTER

LOCAL

REMOTE

RESET

4.1 GENERAL

4.2 DISPLAY AND KEYPAD

Section 4. DIGITAL OPERATOR

Indicates which direction

the motor is being

commanded to run.

Lights when the GPD 515/G5

is in Drive (operation) mode.

Increase parameter number

or value of blinking digit.

Switch between LOCAL and

REMOTE operation modes.

Initiates Jog function.

Selects forward or

reverse operation.

Run the motor. LED lights

when drive is controlling

motor speed.

2 line, 16 character

alphanumeric LCD display;

shows selected operation

status, fault code, or

parameter data.

Displays the main menu for

mode selection.

Returns to previous status

or menu level.

Displays data to be

changed, and enters new

data.

Decrease parameter number

or value of blinking digit.

Resets a drive fault, or

selects digit of a set value to

be changed. The selected

digit will blink.

Stop the motor. LED lights

when drive is in stopped

condition.

REMOTE Mode indication LEDs.

The LEDs light when REMOTE

Mode has been selected,

either for Start/Stop (SEQ)

control or Frequency

Reference (REF).

A. INDICATOR LAMPS

NAME FUNCTION

DRIVE Lights when the drive is in the Drive mode of operation.

FWD Lights when Forward motor run has been selected.

REV Lights when Reverse motor run has been selected.

REMOTE Lights when the drive is programmed to operate from external RUN and STOP

SEQ signals.

REMOTE Lights when the drive is programmed to operate by an external frequency

REF reference signal.

RUN Off when drive is in stopped condition; lights steadily when Run signal is

active; blinks after Stop signal has been received and drive output is ramping

down. (See Figure 4-2.)

STOP Lights steadily at initial power-up; blinks after Run signal becomes active but

frequency reference is zero; off when drive output is controlling motor speed.

(See Figure 4-2.)

B. KEYPAD KEYS

NAME FUNCTION

LOCAL Pressing this key toggles between the Local (Digital Operator) and Remote (Termin-

REMOTE als) modes of operation. Active only when the drive is in stopped condition.

JOG IN DRIVE MODE: Pressing and holding this key will initiate Jog function: drive

output goes to programmed Jog Frequency ( d1-09 ) to check motor operation, or

to position machine. When key is released, output returns to zero and motor stops.

If the motor is already running, pressing this key will have no effect.

NOTE: Disabled if the drive is programmed

to use an external JOG input.

FWD IN DRIVE MODE: Each press of this key will toggle between Forward and Reverse

REV motor run direction. The selected direction is indicated by the FWD or REV lamp

being lit. If the selection is made while the drive is stopped, it determines the

direction the motor will run when started. If the selection is changed during running,

the drive will ramp the motor to zero speed and then ramp it up to set speed in

the opposite (i.e. newly selected) direction.

RUN IN DRIVE MODE: If the drive is not programmed to operate by external RUN

and STOP signals (as indicated by REMOTE SEQ lamp being lit), pressing this key

will produce a Run command to initiate drive output to the motor. However,

output frequency will be zero if the frequency reference is zero at the time this key

is pressed.

STOP IN DRIVE MODE: Pressing this key will produce a Stop command. The drive

will decelerate the motor in the programmed stopping manner, then drive output

will be disconnected from the motor.

Table 4-1. Digital Operator Controls

A. INDICATOR LAMPS

NAME FUNCTION

B. KEYPAD KEYS

LABEL FUNCTION

4-2

4-3

B. KEYPAD PADS – Continued

NAME FUNCTION

MENU IN DRIVE MODE: Pressing this key will display the top level of the menu tree for

selecting and reading parameters. The drive will change to Program mode.

IN PROGRAM MODE: Pressing this key will display the top level of the menu tree

for returning to the Drive mode. Pressing the MENU & DATA/ENTER keys in

succession will change to Drive mode and display the frequency reference setting.

ESC Each time this key is pressed the display returns to the previous level in the menu

tree or to the status prior to pressing DATA/ENTER.

DATA IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE: When a parameter number is being

ENTER displayed, pressing this key will display the parameter’s set value which is

presently in memory.

IN PROGRAM MODE ONLY: After the displayed set value has been changed as

desired, pressing this key will write the new set value into the drive memory to

replace the old value.

IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE: When a changeable data value is being

RESET displayed, pressing this key moves the blinking (i.e. "changeable") position to the

next digit to the right. If at the right-most position, this will wrap-around to the first

position on the left side of the display.

IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE: Pressing this key will increase the value

(up arrow) of the blinking digit in the display by 1. Pressing this key will increase a parameter

number by 1.

IN DRIVE MODE OR PROGRAM MODE: Pressing this key will decrease the value

(down arrow) of the blinking digit in the display by 1. Pressing this key will decrease a parameter

number by 1.

Table 4-1. Digital Operator Controls - Continued

B. KEYPAD KEYS – Continued

LABEL FUNCTION

POWER PRESS PRESS

ON RUN KEY STOP KEY

RUN

COMMAND

FREQUENCY

REFERENCE

OUTPUT

FREQUENCY

RUN

LAMP

STOP

LAMP

= Off = Blinking = Lighted Steady

Figure 4-2. Functioning of RUN and STOP Lamps

4-4

A. Quick-start Access Level

The flowchart tree below illustrates the process of accessing drive parameters when the

Access Level is set to Quick Start ( A1-01 = 2).

4.3 DIGITAL OPERATOR MENU TREES

Operation

Drive operation is enabled.

Drive status is displayed.

Initialize

( Initialize )

LCD language display is selected.

Parameter access levels, control

method selection and initialize

passwords are set.

Programming

( Programming )

Parameters are set/read. Items to be

set/read vary depending on the access

level setting.

Modified Constants

( Modified Parameters )

Only parameters that have been

changed from the factory settings are

set/read.

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

U1-01

Frequency Reference

Parameter

Display

Function (1) or

Parameter

U1-02

Output Frequency

Parameter

U1-03

Output Current

Parameter

U1-06

Output Voltage (2)

Parameter

Fault Trace

Function

Fault History

Function

Monitor

Function

A1-00

Select Language

Parameter

A1-01

Access Level

Parameter

A1-02

Control Method

Parameter

A1-03

Init Parameters

Parameter

A1-04

Enter Password

Parameter

Auto-tuning

( Auto-tuning )

Motor parameters are

automatically set by entering

tuning data (motor nameplate

values) when using Open

Loop or Flux Vector control

method ( A1-02 = 2 or 3).

NOTES

(1) A Function is a “sub-menu”

containing many parameters.

Use the DATA/ENTER key to

access these parameters.

(2) This parameter is user

selectable according to the

setting of o1-01 .

(3) Not available for all Control

Methods.

b1-01

Reference Source

Parameter

b1-02

Run Source

Parameter

b1-03

Stopping Method

Parameter

C1-01

Accel Time 1

Parameter

C1-02

Decel Time 1

Parameter

d1-01

Reference 1

Parameter

d1-02

Reference 2

Parameter

d1-03

Reference 3

Parameter

d1-04

Reference 4

Parameter

d1-09

Jog Reference

Parameter

E1-01

Input Voltage

Parameter

E1-02

Motor Selection

Parameter

E1-03

V/F Selection (3)

Parameter

E1-04

Max Frequency

Parameter

E1-05

Max Voltage

Parameter

E1-06

Base Frequency

Parameter

E1-07

Mid Frequency A (3)

Parameter

E1-08

Mid Voltage A (3)

Parameter

E1-09

Min Frequency

Parameter

E1-10

Min Voltage (3)

Parameter

E1-13

Base Voltage (3)

Parameter

E2-01

Motor Rated FLA

Parameter

E2-02

Motor Rated Slip (3)

Parameter

E2-03

No-Load Current (3)

Parameter

E2-04

Number of Poles (3)

Parameter

Use the and keys to

scroll through the Functions and Parameters.

4-5

Continued

B. Basic Access Level

The flowchart tree below illustrates the process of accessing drive parameters when the

Access Level is set to Basic ( A1-01 = 3).

4.3 DIGITAL OPERATOR MENU TREES

Operation

Drive operation is enabled.

Drive status is displayed.

Initialize

( Initialize )

LCD language display is selected.

Parameter access levels, control

method selection and initialize

passwords are set.

Programming

( Programming )

Parameters are set/read. Items to be

set/read vary depending on the access

level setting.

Modified Constants

( Modified Parameters )

Only parameters that have been

changed from the factory settings are

set/read.

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

U1-01

Frequency Reference

Parameter

Display

Function (1) or

Parameter

U1-02

Output Frequency

Parameter

U1-03

Output Current

Parameter

U1-06

Output Voltage (2)

Parameter

Fault Trace

Function

Fault History

Function

Monitor

Function

A1-00

Select Language

Parameter

A1-01

Access Level

Parameter

A1-02

Control Method

Parameter

A1-03

Init Parameters

Parameter

A1-04

Enter Password

Parameter

NOTES

(1) A Function is a “sub-menu”

containing many parameters.

Use the DATA/ENTER key to

access these parameters.

(2) This parameter is user

selectable according to the

setting of o1-01 .

(3) Not available for all Control

Methods.

Auto-tuning

( Auto-tuning )

Motor parameters are

automatically set by entering

tuning data (motor nameplate

values) when using Open

Loop or Flux Vector control

method ( A1-02 = 2 or 3).

Sequence

Function

DC Braking

Function

Accel/Decel

Function

Motor-Slip Comp (3)

Function

Torque Comp (3)

Function

ASR Tuning (3)

Function

Carrier Freq.

Function

Preset Reference

Function

Reference Limits

Function

Jump Frequencies

Function

V/F Patern

Function

Motor Setup

Function

Digital Inputs

Function

Digital Outputs

Function

Analog Inputs

Function

Analog Outputs

Function

Motor Overload

Function

PwrLoss Ridethru

Function

Stall Prevention

Function

Ref Detection

Function

Fault Reset

Function

Torque Detection

Function

Torque Limit (3)

Function

Hdwe Protection

Function

Monitor Select

Function

Key Selection

Function

Use the and keys to

scroll through the Functions and Parameters.

Continued

C. Advanced Access Level

The flowchart tree below illustrates the process of accessing drive parameters when the

Access Level is set to Advanced ( A1-01 = 4).

4-6

Operation

Drive operation is enabled.

Drive status is displayed.

Initialize

( Initialize )

LCD language display is

selected. Parameter access

levels, control method

selection and initialize

passwords are set.

U1-01

Frequency Reference

Parameter

Display

Function (1) or

Parameter

U1-02

Output Frequency

Parameter

U1-03

Output Current

Parameter

Application

Programming

( Programming )

Parameters are set/read.

Items to be set/read vary

depending on the access

level setting.

Auto-tuning

( Auto-tuning )

Motor parameters are

automatically set by entering

tuning data (motor nameplate

values) when using Open

Loop or Flux Vector control

method ( A1-02 = 2 or 3).

Modified Constants

( Modified Parameters )

Only parameters that have

been changed from the

factory settings are set/read.

Tuning

NOTES

(1) A Function is a “sub-menu”

containing many parameters.

Use the DATA/ENTER key to

access these parameters.

(2) This parameter is user

selectable according to the

setting of o1-01 .

(3) Not available for all Control

Methods.

Reference

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

U1-06

Output Voltage (2)

Parameter

Fault Trace

Function

Fault History

Function

Monitor

Function

A1-00

Select Language

Parameter

A1-01

Access Level

Parameter

A1-02

Control Method

Parameter

A1-03

Init Parameters

Parameter

A1-04

Enter Password

Parameter

User Constants

Function

Sequence

Function

DC Braking

Function

Speed Search

Function

Delay TImers

Function

PID Control

Function

Reference Hold

Function

Droop Control (3)

Function

Energy Saving (3)

Function

Zero Servo (3)

Function

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

Accel/Decel

Function

S-Curve Acc/Dec

Function

Motor-Slip Comp (3)

Function

Torque Comp (3)

Function

ASR Tuning (3)

Function

Carrier Freq

Function

Hunting Prev (3)

Function

Factory Tuning (3)

Function

Preset Reference

Function

Reference Limits

Function

Jump Frequencies

Function

Sequence

Function

Torque Control (3)

Function

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

Use the and keys to

scroll through the Functions and Parameters.

4.3 DIGITAL OPERATOR MENU TREES

Continued

C. Advanced Access Level (Continued)

4-7

4.3 DIGITAL OPERATOR MENU TREES

Motor Parameters

Motor

From

Display Function

(1)

Parameter

DATA

ENTER E1 V/f Pattern Function

E2 Motor Setup Function

E3 Control Method (Motor 2) Function

E4 v/f Pattern (Motor 2) Function

E5 Motor Setup (Motor 2) Function

Options

FDATA

ENTER F1 PG Speed Setup

(3)

Function

F2 AI-14 Setup Function

F3 DI-08, 16 Setup Function

F4 AO-08, 12 Setup Function

F5 DO-02 Setup Function

F6 DO-08 Setup Function

F7 PO-36F Setup Function

Control Circuit Terminals

Terminal

Protection

Digital Operator

Operator

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

H1 Digital Inputs Function

H2 Digital Outputs Function

H3 Analog Inputs Function

H4 Analog Outputs Function

H5 Serial Com Setup Function

L1 Motor overload Function

L2 PwrLoss Ridethru Function

L3 Stall Prevention Function

L4 Ref Detection Function

L5 Fault Restart Function

L6 Torque Detection Function

L7 Torque Limit

(3)

Function

L8 Hdwe Protection Function

o1 Monitor Select Function

o2 Key Functions Function

F8 SI-F/G Setup Function

F9 CP-916 Setup Function

4-8

All parameters are set by accessing them through a menu tree with multiple access levels.

The setting of the Access Level in the Initialization Menu determines which parameters

appear on the Digital Operator. To see Example 1 and 2 in detail, refer to Tables 4-5, 4-6

and 4-7.

Level 1 Digital Operator Mode Programming Initialize

Level 2 Parameter Group C – Tuning —

Level 3 Parameter Function C1 Accel/Decel —

Level 4 Parameter Name Decel Time 1 Control Method

Level 5 Parameter Number C1-02 A1-02

Level 6 Parameter Setting Value 10.0 sec V/F Control

The parameters are arranged by groups. The following table shows which Parameter

Group(s) appear under which Mode.

Digital Operator

Modes

U – Monitor A – Initialize b – Application No Group Name No Group Name

C – Tuning

d– Reference

Parameter E – Motor

Groups List *F– Options

H – Terminals

L– Protection

o– Operator

* For a complete listing of parameters, see Appendix 1.

4.4 BASIC PROGRAMMING

Table 4-2. Parameter Menu

Menu Level Digital Operator Digital Operator

(Advanced Reference Name Display Display

Access) Example 1 Example 2

Table 4-3. Parameter Groups

Operation Initialize Programming Auto-Tuning Modified

Constants

4-9

The procedure for choosing a mode is shown in Table 4-4.

Top of Main Menu Press

• Displays Operation Mode

(drive changes to Program

mode).

• Displays Initialize Mode. Press

• Displays Programming Press

Mode.

• Displays Auto-Tuning Mode Press

(displayed only when Vector

Control Method is selected).

• Displays Modified Press

Parameter Menu.

Top of Main Menu Press or

• Return to Operation.

• Select Operation Mode. Press

• Displays frequency

reference setting (changes

to Drive mode).

4.5 MODES OF OPERATION

Table 4-4. Digital Operator Mode Selection

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

** Main Menu **

Operation

** Main Menu **

Operation

** Main Menu **

Initialize

** Main Menu **

Programming

** Main Menu **

Auto-Tuning

** Main Menu **

Modified Constants

DATA

ENTER

4-10

Parameters are changed by pressing the MENU key to enter the Program mode, then

advancing through the levels of the menu to access the parameter that is desired to be

changed. Only the parameters listed in Table A1-11 (Appendix 1) may be changed while

the drive is running.

• Select Programming Mode. Press , then twice

• Select the Parameter Name. Press , then 4 times

• Select the Decel Time 1 Press

parameter setting. (The first

digit of the value to be set

blinks.)

• Change reference value. Change value by pressing

• Write into memory. Press

briefly, then

Top of Main Menu Press

• Return to Operation.

• Select Operation Mode Press

(changes to Drive mode).

Table 4-5. Example 1A: Changing a Parameter in Quick-start Access Level

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

** Main Menu **

Programming

** Main Menu **

Operation

Decel Time 1

C1-02= 10.0 sec

Decel Time 1

C1-02= 1.0 sec

Decel Time 1

0010.0 sec

Decel Time 1

0001.0 sec

Entry Accepted

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

RESET

4-11

• Select Programming Mode. Press , then twice

• Select Tuning Parameter Press , then

Group.

• Select the Accel/Decel Press

Function.

• Select the Parameter Name. Press , then

• Select the Decel Time 1 Press

parameter setting. (The first

digit of the value to be set

blinks.)

• Change reference value. Change value by pressing

• Write into memory. Press

briefly, then

Top of Main Menu Press

• Return to Operation.

• Select Operation Mode Press

(changes to Drive mode).

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

** Main Menu **

Programming

** Main Menu **

Operation

Group C

Tuning

Function C1

Accel/Decel

Decel Time 1

C1-02= 10.0 sec

Decel Time 1

0010.0 sec

Decel Time 1

0001.0 sec

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

Decel Time 1

C1-02= 1.0 sec

Entry Accepted

RESET

Table 4-6. Example 1B: Changing a Parameter in Advanced Access

4-12

• Select Initialize Mode. Press , then

• Select the Parameter Name. Press , then twice

• Change data value. Press , then twice

• Write into memory. Press

briefly, then

Top of Main Menu Press

• Return to Operation.

• Select Operation Mode Press

(changes to Drive mode).

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

Frequency Ref

U1-01= 0.00 HZ

** Main Menu **

Initialize

** Main Menu **

Operation

Control Method

Open Loop Vector

A1-02= 0

V/F Control

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

Table 4-7. Example 2: Changing Control Method in Quick-start Access Level

Control Method

V/F Control

Entry Accepted

5-1

This section describes features of the GPD 515/G5 which are defined by programmed

settings in the various parameters in memory. Since most features use more than one

parameter, the descriptions appear in alphabetical order by the function name. In Table

5-1, the functions are grouped into operational categories. To cross reference a

particular parameter to the features to which it applies, see the listings in Appendix 1, or

the Index.

SET-UP

Initialization (Reset), 2-Wire or 3-Wire 5.37 A1-03

Access Level 5.4 A1-01

Control Method Selection 2.2 A1-02

Drive Capacity, Parameters Affected By Table A3-1 ———

Volts/Hertz Patterns, Standard 5.47 E1-03

Volts/Hertz Pattern, Custom 5.48 E1-04 thru -10

Input Voltage Setting 5.37 E1-01

Encoder (PG) Parameters 5.15 F1-10 thru F1-14

Thermal Motor Overload Protection 5.41 E1-02;E2-01;L1-01, L1-02

Digital Operator Display, Re-scaling 5.11 o1-03, o1-04

Input Phase Loss Detection 5.34 L8-05

Output Phase Loss Detection 5.35 L8-07

User Parameters 5.46 A2-01 thru -32;o2-03

Miscellaneous Parameters 5.26 o2-01,-02,-05,-06,-07,-08

STARTING

Accel Time 5.2 C1-01,-03,-05,-07,-11

S-Curve Characteristics 5.3 C2-01,-03

Dwell 5.14 b6-01 thru -04

DC Injection Braking at Start 5.10 b2-01,-02,-03

STOPPING

Stopping Method 5.40 b1-03

Decel Time 5.2 C1-02,-04,-06,-08,-09,-11

Dwell 5.14 b6-01 thru -04

DC Injection Braking at Stop 5.10 b2-01,-02,-04

SPEED CONTROL

Frequency Ref. Input Signals (Auto/Manual) 5.19 H3-01 thru -12

(Term. 13, 16)

Frequency Reference, Upper & Lower Limits 5.22 d1-01 thru -08

Jog Reference 5.24 d1-09

Speed Reference Selection (Local/Remote) 5.25 A b1-01,-02;H1-01 thru -06

Multi-step Speed Setting 5.25 B d1-01 thru -09;H1-01 thru -06

Sample/Hold 5.32 F H1-01 thru -06

Up/Down Frequency Setting 5.32 G H1-01 thru -06

Table 5-1. List of Features Defined By Parameters

FUNCTION PARAGRAPH PARAMETER(S)

REFERENCE

Section 5. PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES

5.1 GENERAL

5-2

SPEED CONTROL - continued

Automatic Frequency Regulator (AFR) Gain 5.6 C8-08

Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) 5.7 C5-01 thru -04,-06;H1-01 thru -06

Frequency Reference Retention 5.20 d4-01

MODBUS Control 5.28 b1-01,-02;H5-01 thru -04

PID Control 5.36 b1-01;b5-01 thru -08

Zero-Servo Control 5.49 b2-01;b9-01;H5-01 thru -04

Zero Speed Control 5.50 b1-05;E1-09

REVERSE

Reverse Run Disabled Table A1-2 b1-04

RUNNING

Critical Frequency Rejection 5.9 d3-01 thru -04

Carrier Frequency 5.8 C6-01,-02,-03

Speed Search 5.32 D b2-01,-02,-03;

H1-01 thru -06;L2-03,-04

Speed Coincidence 5.33 A

Energy Saving 5.16 b8-01,-02;H1-01 thru -06

Slip Compensation 5.38 C3-01 thru -04

RUNNING IMPROVEMENTS

Torque Compensation 5.42 C4-01,-02

Stall Prevention 5.39 L3-01 thru -06

Droop 5.13 b7-01,-02

Hunting Prevention 5.23 C7-01,-02

PROTECTIVE FEATURES

Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru 5.29 H1-01 thru -06;L2-01,-02

Auto Restart 5.5 L5-01,-02

Frequency Reference Loss Detection 5.20 L4-05

Overtorque Detection 5.42 L6-01 thru -06

Miscellaneous Protective Functions 5.27 L8-01,-02

DRIVE CONTROLS, INPUT

Multi-function Analog Inputs (Term. 16, 14) 5.29 H3-05,-09

Frequency Reference Bias and Gain 5.17 H3-03,-07,-11;H3-02,-06,-10

Multi-function Input Terminals (Term. 3-8) 5.31 H1-01 thru -06

External Fault Terminals 5.31 H1-01 thru -06

DRIVE OUTPUT

Multi-function Output Terminals (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27) 5.32 H2-01,-02,-03

Analog Monitor Output (Multi-function) (Term. 21-23) 5.30 H4-01 thru -07

MONITOR DISPLAY

Digital Operator Display Selection 5.11 o1-03

Display – Monitor (at Power-up) Selection 5.12 o1-02

Table 5-1. List of Features Defined By Parameters - Continued

FUNCTION PARAGRAPH PARAMETER(S)

REFERENCE

5-3

A. C1-01 : Accel Time 1 C1-06 : Decel Time 3 Factory setting (each): 10.0

C1-02 : Decel Time 1 C1-07 : Accel Time 4 Range* (each): 0.0 to 6000.0

C1-03 : Accel Time 2 C1-08 : Decel Time 4 seconds

C1-04 : Decel Time 2 C1-09 : Fast Stop (* Note: see para. 5.2 E)

C1-05 : Accel Time 3 Decel Time

The drive incorporates four sets of individually programmable acceleration and deceleration

times.

B. H1-01 thru H1-06 : Multi- Data 7: Accel/Decel Time Selection 1

function Inputs (Term. 3 thru 8) Data 1A: Accel/Decel Time Selection 2

By programming data " 7 " into one of the

multi-function parameters ( H1-01 thru

H1-06 ), the corresponding multi-function input

terminal (3 thru 8) becomes the Time Selection 1

input. When the input terminal (i.e. external

contact) is open, Time 1 ( C1-01 / C1-02 ) is

selected. When the input terminal is closed,

Time 2 ( C1-03 / C1-04 ) is selected. By

programming data " 1A " into another of the

multi-function parameters, the corresponding

multi-function input terminal becomes the Time

Selection 2 input. When the input terminal is

open, Time 1 or 2 is selected based on the setting of the Time Selection 1 input. When

the input is closed, Time 3 ( C1-05 / C1-06 ) or Time 4 ( C1-07 / C1-08 ) is selected

based on the status of the Time Selection 1 input.

Accel/Decel Accel/Decel

Selection 2 Selection 1 Accel Time Decel Time

H1-06 = 1A H1-05 = 07

Open Open C1-01 C1-02

Open Closed C1-03 C1-04

Closed Open C1-05 C1-06

Closed Closed C1-07 C1-08

TIME SELECTION 1

o o

TIME SELECTION 2

o o

GPD 515/G5

5.2 ACCEL/DECEL TIME

5-4

Continued

B. (Continued) Data A: Accel/Decel Hold (Speed

HOLD Command)

By programming data " A " into one of the multifunction input parameters ( H1-01 thru

H1-06 ), one of the multi-function input terminals (3 thru 8) becomes a HOLD command

input. As long as the HOLD command is present, accel and decel are in a prohibit state,

and the output speed is held at the level it was at the time the HOLD command was input.

When the HOLD command is removed while the system is still in Run condition, accel or

decel will again become active to allow output to reach set speed. If Stop is initiated

while the HOLD command is present, the prohibit state is cancelled and the system enters

stop operation.

C. C1-09 : Fast-Stop Decel Time Factory setting: 10.0

Range: 0.0 to 6000.0 seconds

H1-01 thru H1-06 : Multi-function Inputs Data 15 : Fast-Stop

(Term. 3 thru 8)

The Fast-Stop Decel Time is used instead of the selected Decel Time ( C1-02 , -04, -06

or -08) if:

1 ) It has been selected as the decel time for a specific fault ( H5-04 ,

L8-03 , etc.), or

2 ) One of the multi-function inputs has been programmed for Fast-Stop,

and the corresponding input is closed.

5.2 ACCEL/DECEL TIME

HOLD Function Timing

FWD RUN

HOLD CMD

SPEED REF.

OUTPUT SPEED

5-5

Continued

D. H3-05 : Multi-Function Analog Data 5: Accel/Decel Time

Input (Term. 16) Coefficient

The multi-function analog input at terminal 16

may be configured to allow analog control or the

Accel/Decel time. The input voltage, in the range

of 1 to 10V, determines the coefficient by which

the Accel/Decel time is reduced:

Actual Accel/Decel Time = Accel/Decel Time

Coefficient

EXAMPLE:

Accel/Decel Time = 10 sec *

Voltage Ref. at Term. 16 = 5V

Actual Accel/ =10 sec = 2 sec

Decel Time 5 (coefficient)

* C1-01 or C1-02 setting, or

selected accel/decel setting.

E. C1-10 : Accel/Decel Time Setting Unit Factory setting: 1

Range: 0 = 0.01 seconds

1 = 0.1 seconds

In addition to determining the setting resolution, this parameter controls the range of

C1-01 thru C1-09 ; if the resolution is 0.01 sec., the range is 0.000 to 600.00 sec. If

the resolution is set to 0.1 sec., the range is 0.0 to 6000.0 sec.

F. C1-11 : Accel/Decel Switching Frequency Factory setting: 0.0

Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

By using C1-11 , the Accel and Decel times can be automatically switched from Time 1

to Time 4. If the output frequency is greater than or equal to the C1-11 frequency, the

C1-01 and C1-02 times are used. If the output frequency is below C1-11 , C1-07

and C1-08 are used instead.

NOTE: If used in conjunction with a multi-function input ( H1-01 thru H1-06

set to "A" or "1A"), the multi-function input has priority over the C1-11

switching frequency.

5.2 ACCEL/DECEL TIME

ACCEL/

DECEL

COEFFICIENT

1R GPD 515/G5

15 +15V

16 0-10V (20K Ω)

COEFFICIENT

01510

VOLTAGE

5-6

C2-01 : S-Curve Characteristic Time Factory setting (each): 0.20

at Accel Start Range (each): 0.00 to 2.50

C2-02 : S-Curve Characteristic Time seconds

at Accel End

C2-03 : S-Curve Characteristic Time

at Decel Start

C2-04 : S-Curve Characteristic Time

at Decel End

Setting of these

parameters determine the

S-curve (starting and

ending) characteristics

of the acceleration and

deceleration ramp.

Each is set in increments of

0.01 seconds.

NOTE: Actual accel time =

Set accel time + C2-01+C2-02

Actual decel time =

Set decel time + C2-03+C2-04

The following figure shows FWD/REV switching and acceleration & deceleration to a stop

with S-curve active.

RUN

FREQ

COMMAND

TIME

S-Curve Characteristic

Time (TSC)

OUTPUT

FREQUENCY Accel ramp per

selected Accel Time

5.3 ACCEL/DECEL: S-CURVE CHARACTERISTICS

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

FORWARD RUN COMMAND

= S-CURVE CHARACTERISTIC

REVERSE RUN COMMAND

MIN. OUTPUT

FREQUENCY

E1-09

ACCELERATION DECELERATION

ACCELERATION

DC INJECTION

TIME AT STOP

b2-03

DECELERATION

C2-01

C2-02

C2-03

C2-04

5-7

A. A1-01 : Parameter Access Level Factory setting: 2

Range: 0 to 4

This setting determines which parameters are

accessible, which are also dependent upon the

setting of the Control Method ( A1-02 ).

The default setting is for Quick-start Access Level,

which accesses 32 parameters. Basic Access

Level allows access to 90 additional parameters.

Advanced Level accesses all parameters available

for a given Control Method setting. The User

Program Access Level will only be available if one

or more parameters are programmed into A2-01 through A2-32.

See paragraph 4.3 for menu trees for each of the Access Levels, and paragraph 4.5,

Examples 1A and 1B, for programming examples in different Access Levels.

B. User Program. Parameters A2-01 through A2-32 can each be set by the user

to allow a customized Access Level. The drive must first be temporarily set to Advanced

Access Level ( A1-04 = 4); then use the “up arrow”, “down arrow” and “right arrow” keys

to set A2-01 to the first parameter to which access is desired, A2-02 to the next, etc.

Only the parameters entered into A2-01 through A2-32 will be available for monitoring

and modifying if A1-01 is then set to "1".

A. L5-01 : Number of Auto-Restart Attempts Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 10

When a fault occurs during operation, the drive can be programmed for an auto-restart

operation to automatically reset the fault. Auto-restart operation will use the number of

reset attempts set in this parameter, up to the maximum of 10. When set to " 0 ", no

auto-restarts will be attempted.

• The following faults can be automatically reset:

OC: Overcurrent GF: Ground fault

OV: Overvoltage UV1: Undervoltage (Power UV)

OL3: Overtorque Detect

• The following conditions WILL NOT initiate auto-restart:

1. OL, EF , PUF or CPF fault.

2. When OC or UV occurs during deceleration.

3. When L2-01 is programmed to stop during momentary power failure (data =

" 0 "). (See paragraph 5.29, MOMENTARY POWER LOSS RIDE-THRU.)

• The number of restart attempts available will be reset to the L5-01 setting when:

1. 10 minutes has elapsed without a fault occurring.

2. The RESET key, or external Fault Reset push button, is pressed.

3. Power is removed from the Drive.

5.4 ACCESS LEVEL

Setting Description

0 Monitor Only

1 User Program

2 Quick-start

3 Basic

4 Advanced

5.5 AUTO-RESTART

5-8

Continued

B. L5-02 : Fault Contact Status During Auto-Restart Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 or 1

This digit controls how the fault contact responds to a drive fault during the auto-restart

operation.

0= Fault contact will not actuate during auto-restart attempts

1= Fault contact actuates during auto-restart attempts

Auto-Restart Operation Timing

C8-08 : AFR Gain Factory setting: 1.00

Range: 0.00 to 10.00

C8-09 : AFR Time Factory setting: 50

Range: 0 to 1000 msec

Useable only in Open Loop Vector Control Method ( A1-02 = 2), these parameters affect

the speed response or prevent the motor from hunting. To improve the speed response,

increase C8-08 and/or decrease C8-09 . To stop the motor from hunting, decrease

C8-08 and/or increase C8-09 .

FAULT DETECTION

FAULT CONTACT

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

L5-01 = 1

L5-01 = 0

MOTOR RPM

100 ms

AUTOMATIC FAULT RESET

Time from fault detection

to reset attempt, or time

between reset attempts

5.5 AUTO-RESTART

5.6 AUTOMATIC FREQUENCY REGULATOR (AFR) GAIN

5-9

A. C5-01 : ASR Proportional Gain 1 Factory setting: 20.00

(ASRP1) Range: 0.00 to 300.00

C5-02 : ASR Integral Time 1 Factory setting: 0.500

(ASRI1) Range: 0.000 to 10.000 seconds

Parameters C5-01 and C5-02 provide adjustments to enable the optimum

performance during load disturbances. The proportional gain ( C5-01 ) adjusts the

amount of instantaneous droop as a function of loss, and provides damping from load

disturbances such as speed reference change, or a change in load. The integral time (

C5-02 ) adjusts the response time of the drive to the load disturbances.

NOTE: Speed control response is increased by increasing the proportional gain

setting and decreasing the integral time. However, instability or hunting may occur

between the drive and the load if C5-01 (ASR Proportional Gain) is set too

high, or C5-02 (ASR Integral Time) is set too low.

5.7 AUTOMATIC SPEED REGULATOR (ASR)

ASR CIRCUIT

(INPUT) (OUTPUT)

ERROR 1TORQUE

K ( 1 + s T ) REF.

SPEED C5-01 C5-02

FEEDBACK

OUTPUT (TORQUE REF.)

INTERNAL

LIMITER

INPUT (ERROR)

TIME

SPEED +

REF. –

5-10

Continued

EXAMPLES OF C5-01 AND C5-02 ADJUSTMENTS

5.7 AUTOMATIC SPEED REGULATOR (ASR)

ASR Gain ( C5-01 ) Adjustment Only ASR Integral Time ( C5-02 ) Adjustment Only

10%

SPEED

100%

LOAD

6.9%

Speed Ref. = 10% of max.

C5-01 = 30.00

C5-02 = 0 .000

10%

SPEED

100%

LOAD

8.4%

Speed Ref. = 10% of max.

C5-01 = 60.00

C5-02 = 0 .000

10%

SPEED

100%

LOAD

Speed Ref. = 10% of max.

C5-01 = 30.00

C5-02 = 10.000

10%

SPEED

100%

LOAD

Speed Ref. = 10% of max.

C5-01 = 30.00

C5-02 = 1.000

5-11

Continued

B. C5-03 : ASR Proportional Gain 2 Factory setting: 20.00

(ASRP2) Range: 0.00 to 300.00

C5-04 : ASR Integral Time 2 Factory setting: 0.500

(ASRI2) Range: 0.000 to 10.000 seconds

Parameter C5-03 is used as an additional proportional gain adjustment, and parameter

C5-04 determines the response time for Proportional Gain 2 ( C5-03 ).

C. H1-01 thru H1-06: Multi-function Data E: ASR Integral Reset (IRST)

Input Terminal Function

Selection (Term. 3 thru 8)

By programming data " E " into one of the

multi-function input parameters ( H1-01 thru

H1-06 ), one of the multi-function input terminals

(3 thru 8) becomes an ASR integral reset. When

there is a long time lag between the applying of

control power and actual run operation, output

voltage may be produced due to the integrator

offset. In such cases, the integral reset function

should be ON until the start of run operation.

D. C5-06 : ASR Output Lag Time Factory setting: 4

Range: 0 to 500 msec

This function is used as a filter for mechanical problems such as mechanical backlash, play,

etc., which may prevent the ASR proportional gain from being increased as adjusted.

5.7 AUTOMATIC SPEED REGULATOR (ASR)

SPEED

GAIN

C5-01

C5-03

C5-07

GPD 515/G5

ASR

I-RESET

5-12

C6-01 : Carrier Frequency Upper Limit Factory Setting: See Table A3-1

C6-02 : Carrier Frequency Lower Limit Range (each): 0.4 to 15.0 kHz

C6-03 : Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain Factory Setting: See Table A1-3

Range: 0 to 99

The relationship between output frequency and carrier frequency is determined from the set

values of C6-01 to C6-03 .

(a) For constant carrier frequency (set value of C6-01 ):

Set C6-03 = 0 , and set the same value in both C6-01 and C6-02 .

(b) For synchronous mode (only with proportional section):

Set C6-03 = 12, 24, 36, or 48. These setting values establish carrier

frequencies of 12f, 24f, 36f, or 48f, respectively, where f = output frequency.

CARRIER FREQUENCY UPPER LIMIT K

C6-01 ≥10.0 kHz 3

10.0 kHz > C6-01 ≥5.0 kHz 2

C6-01 < 5.0 kHz 1

NOTE: Fault code " oPE11 " is displayed if either of the following conditions

is detected:

1. C6-03 > 6, and C6-02 > C6-01

2. C6-01 > 5.0 kHz, and C6-02 ≤5.0 kHz

C6-01

CARRIER

FREQUENCY

C6-02 Fout x C6-03 x K

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

5.8 CARRIER FREQUENCY

5-13

A. d3-01 : Prohibited Frequency 1 Factory setting (each): 0.0

d3-02 : Prohibited Frequency 2 Range (each): 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

d3-03 : Prohibited Frequency 3

These parameters allow programming of up to three prohibited frequency points for

eliminating problems with resonant vibration of the motor/machine. This feature does not

actually eliminate the selected frequency values, but will accelerate and decelerate the

motor through the prohibited bandwidth.

B. d3-04 : Prohibited Frequency Deadband Factory setting: 1.0

Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Hz

This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each selected prohibited

frequency point. The factory setting is " 1.0 ", which establishes a deadband of ±1.0 Hz.

EXAMPLE:

Vibration encountered between 30.0 and 36.0 Hz.

SOLUTION: Set d3-01 = 33.0. This is the center of the problem

frequency band.

Set d3-04 = 3.0. This will cause the drive to reject all

frequency command values between 30.0 and 36.0 Hz.

A frequency command in the deadband will be converted to the bottom

value of the deadband, e.g. a command of 33 Hz would result in a run

frequency of 30 Hz.

FREQ. CMD

36 Hz

d3-01 = 33 Hz

30 Hz

Total Deadband = 6.0 Hz

±d3-04 (3.0 Hz)

OUTPUT FREQUENCY (Hz)

5.9 CRITICAL FREQUENCY REJECTION

5-14

A. b1-03 : Motor Stopping Method Selection Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 3

b2-04 : DC Injection Time at Stop Factory setting: 0.50

Range: 0.00 to 10.00 seconds

When full range DC injection braking stop is enabled ( b1-03 = 2), DC injection braking is

used to stop a motor more quickly than normal coast to stop, without the need for

braking resistors. When a STOP command is issued, there is a 0.5 second time delay to

apply DC to two phases of the motor’s stator winding. Then DC injection current is

applied. The duration of DC braking is a time period proportional to b2-04 (at 10%

output frequency) and the level of output frequency at the time the STOP command is

issued.

Braking torque is 50-70% of full load motor torque.

EXAMPLE:

b2-04 = 0.5 sec (at 10% output)

Braking time at Fmax (100% output frequency) = 10 x 0.5 = 5 seconds

Full Range DC Injection Braking Stop Sequence

5.10 DC INJECTION BRAKING

RUN CMD

OUTPUT

FREQUENCY

STOP

0.5 sec

COASTING DC BRAKING TIME

b2-04 x 10

INJECTION

BRAKING

TIME b2-04

0 10% 100%

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

AT TIME OF STOP COMMAND

Continued

B. b2-01 : DC Inj. Braking Start Frequency Factory Setting: 0.5

Range: 0.1 to 10.0 Hz

b2-02 : DC Injection Braking Current Factory setting: 50

(% of Drive Rated Current) Range: 0 to 100 %

b2-03 : DC Injection Time at Start Factory setting: 0.00

Range: 0.00 to 10.00 seconds

b2-04 : DC Injection Time at Stop Factory setting: 0.00

Range: 0.00 to 10.00 seconds

DC injection can be used to stop a motor whose rotational direction is uncertain at start-up.

For this operation, application of DC injection braking current is controlled by a multi-

function input (see paragraph 5.8.D).

With ramp to stop enabled ( b1-03 = 0 ), after a STOP command is received the drive

controls motor deceleration according to the Decel Time setting, until output frequency

reaches the DC Injection Braking Start Frequency ( b2-01 setting). Then the drive output

is turned off and DC injection current is applied to the motor. The effective DC injection

time and current should be set to provide adequate stopping without excessive motor

heating. The DC injection voltage is determined by the DC injection braking current and

motor impedance.

DC Braking Sequence

b2-08 : Field Compensation Factory setting: 0

At Start Range: 0 to 500%

This parameter adjusts the amount of motor current during DC Injection at start. A setting

of 0% disables this feature. A setting of 100% equals motor no-load current (E2-03). This

current level will be applied until the DC Injection Time at Start (b2-03) expires. This

parameter is useful when starting motors that are relatively higher in horsepower than the

drive, due to the requirement for increased magnetizing current. This parameter may also

compensate for reduced starting torque due to motor circuit inefficiencies.

5-15

5.10 DC INJECTION BRAKING

RUN COMMAND

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

STOP

RAMP TO STOP

DC DC

DC INJECTION TIME AT

START ( b2-03 )

DC INJ. BRK. START

FREQUENCY ( b2-01 )

DC INJECTION TIME AT

STOP ( b2-04 )

5-16

Continued

C. H3-05 : Multi-function Analog Input Data 6: DC Injection Braking Current

(Term. 16) Adjust

The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of

the amount of DC injection braking current (from 0% to 100% of the current level set in

b2-02 ), which directly controls the amount of DC injection voltage applied to the motor.

D. H1-01 thru H1-06 : Multi-function Inputs Data 60 : DC Injection Braking

(Term. 3 thru 8) Command

Any multi-function input terminal can be utilized

to control DC injection braking. When used, DC

injection current will be applied until the input is

removed, provided that the drive output

frequency is below the DC Braking Start

Frequency ( b2-01 ).

EXAMPLE:

H1-06 = 60

Contact input at Terminal 8 is

the DC Injection Braking Command

DC Braking Sequence

5.10 DC INJECTION BRAKING

GPD 515/G5

8DC INJ. BRK.

COMMAND

RUN COMMAND

DC INJECTION

BRAKING COMMAND

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

STOP

RAMP TO STOP

DC DC

DC INJ. BRK. START

FREQUENCY ( b2-01 )

BRAKING

CURRENT

ADJUST

1R GPD 515/G5

15 +15V

16 0-10V (20K

Ω)

100

BRAKING

CURRENT

(%)

( b2-02 )

010

ANALOG VOLTAGE

5-17

o1-03 : Display Scaling Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 39999

This parameter determines the scaling of the Digital Operator display, for both Output

Frequency and all Frequency References.

DATA DISPLAY

0Output frequency, in increments of 0.01 Hz.

(factory

setting)

1Output frequency, in increments of 0.01 %.

2to 39 Motor synchronous speed (P = )

(no. of motor in increments of 1 RPM *

poles) (39999 max).

P = no. of motor poles

F = Frequency

Ns= motor synchronous speed

NOTE: If motor synchronous speed exceeds

39999 RPM, display holds at " 39999 ".

00040 Line speed or other parameter. Setting must be

t o 5 digits.

39999

X X X X X

Display value at maximum

frequency ( E1-04 )(include

leading zeroes if necessary)

Location of decimal point:

0= X X X X

1= X X X .X

2= X X .X X

3= X .X X X

(See CAUTION on next page)

EXAMPLE:

To display Line Speed, based on

54.32 FPM at 60 Hz:

o1-03 setting = 25432

* Ineffective when in Flux Vector Control mode.

DATA DISPLAY

120 x F

5.11 DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY SELECTION

5-18

Continued

Exceptions to the general format are as follows: o1-03 DISPLAY

" 10000 " = 1000.0

" 20000 " = 100.00

" 30000 " = 10.000

CAUTION

When setting a value in o1-03, the decimal point position

selected will automatically affect all of the Frequency Reference

Memory Settings ( d1-01 thru d1-09; see Table A1-4).

EXAMPLE:

o1-03 factory setting: 00000

d1-09 (Jog) factory setting: 006.00 (6 Hz)

o1-03 changed to 10600

Decimal point at X X X.X

d1-09 setting becomes 0060.0

Therefore, for 10.00 Hz Jog frequency, d1-09 must

be reprogrammed to " 001.0 0" .

o1-04 : Digital Operator Display Units Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 or 1

This parameter sets the frequency units for Flux

Vector mode.

The setting of o1-04 affects the following

parameters:

E1-04 : Maximum Frequency

E1-06 : Base Frequency

E1-07 : Mid Frequency A

E1-09 : Minimum Frequency

E1-11 : Mid Frequency B

o1-05 : Parameter/Address Display Selection Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 or 1

This parameter selects whether the parameter

addresses are displayed on the Digital Operator

by parameter number, or by its corresponding

MODBUS address number.

5.11 DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY SELECTION

Setting Description

0 Hertz

1 RPM

Setting Description

0 Parameter Number

1 MODBUS Address

5-19

o1-02 : Monitor Selection After Power-up Factory setting: 1

Range: 1 to 4

This parameter determines which monitor display will appear on the Digital Operator when

the drive is powered up. The number programmed into o1-02 corresponds to the

appropriate U1-XX parameter, which determines monitor status.

1 U1-01 — Frequency Reference

2 U1-02 — Output Frequency

3 U1-03 — Output Current

4 U1-XX — Monitor parameter selected by o1-01

o1-01 : Monitor Selection Factory setting: 6

Range: 4 to 38

This setting allows the user to select an item to be displayed in the monitored parameters

list. The o1-01 parameter corresponds to the o1-02 setting "4 - Selected Monitor".

For example, to display DC bus voltage in the monitored parameters list, set parameter

o1-01 to "7" for monitor selection U1-07 .

b7-01 : Droop Control Gain Factory setting: 0.0

Range: 0.0 to 100.0%

When active, the speed decreases or increases in proportion to load torque. As the load

increases, the speed droops according to the percentage set in b7-01 . As the load

decreases, the speed increases.

Maximum droop is reached at full load. Maximum speed is based on the maximum output

frequency setting ( E1-04 ). Excessive droop, which results in a significant difference

between the speed reference and the speed feedback, may activate a Speed Deviation

( DEV ) fault. The deviation detection level is an adjustable value, which can be set in

parameter F1-10 .

b7-02 : Droop Control Delay Time Factory setting: 0.05

Range: 0.03 to 2.00 seconds

The setting of this parameter determines the drive’s droop response time to a load

change.

NOTE

Only available in the Flux Vector Control Method ( A1-02 = 3).

5.12 DISPLAY – MONITOR ( A T POWER-UP) SELECTION

o1-02 MONITOR SELECTION

SETTING

5.13 DROOP

5-20

b6-01 : Dwell Frequency at Start Factory setting: 0.0

Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

b6-02 : Dwell Time at Start Factory setting: 0.0

Range: 0.0 to 10.0 seconds

b6-03 : Dwell Frequency at Stop Factory setting: 0.0

Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

b6-04 : Dwell Time at Stop Factory setting: 0.0

Range: 0.0 to 10.0 seconds

This function allows the drive to temporarily suspend acceleration or deceleration and

remain at a desired output frequency for a specified length of time.

After receiving a run command, the drive accelerates to the designated dwell start

frequency ( b6-01 ). The output is then held at that frequency for the duration of the

dwell time at start ( b6-02 ). After that length of time the drive continues to accelerate

to the set frequency.

When the run command is removed the drive decelerates to the designated dwell stop

frequency ( b6-03 ). The output is then held at that frequency for the duration of the

dwell time at stop ( b6-04 ). After that length of time the drive continues to decelerate

until the output frequency is zero.

5.14 DWELL

RUN

SET FREQUENCY

OUTPUT

FREQ.

b6-01 b6-03

b6-02 b6-04

5-21

A. F1-01 : Encoder (PG) Constant Factory setting: 1024

Range: 0 to 60000 ppr

This parameter is set to the Pulses Per Revolution (ppr) to the encoder used with the motor.

B. F1-02 : Operation Selection at PG Factory setting: 1

Open Circuit Range: 0 : Ramp to Stop

1 : Coast to Stop

2 : Fast-stop

3 : Alarm Only

F1-14 : PG Open Circuit Detection Factory setting: 2.0

Delay Time Range: 0.0 to 10.0 seconds

The setting of F1-02 determines the stopping method when a PG Open Circuit ( PGo ) is

detected. A PG open circuit is detected when no pulses are received from the pulse

generator within the time specified by F1-14 . (Note: The PG Open fault is disabled when

zero speed is commanded.)

NOTE

Only available in the V/f w/PG and the Flux Vector Control Methods

( A1-02 = 1 or 3).

5.15 ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS

5-22

Continued

C. F1-08 : Overspeed Detection Level Factory setting: 115

Range: 0 to 120 %

F1-09 : Overspeed Detection Delay Time Factory setting: See Table A3-2

Range: 0.0 to 2.0 seconds

F1-03 : Operation Selection at Factory setting: 1

Overspeed Range: 0 : Ramp to Stop

1 : Coast to Stop

2 : Fast-stop

3 : Alarm Only

Parameters F1-08 and F1-09 work together to determine when an overspeed ( oS )

fault will occur. Parameter F1-08 sets the desired overspeed level as a percentage of

the maximum output frequency ( E1-04 ), and F1-09 determines how long the

overspeed condition will be allowed to exist before a fault will occur. Parameter F1-03

determines the stopping method when an overspeed fault ( oS ) occurs.

EXAMPLE:

A given application requires that if motor speed were to ever reach 1980 RPM,

an overspeed fault would occur and the motor should coast to stop. The motor

has 4 poles, and maximum frequency ( E1-04 ) = 60Hz.

( E2-04 )

F1-08 = Desired Overspeed Level x Number of Motor Poles x 100%

120 x Maximum Frequency

( E1-04 )

F1-08 = 1980 x 4 x 100% = 110 %

120 x 60

F1-03 = 1Coast to Stop

NOTE

Only available in the V/f w/PG and Flux Vector Control Methods

( A1-02 = 1 or 3).

5.15 ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS

5-23

Continued

D. F1-10 : Excessive Speed Deviation Factory setting: 10

Detection Level Range: 0 to 50 %

F1-11 : Excessive Speed Deviation Factory setting: 0.5

Detection Delay Time Range: 0.0 to 10.0 seconds

F1-04 : Operation Selection at Factory setting: 3

Speed Deviation Range: 0 : Ramp to Stop

1 : Coast to Stop

2 : Fast-stop

3 : Alarm Only

Parameters F1-10 and F1-11 work together to determine when a Speed Deviation

( DEV ) fault will occur. Parameter F1-10 determines how far the motor speed has to

differ from the speed reference (set as a percentage of E1-04 ), and F1-11 determines

how long the speed has to deviate before a fault will occur. Use F1-04 to determine

stopping method if a speed deviation fault occurs.

EXAMPLE:

F1-10 = 10 %, F1-11 = 0.5 sec, F1-04 = 1, and E1-04 (Max

Frequency) = 60 Hz. As can be seen below, the motor speed must drop

over 10% below the speed reference for 0.5 seconds before a fault occurs.

10% speed = E1-04 x 0.1 = 60 x 0.1 = 6Hz

NOTE

Only available in the V/f w/PG and Flux Vector Control Methods

( A1-02 = 1 or 3).

5.15 ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS

5-24

Continued

E. F1-05 : PG Rotation Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 : Counter-clockwise

1 : Clockwise

The setting of F1-05 determines how the drive interprets the incoming pulses from the

pulse generator. It can be used to change direction of the motor without having to change

encoder wiring.

EXAMPLE:

To run a particular machine “forward” requires the motor shaft to turn in

a clockwise direction when viewed from the output shaft end of the motor.

The motor/encoder that is installed is running counter-clockwise as forward.

in order to change the direction of the motor, two of the motor leads need

to be swapped, and F1-05 needs to be changed to a 1.

NOTE

Only available in the V/f w/PG and Flux Vector control modes

( A1-02 = 1 or 3).

F. F1-07 : Integral Value During Accel/Decel Factory setting: 0

Selection Range: 0 : Disabled

1 : Enabled

The setting of F1-07 determines whether the automatic speed regulator (ASR) integral

operation is performed during accel/decel.

NOTE

Only available in the V/f w/PG Control Method ( A1-02 = 1).

5.15 ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS

5-25

Continued

G. F1-12 : Number of PG Gear Teeth 1 Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 1000

F1-13 : Number of PG Gear Teeth 2 Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 1000

Parameters F1-12 and F1-13 are used to set the gear ration when there is a gear

ratio between the motor and the pulse generator. This function is disabled when F1-12

and F1-13 are set to 0.

( F1-13 )

Motor Speed (RPM) = Load Speed (RPM) x PG Gear Teeth 2

PG Gear Teeth 1

( F1-12 )

EXAMPLE:

A motor is connected to a load through a toothed timing belt. The sheave

on the motor has 23 teeth, and the sheave on the load had 75 teeth. The

only mechanically practical place to mount a pulse generator for speed feed-

back is on the same shaft as the load sheave. In order to correctly scale the

encoder feedback, F1-12 needs to be set to 23, and F1-13 needs to

be set to 75.

NOTE

Only available in the V/f w/PG Control Method ( A1-02 = 1).

5.15 ENCODER (PG) PARAMETERS

5-26

A. Energy Saving V/f Control Methods Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 100 %

b8-01 : Energy Saving Gain

This parameter is only available in the V/f or V/f w/PG Control Methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1).

This parameter sets, in increments of 1%, the level to which the output voltage is reduced

during the energy-saving operation.

Output Voltage During Energy-Saving Operation

b8-02 : Energy Saving Frequency Factory setting: 0.0

Range: 0 to 400 Hz

This parameter is only available in the V/f or V/f w/PG control methods (A1-02 = 0 or 1).

The energy saving function will only activate if all of the following conditions are met: a

multi-function input is activated which is set to energy savings (data 63), output frequency

is above the Energy Saving Frequency b8-02, and the drive is up to its set speed (output

frequency = frequency reference).

B. Energy Saving – Open Loop Vector & Factory setting: 0

Flux Vector Control Methods Range: 0 or 1

b8-03 : Automatic Energy Saving Selection

Setting Description

0 Disabled – Energy saving mode will not be activated under light loads.

1 Enabled – The energy saving mode will automatically be activated

under light loads.

This parameter is only available when in the open loop vector or flux vector control methods

(A1-02 = 2 or 3). When b8-03 is set to a 1, a multi-function contact input is not required

to activate energy saving mode. This function is separate and should not be confused with

parameters b8-01 and b8-02. When the drive detects a lightly loaded motor, the output

voltage will automatically be reduced.

5.16 ENERGY SAVING OPERATION

V/f

CONVERSION

TORQUE

COMPENSATION VOLTAGE COMMAND

ENERGY-

SAVING GAIN

CLOSE AT

SET FREQUENCY

AND ENERGY-SAVING

ENABLED

O O

5-27

Continued

b8-04 : Automatic Energy Saving Factory setting: 0.7*

Control Gain Range: 0.0 to 10.0

*Factory setting becomes 1.0 when A1-02 = 3

b8-05 : Automatic Energy Saving Factory setting: 0.50**

Control Time Constant Range: 0.00 to 10.0 sec.

**Factory setting becomes 0.01 when A1-02 = 3

These parameters are only available when in the open loop vector or flux vector control

methods (A1-02 = 2 or 3). Parameters b8-04 and b8-05 adjust the energy savings

voltage regulator. Increasing the gain (b8-04) and/or decreasing the time constant (b8-

05) will increase the responsiveness of the energy savings function. If the response is set

too fast, the drive may become unstable. If the response is set too slow, the drive may

respond incorrectly when the motor load is re-applied.

H1-01 thru H1-06 : Multi-function Data 63 : Energy Saving

Inputs (Term. 3 thru 8) Operation

A multi-function input must be used to

command energy saving operation.

When the external Energy-Saving Operation

command is closed at set frequency, the energy-

saving operation shown below is enabled. In the

energy saving operation, the output voltage is the

value of the energy saving gain ( b8-01; factory

set to 80%) multiplied by the V constants defined

by E1-05, -08and -10.

NOTE

If energy saving operation is enabled before accel

time is complete, output V/Hz is not affected until

set frequency is reached; then output voltage is

reduced by energy-saving gain ( b8-01) setting.

Energy-Saving Run Timing

EXTERNAL

CONTACTS GPD 515/G5

3H1-01

4H1-02 MULTI-

> FUNCTION

5H1-03 INPUT

6H1-04

7H1-05

8H1-06

RUN COMMAND

ENERGY-SAVING COMMAND

L2-04

V (of E1-05, -08 & -10 ) x

OUTPUT VOLTAGE Energy-Saving Gain ( b8-01 )

5.16 ENERGY SAVING OPERATION

H1-01 thru H1-06 : Multi-function Data 20-2F : External Fault

Inputs (Term. 3 thru 8)

The multi-function input terminals can be used to define various modes of external faults.

When the External Faults 1-4 are inputted, " EF3 " to " EF8 " are displayed on the Digital

Operator (steady for a major fault situation, blinking for a minor fault situation). The second

digit of the H1-01 thru H1-06 setting is entered in hexadecimal values which defines what

type of external fault contact is used and how the drive will react to the fault input.

EXAMPLE:

To program External Fault 3 (Terminal 3)

for a N.C. contact, always detected, and

drive to continue operation:

H1-01 = 2D

5-28

5.17 EXTERNAL FAULT INPUTS

H1-0X Mode (Note 2) Always During Terminal

Data: Input (Note 1)

2 __ 0 1 2 3 Detected Operation N.O. N.C.

0XX

2XX

4XX X

(Factory Set)

5XX

6XX

7XX

8XX

AXX

BXX

CXX

EXX

FXX

NOTES

1. N.O. = normally open contact; N.C. = normally closed contact.

2. Mode 0 = Ramp to Stop (decel time per C1-02);

Mode 1 = Coast Stop;

Mode 2 = Emergency Stop (decel time per C1-09);

Mode 3 = Continuous operation (minor fault).

EXTERNAL

FAULT

CONTACT

GPD 515

5-29

H3-02 : Frequency Reference Gain (Term. 13) Factory setting (each): 100.0

H3-06 : Frequency Reference Gain (Term. 16) Range (each): 0.0 to 1000.0 %

H3-10 : Frequency Reference Gain (Term. 14)

These parameters can be used to set the frequency command gain, in increments of 0.1%,

for its respective terminal.

H3-03 : Frequency Reference Bias (Term. 13) Factory setting (each): 0.0

H3-07 : Frequency Reference Bias (Term. 16) Range (each): –100.0 to 100.0 %

H3-11 : Frequency Reference Bias (Term. 14)

These parameters can be used to set the frequency command bias, in increments of 0.1%,

for its respective terminal.

NOTE: If H3-09 = 1F, H3-10 and H3-11 have no effect. Gain and bias for

terminal 14 are set by H3-02 and H3-03 , respectively.

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE:

A. For 0-10 Vdc input (term. 13 or 16)

1. With no input, adjust Bias ( H3-03 or H3-07 setting) until an output

of 0.0 Hz is obtained.

2. With full scale input, adjust Gain ( H3-02 or H3-06 setting) until an

output of 60.0 Hz (or other desired max. output frequency) is obtained.

B. For 4-20mA input (term. 14)

1. With 4mA input, adjust Bias ( H3-11 setting) until an output of 0.0 Hz

is obtained.

2. With 20mA input, adjust Gain ( H3-10 setting) until an output of

60.0 Hz (or other desired max. output frequency) is obtained.

NOTE

Follow the same adjustment procedure for other desired frequency setpoints.

10V

FREQ. REF.

INPUT (V)

FREQ. REF.

INPUT (V)

FREQ.

REF.

(%)

FREQ.

REF.

(%)

BIAS

GAIN

(+)

(–)

110

100

100%

–100%

–10V

10V

100%

–100%

–10V

(+)

(–)

BIAS GAIN

5.18 FREQUENCY REFERENCE BIAS/GAIN

5-30

Continued

ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE (continued) :

C. For inverse-acting frequency reference

1. Begin with H3-02 & H3-03 settings as shown below.

2. Fine tune as indicated in A or B above.

Frequency reference inputs:

terminals 13 & 17 — 0-10 VDC

terminals 14 & 17 — 4-20 mA

5.18 FREQUENCY REFERENCE BIAS/GAIN

GPD 515/G5

13 0-10V (20K Ω)

14 4-20 mA (250 Ω)

FREQUENCY

REFERENCE

H3-02 H3-03

= 100.0 0.0

= 0.0 100.0

100%

FREQ

REF.

0% 4mA 20mA

INPUT CURRENT (TERM. 14)

H3-02 H3-03

= 100.0 0.0

= 0.0 100.0

100%

FREQ

REF.

0% 0V 10V

INPUT VOLTAGE (TERM. 13)

5-31

H3-01 : Auto Speed Reference Signal Factory setting: 0

Level Selection (Term. 13) Range: 0 or 1

To change the control circuit terminal 13 input level, program H3-01 .

Setting Terminal 13 Input Level

0 0 to 10 V

1–10 to 10 V

H3-04 : Multi-function Analog Input 1 Signal Factory setting: 0

Level Selection (Term. 16) Range: 0 or 1

To change the control circuit terminal 16 input level, program H3-04 .

Setting Terminal 16 Input Level

0 0 to 10 V

1–10 to 10 V

H3-08 : Multi-function Analog Input 2 Signal Factory setting: 2

Level Selection (Term. 14) Range: 0 to 2

To change the control circuit terminal 14 input level, program H3-08 .

Setting Terminal 14 Input Level

0 0 to 10 V

1–10 to 10 V

2 4 to 20 mA

IMPORTANT

In addition to setting parameter H3-08 = 0 or 1 for a voltage input,

jumper J1 on the drive’s Control PCB must be cut.

Examples of wiring the drive for frequency references from various sources are shown on

the next page.

5.19 FREQUENCY REFERENCE INPUT SIGNALS (AUTO/MANUAL)

NOTE

If parameter H3-09 = 1F terminals 13 and 14 are added and used as the internal

frequency reference.

5-32

Continued

A. Speed pot or 0-10VDC signal only: B. 4-20mA signal only:

C. 0-10VDC signal (auto) and speed pot (manual):

For a bidirectional speed pot, set H3-04 = 1 and connect the low side to

terminal 33 instead of terminal 17.

D. 4-20mA DC signal (auto) and 0-10VDC signal or speed pot (manual):

For a –10 to +10V input instead of 0-10V at terminal 13, set H3-01= 1.

5.19 FREQUENCY REFERENCE INPUT SIGNALS (AUTO/MANUAL)

b1-01 = 1

H3-01 = 0

H3-04 = 0

H3-08 = 2

—

+15V

AUTO REF.

0-10VDC

GPD515/G5

b1-01 = 1

H3-01 = 0

H3-04 = 0

H3-08 = 2

H1-03 = 3

—

MANUAL REF.

0-10VDC

13 AUTO REF.

0-10VDC

COM

AUTO/

MAN

AUTO

MANUAL

GPD515/G5

b1-01 = 1

H3-01 = 0

H3-04 = 0

H3-08 = 2

H1-03 = 3

—

+15V

MANUAL REF.

0-10VDC

AUTO REF.

4-20mA DC

17 0V

COM

AUTO/

MAN

AUTO

MANUAL

0-10VDC

GPD515/G5

b1-01 = 1

H3-01 = 0

H3-04 = 0

H3-08 = 2

—

+15V

AUTO REF.

4-20mA

4-20mA DC

GPD515/G5

5-33

L4-05 : Frequency Reference Loss Detection Factory setting: 0(disabled)

Range: 0 or 1

The reference loss detection function is either enabled or disabled, based on the setting

of L4-05 . When enabled (data " 1 "), the reference loss detection compares the change

in reference with respect to time. If the reference decreases by 90% in more than 0.4

seconds, the drive will decelerate to the set reference; if the reference decreases by 90%

in less than 0.4 seconds, the drive will continue to operate at 80% of the output

frequency. To regain control of output frequency, either exceed the set reference (80%

of reference) or initiate a STOP command. If Auto Reference is less than Fmax ( E1-04 )

x .05, this function is not performed.

d4-01 : Frequency Reference Retention Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 or 1

This parameter can be used to retain the held frequency reference in U1-01 when

power is removed. Set d4-01 = 1 if this is desired when using Up/Down or Sample/Hold

commands as a multi-function contact input.

Setting Description

0 Not retained

1 Held reference retained in Frequency

Reference 1 ( U1-01 )

FWD RUN

COMMAND

AUTO

REFERENCE

drive

OUTPUT

FREQUENCY

80%

REF

10%

80%

FREQ.

0.4 SEC 0.4 SEC

Timing Chart

5.20 FREQUENCY REFERENCE LOSS DETECTION

5.21 FREQUENCY REFERENCE RETENTION

Note: This function applies only to frequency references at terminal 13 or 14. Frequency reference

loss detection does not function at terminal 16.

5-34

d2-01 : Frequency Reference Upper Limit Factory setting: 100.0

Range: 0.0 to 110.0 %

d2-02 : Frequency Reference Lower Limit Factory setting: 0.0

Range: 0.0 to 109.0 %

These two parameters set the range for the frequency command signal. Each is set, in

increments of 0.1%, as a percentage of maximum frequency (Fmax; E1-04 ) as

established by either the selected standard V/f pattern or custom V/f pattern.

NOTE: All references are affected by the upper and lower limit points.

EXAMPLE:

E1-04 = " 60 " Hz (100%)

d2-01 = " 80.0 " % = 48Hz – Max. speed

d2-02 = " 10.0 " % = 6Hz – Min. speed

100%

d2-01 80.0%

OUTPUT

FREQ.

( % )

d2-02 10.0%

2.5%

5.22 FREQUENCY REFERENCE UPPER & LOWER LIMITS

5-35

C7-01 : Hunt Prevent Selection Factory setting: 1

Range: 0 or 1

Hunting often occurs following a load change, but may also occur when the motor is in the

process of settling to a steady operating frequency. Setting C7-01 = 1 enables the

anti-hunt feature, which will reduce or suppress oscillation.

Setting Description

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

C7-02 : Hunt Prevent Gain Factory setting: 1.00

Range: 0.00 to 2.50

This parameter adjusts the hunt prevent gain. It should be decreased for a vibrating

condition under heavy loads, and increased for hunting under light loads.

NOTE

This function is only available in the Volts/Hertz Control Method, both

with and without PG feedback ( A1-02 = 0 or 1).

5.23 HUNTING PREVENTION

5-36

d1-09 : Jog Reference Factory setting: 6.00

Range: 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

When jog operation is selected (either by the Digital Operator JOG key, or by external Jog

and Run signals), the drive output will ramp to the output level set by this parameter.

When the Digital Operator is used, Jog can only be initiated from the stopped condition.

When the drive is running, the JOG key will have no effect on drive output.

When an external Jog signal is present, it will override the existing operation mode and the

drive will ramp to the level set by this parameter.

EXAMPLES:

OPERATION FROM DIGITAL OPERATOR

5.24 JOG REFERENCE

FREQ. CMD

d1-09 JOG

REF.

FREQ. CMD

d1-09 JOG

REF.

Press and Release

Hold JOG JOG

Press Press and Release Press

RUN Hold JOG JOG STOP

5-37

Continued

EXAMPLES:

OPERATION BY REMOTE SIGNAL INPUT (RUN & JOG1)

JOG2 — 2-WIRE CONFIGURATION

b1-02 =1 (Remote Control)

5.24 JOG REFERENCE

*Or FWD

FREQ. CMD

d1-09 JOG

REF.

FREQ. CMD

d1-09 JOG

REF.

RUN *

JOG1

RUN *

JOG1

FWD

COMMAND

(EXTERNAL)

JOG2

(FWD OR REV)

FREQ. CMD

d1-09 JOG

REF.

5-38

Continued

EXAMPLES:

JOG2 — 3-WIRE CONFIGURATION

b1-02 = 1 (Remote Control)

NOTES:

1. Use of external Jog input is selected by setting data " 6 ", " 12 ", or " 13 "

in one of the parameters H1-01 thru H1-06 .

•The factory configuration for 2-wire control is H1-05 = 6,

for JOG1 input at terminal 7.

•The factory configuration for 3-wire control is H1-06 = 6,

for JOG1 input at terminal 8.

•To select JOG2 - FWD, set data " 12 " into one of these parameters.

To select JOG2 - REV, set data " 13 " into one of these parameters.

JOG2 does not require an active RUN command to allow Jog operation.

2. JOG2 (FWD or REV) has priority over FWD and REV Run in the 2-wire control

configuration, and priority over RUN, STOP, and FWD/REV commands in

3-wire control configuration.

3. JOG2 - FWD and JOG2 - REV can be selected independently.

4. b1-04 = 1 (Reverse Run disabled) will override JOG2- REV.

Also see descriptions of MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS and RESET CODES.

5.24 JOG REFERENCE

RUN *

COMMAND

(EXTERNAL)

JOG2

(FWD OR REV)

FREQ. CMD

d1-09 JOG

REF.

*Momentary contact.

** When JOG2 command is released, a STOP command

is issued.

d1-01 : Memory 1 d1-06 : Memory 6 Factory setting:

d1-02 : Memory 2 d1-07 : Memory 7 d1-01 thru d1-08 : 0.00

d1-03 : Memory 3 d1-08 : Memory 8 d1-09 : 6.00

d1-04 : Memory 4 d1-09 : Jog Reference Range (all): 0.00 to 400.00 Hz

d1-05 : Memory 5 (See paragraph 5.24)

H3-05 : Multi-function Analog Input (Term. 16) (See paragraph 5.30)

b1-02 : Operation Method Selection

H1-03 thru H1-06 : Multi-function Input Terminals; data " 3 ", " 4 ", " 5 ", and

" 6 " [ or " C " ], respectively, for Reference Select 1, 2, 3 and Jog [ or

Multi-function Analog Input at Term. 16 ] (See paragraph 5.31).

For Local/Remote select, see paragraph 5.31, data " 1 " description.

b1-01 : Reference Selection (See below, or separate Option Instruction Sheet).

The drive allows selection of one of twelve references. Two are analog inputs, nine are

stored in memory, and one can be from an option card, either analog or digital. In most

configurations either the local reference ( d1-01 ) or the remote AUTO reference will be

utilized.

NOTE

The range and resolution of the d1-XX parameters is dependent on

the setting of o1-03 (see paragraph 5.11).

5.25 A Local/Remote Reference Selection

b1-01 : Reference Selection Data: 0= Local (Digital Operator) frequency

reference

1= Remote (terminals) frequency

reference

By programming b1-01 = 1, the external Auto reference input will be used. If b1-01 is

programmed to " 0 ", the value in d1-01 will be used as a frequency command.

IMPORTANT

d1-01 will change each time the operator enters a new frequency command

from the Digital Operator’s " U1-01 = XX.XX " prompt. Another way to

think of this is that when the drive is first powered up, the Digital

Operator displays " Frequency Reference U1-01 = XX.XX HZ ". The

value displayed is the current setting of d1-01 . If the operator changes

the display, then d1-01 will also be changed.

5.25 LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION

5-39

5-40

Continued

5.25 B Multiple Speed Reference Configuration [Multi-step Speed Operation]

In a multiple reference configuration, four modes may be selected.

NOTE

In the descriptions of Mode 1 thru Mode 4, the external terminal listings differ

depending on whether the drive is set for 2-wire or 3-wire control. For 3-wire

control, one of these terminals is dedicated to the FWD/REV selection; therefore,

multiple reference operation will use fewer of the memory settings and is a more

limited function.

Depending on the control wiring configuration and the multi-step mode chosen, the motor

can be operated at up to nine different speeds.

5.25 LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION

Typical Multi-step Speed Operation

OUTPUT

SPEED

RUN

Auto

Speed

Ref. (ext.)

Speed

Ref. 1

(d1-01 )

Manual

Speed

Ref. (ext.)

Speed

Ref. 2

(d1-02 )

d1-03

d1-04

d1-05

d1-06

d1-07

d1-08

Jog

Speed

(d1-09 )

Multi-step

Select 1

(Term. 5)

Multi-step

Select 2

(Term. 6)

Multi-step

Select 3

(Term. 7)

Multi-step

Select 4

(JOG1)

(Term. 8)

CLOSED

5-41

Continued

Mode 1 (Memory Data Only) uses only memory locations d1-01 thru d1-09 .

The input commands at terminals 3 thru 8 are a

combination of 1's and 0's, which are received as

an on or off condition at each terminal. Every

combination selects a specific speed reference.

b1-01 = local/remote operation

(frequency reference);

H1-03 = frequency reference select 1 at

terminal 5;

H1-04 = frequency reference select 2 at

terminal 6;

H1-05 = frequency reference select 3 at

terminal 7;

H1-06 = JOG reference select at terminal 8;

H3-05 = manual reference at terminal 16.

2-WIRE CONTROL 3-WIRE CONTROL

b1-01 = 0 b1-01 = 0

H1-03 = 3 H1-03 = 0

H1-04 = 4 H1-04 = 3

H1-05 = 5 H1-05 = 4

H1-06 = 6 H1-06 = 6

H3-05 =* H3-05 =*

* H3-05 selects the function of the multi-function analog input. If data value " 0 " is

entered, the analog input represents manual reference. If d1-02 is to be utilized,

then H3-05 MUST NOT be set to " 0 ". Set H3-05 to " 1F " when Multi-function

Analog Input (terminal 16) is not being used.

5.25 LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION

GPD 515

5( H1-03 )

6( H1-04 )

7( H1-05 )

8( H1-06 )

Freq. External Terminal

Ref. 8765

d1-01 0 0 0 ■

d1-02 * 0 0 1 ■

d1-03 0 1 0 ■

d1-04 0 1 1 ■

d1-09 1 X X ■

Freq. External Terminal

Ref. 8765

d1-01 0000

d1-02 * 0001

d1-03 0010

d1-04 0011

d1-05 0100

d1-06 0101

d1-07 0110

d1-08 0111

d1-09 1 X X X

1 = Closed; 0 = Open;

X = No effect; ■= FWD/REV

5-42

Continued

Mode 2 (Memory, Auto, Manual) uses Auto, Manual and d1-03 thru d1-09 .

The input commands at terminals 3 thru 8 are a

combination of 1's and 0's, which are received as

an on or off condition at each terminal. Every

combination selects a specific speed reference.

b1-01 = remote operation;

H1-03 = frequency reference select 1 at

terminal 5 (Auto/Manual);

H1-04 = frequency reference select 2 at

terminal 6;

H1-05 = frequency reference select 3 at

terminal 7;

H1-06 = JOG reference select at terminal 8;

H3-05 = manual reference at terminal 16.

2-WIRE CONTROL 3-WIRE CONTROL

b1-01 = 1 b1-01 = 1

H1-03 = 3 H1-03 = 0

H1-04 = 4 H1-04 = 3

H1-05 = 5 H1-05 = 4

H1-06 = 6 H1-06 = 6

H3-05 = 0 H3-05 = 0

5.25 LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION

GPD 515/G5

5( H1-03 )

6( H1-04 )

7( H1-05 )

8( H1-06 )

Freq. External Terminal

Ref. 8765

Auto 0 0 0 ■

Manual 0 0 1 ■

(Multi-func.)

d1-03 0 1 0 ■

d1-04 0 1 1 ■

d1-09 1 X X ■

Freq. External Terminal

Ref. 8765

Auto 0000

Manual 0001

(Multi-func.)

d1-03 0010

d1-04 0011

d1-05 0100

d1-06 0101

d1-07 0110

d1-08 0111

d1-09 1 X X X

1 = Closed; 0 = Open;

X = No effect; ■= FWD/REV

5-43

Continued

Mode 3 ( d1-01, Manual, d1-03 thru d1-09) uses d1-01, Manual and d1-03

thru d1-09 .

The input commands at terminals 3 thru 8 are a

combination of 1's and 0's, which are received as

an on or off condition at each terminal. Every

combination selects a specific speed reference.

b1-01 = local operation;

H1-03 = frequency reference select 1 at

terminal 5 (Auto/Manual);

H1-04 = frequency reference select 2 at

terminal 6;

H1-05 = frequency reference select 3 at

terminal 7;

H1-06 = JOG reference select at terminal 8;

H3-05 = manual reference at terminal 16.

2-WIRE CONTROL 3-WIRE CONTROL

b1-01 = 0 b1-01 = 0

H1-03 = 3 H1-03 = 0

H1-04 = 4 H1-04 = 3

H1-05 = 5 H1-05 = 4

H1-06 = 6 H1-06 = 6

H3-05 = 0 H3-05 = 0

5.25 LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION

GPD 515/G5

5( H1-03 )

6( H1-04 )

7( H1-05 )

8( H1-06 )

Freq. External Terminal

Ref. 8765

d1-01 0 0 0 ■

Manual 0 0 1 ■

(Multi-func.)

d1-03 0 1 0 ■

d1-04 0 1 1 ■

d1-09 1 X X ■

Freq. External Terminal

Ref. 8765

d1-01 0000

Manual 0001

(Multi-func.)

d1-03 0010

d1-04 0011

d1-05 0100

d1-06 0101

d1-07 0110

d1-08 0111

d1-09 1 X X X

1 = Closed; 0 = Open;

X = No effect; ■= FWD/REV

5-44

Continued

Mode 4

The final consideration for multiple frequency

command configuration modes is that any

combination of reference values may be configured

for operation. As an example, if only three speed

references are required, then the following example

will work.

b1-01 = local operation;

H1-03 = frequency select 1 at terminal 5;

H1-04 = frequency select 2 at terminal 6;

H3-05 = manual reference at terminal 16.

2-WIRE CONTROL

b1-01 = 0

H1-03 = 3

H1-04 = 5

H3-05 = 0

o2-01 : LOCAL/REMOTE Key Selection Factory setting: 1

Range: 0 or 1

This parameter determines if the LOCAL/REMOTE key is operative.

Setting Description

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

5.25 LOCAL/REMOTE AND REFERENCE SELECTION

Freq. External Terminal

Ref. 8765

d1-01 0000

Manual 0001

(Multi-func.)

d1-03 0010

GPD 515/G5

5( H1-03 )

6( H1-04 )

5.26 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS

5-45

Continued

o2-02 : STOP Key Function Factory setting: 1

Range: 0 or 1

This parameter determines if the STOP key is operative during remote run.

Setting Description

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

o2-05 : Digital "Motor Operated Pot" Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 or 1

Setting this parameter to " 1 " allows the setting of the frequency reference to imitate a

motor operated pot reference.

Setting Description

0 Drive accepts frequency command after ENTER

is pressed

1 Drive accepts frequency reference immediately

o2-06 : Operator Detection Selection Factory setting: 1

Range: 0 or 1

Setting this parameter to " 0 " allows the drive to continue to run when the Digital

Operator is disconnected from the drive.

Setting Description

0 Disabled (operation continues)

1 Enabled (motor coasts to stop and fault is displayed)

o2-07 : Elapsed Timer Setting Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 or 65535

This parameter allows the user to preset a starting value for the elapsed timer. Elapsed

time is accumulated according to the setting of o2-08 .

5.26 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS

5-46

Continued

o2-08 : Elapsed Timer Selection Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 or 1

This parameter determines whether the timer is active whenever power is applied to the

drive or whenever the drive is in run mode.

Setting Description

0 Timer active whenever power is applied to the drive

1 Timer active whenever drive is in “run” mode

b1-08 : Run Command Selection Factory setting: 0

During Program Range: 0 or 1

This parameter determines if the drive will accept a run command while in the “program”

mode. The drive is in the “program” mode whenever the drive light is off.

Setting Description

0 Disabled – If a run is commanded while the drive

is in the “program” mode (drive light is off), it will not run.

1 Enabled – If a run is commanded while the drive is in the

“program” mode (drive light off), it will operate normally.

L8-01 : Internal Dynamic Braking (Heatsink) Factory setting: 0

Resistor Protection Range: 0 or 1

Set this parameter to " 1 " only if a heatsink-mount resistor will be used with the drive.

Set L8-01 to " 0 " if not using Dynamic Braking, or if using a remote DB resistor.

Setting Description

0 Not provided

1 Provided

L8-02 : OH (Overheat) Protection Factory setting: See Table A3-1

Alarm Level Range: 50 to 130 °C

This parameter sets the temperature at which the heatsink thermostat will indicate an

overtemperature condition. The corresponding action the drive will take is dependent upon

the setting of L8-03 (see below).

L8-03 : Operation Selection After OH Factory setting: 3

(Overheat) Pre-alarm Range: 0 to 3

Setting Description

0 Ramp to Stop (using C1-02 )

1 Coast to Stop (base block)

2 Fast-stop (using C1-09 )

3 Alarm Only (operation continues)

5.27 MISCELLANEOUS PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

5.26 MISCELLANEOUS PARAMETERS

5-47

Continued

L8-10 : Output Ground Fault Factory setting: 1

Detection Selection Range: 0 or 1

L8-17 : IGBT Protection Selection Factory setting: 1

at Low Frequency Range: 0 or 3

Parameter L8-17 assists in protecting the output transistors (IGBTs) from overheating

when the output current is high and the output frequency is low.

L8-19 : OL2 Selection At Low Speed Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 or 1

This parameter allows the selection of normal or quick Drive Overload (OL2) protection

below 6 Hz. It is recommended that this parameter be enabled at all times. In some

instances quick drive overload protection (L8-19=1) may not be desired, such as when

operating in flux vector at zero speed. If L8-19 is set to 0 (disabled) L8-17 must be set

to 1, 2, or 3.

Caution: When disabling OL2 protection at low speeds (L8-19=0), set the carrier

frequency (C6-01 & C6-02) equal to or less than 2 kHz.

5.27 MISCELLANEOUS PROTECTIVE FUNCTIONS

Setting Description

0 Disabled – The drive will not detect a ground fault condition

1 Enabled – The drive will detect a ground fault condition

Setting Description

0 Drive relies on L8-19 protection.

1 Lower fc – When output current is greater than 100%, and output

frequency is less than or equal to 10 Hz, the carrier frequency is

automatically decreased to between 8 kHz and 2 kHz depending on

the drive size. The carrier will automatically return to the normal

value after the load is reduced.

2 Short term OL2 – OL2 occurs in 2 seconds when output frequency is

6 Hz or less and in current limit (approx. 175% of drive rated current).

3 I-Limit=150% – Current is limited to 150% of drive rated current.

Setting Description

0 Disabled – Drive Overload (OL2) protection is the same at low

speed as it is at high speed.

1 Enabled – Drive Overload (OL2) protection responds more quickly

when output frequency is 6 Hz or less.

5-48

The drive can perform serial communication by using a programmable controller (PLC) and

MODBUSprotocol. MODBUS is composed of one master PLC and 1 to 31 (maximum)

slave units (GPD 515/G5). In serial communication between the master and slaves, the

master always starts transmission and the slaves respond to it.

The master communicates with one slave at a time. Address numbers are assigned to each

slave in advance, and the master specifies an address to communicate with. The slave

which receives the command from the master executes the function, and then responds to

the master.

A. Communication Specifications

• Interface : RS-232C (standard); RS-485, RS-422 (option -

requires communication interface card CM085)

• Synchronization : Asynchronous

• Transmission parameters : Baud rate — Selectable from 1200, 2400,

4800, 9600 BPS ( H5-02 )

Data length — Fixed to 8 bits

Parity — Parity / no parity, even / odd

selectable ( H5-03 )

Stop bit — Fixed to 1 bit

• Protocol : MODBUS

• Maximum number to units

to be connected : 31 units (when RS-485 is used)

B. Sending/Receiving Data

Data that can be sent and received are run/stop commands, frequency reference, fault

reset, drive status, and setting and reading of parameters.

b1-01 : Reference Selection Factory setting (each): 1

b1-02 : Operation Method Selection Range (each): 0 to 4

Select the run command and frequency reference input method in b1-01 and

b1-02 . To provide a run command and frequency reference by communication,

set this data to " 2 ". Monitoring of run status, parameter setting/reading, fault

reset and multi-function input command from the PLC are enabled. The multi-function

input command is OR’ed with the command input from control circuit terminals 3-8.

EXAMPLE: b1-01 and b1-02 settings are " 3 ".

Open : Run by frequency reference from control circuit terminal 13 or 14

and run command from control circuit terminal 1 or 2.

Closed : Run by frequency reference and run command from serial

communication.

5.28 MODBUS CONTROL

5-49

Continued

H5-01 : Serial Communication Station Address Factory setting: 1F

Range: 1 to 1F (Hex)

(= 1 to 31 decimal)

Each slave on the same transmission line must be given a unique address.

H5-02 : Serial Communication Baud Rate Factory setting: 3

Range: 0 to 4

Selects the baud rate, as indicated by the following table:

Setting Baud Rate (BPS)

0 1200

1 2400

2 4800

3 9600

4 19.2 K

H5-03 : Serial Communication Parity Selection Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 2

Selects the parity, as indicated by the following table:

Setting Parity

0 None

1 Even

2 Odd

NOTE: To change the values set in H5-01 thru H5-03 and enable

the new settings, it is necessary to turn OFF power to the Drive, then

turn it ON again.

H5-05 : Serial Communication Error ( CE ) Factory setting: 1

Detection Range: 0 or 1

This parameter determines whether or not the drive will detect a CE condition. The

corresponding action the drive will take is dependent upon the setting of H5-04 .

Setting Description

0 Disabled

1 Enabled

5.28 MODBUS CONTROL

5-50

Continued

H5-04 : Stopping Method After Serial Factory setting: 3

Communication Error ( CE )Range: 0 to 3

Setting Description

0 Ramp to Stop (using C1-02 )

1 Coast to Stop (base block)

2 Fast-stop (using C1-09 )

3 Alarm Only (operation continues)

L2-01 : Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru 0= Disabled (Factory setting)

Protection 1= Enabled – 2 sec. power loss

ride-thru

2= Enabled – indefinite power loss

ride-thru, provided control

power is maintained

The setting of this parameter either enables or disables the ride-thru feature of the

drive. If disabled, the unit will stop immediately whenever a power loss occurs. If enabled,

the drive will continue to operate during a momentary power loss of up to 80%, but if the

loss exceeds the identified time period, the drive will stop.

L2-02 : Power Loss Ride-Thru Factory setting: See Table A3-1

Deactivation Time Range: 0.0 to 2.0 seconds

If the loss exceeds the length of time identified by L2-02 , the drive will stop. The

factory setting of this parameter, in 0.1 second increments, is related to the drive’s

capacity rating (see Appendix 3).

Note that the RUN command must be maintained throughout the ride-thru period. If

L2-01 is set to " 2 ", a " UV " alarm is displayed during power loss, and no fault signal is

output at any multi-function output that is programmed for a fault.

5.29 MOMENTARY POWER LOSS RIDE-THRU

5.28 MODBUS CONTROL

5-51

Continued

L2-03 : Momentary Power Loss Minimum Factory setting: See Table A3-1

Base Block Time Range: 0.0 to 5.0 seconds

When a power loss is detected, the output is baseblocked for the amount of time set in

L2-03 . During this time, residual voltage in the motor is allowed to diminish. This guards

against faults resulting from the drive output turning on while the motor still has residual

voltage.

If the minimum baseblock time ( L2-03 ) is greater than the power loss ride-thru time

( L2-02 ), drive operation resumes after the minimum baseblock time. If the minimum

baseblock time is less than the power loss ride-thru time, drive operation resumes after

recovery of input power.

L2-04 : Momentary Power Loss Recovery Factory setting: 0.3

Ramp Time Range: 0.0 to 2.0 seconds

After recovery from a momentary power loss, the drive performs a speed search. The ramp

recovery time ( L2-04 ) is the time is takes the output voltage to return to the preset V/f

pattern.

L2-05 : Undervoltage Detection Level Factory setting: 190 (230V ratings)

380 (460V ratings)

Range: 150 to 210 VDC (230V ratings)

300 to 420 VDC (460V ratings)

The setting of this parameter determines the DC bus undervoltage trip point. When the

voltage level on the DC bus drops below this value, a UV (undervoltage) fault will occur.

5.29 MOMENTARY POWER LOSS RIDE-THRU

5-52

Continued

5.29 MOMENTARY POWER LOSS RIDE-THRU

UNDERVOLTAGE

DETECTION

MOTOR

RPM

OUTPUT

FREQUENCY

OUTPUT

VOLTAGE

OUTPUT

CURRENT

L2-03

L2-02

L2-04

b3-03

b3-02

(150%)

b3-04

L2-03 : Minimum Baseblock Time

L2-02 : Power Loss Ride-thru Time

L2-04 : Voltage Recovery Time

b3-02 : Speed Search Current

b3-03 : Speed Search Decel Time

b3-04 : V/f Reduction During Speed Search

Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru, With Speed Search

SET FREQUENCY

5-53

H3-05 : Multi-function Analog Input 1

Selection (Term. 16)

H3-09 : Multi-function Analog Input 2

Selection (Term. 14)

Programming H3-05 or H3-09 per the chart

below configures terminal 16 or 14 for analog

control. The figures following the chart show how

each setting configures the analog input.

AVAILABILITY

DATA FUNCTION REMARKS (SEE NO

0, 1 2 3

0Manual reference External reference input X X X

1Frequency reference gain Total gain = Internal gain ( H3-02 ) x FGAIN X X X

(FGAIN)

2Frequency reference bias Total bias = Internal bias ( H3-03 ) + FBIAS; X X

(FBIAS) FBIAS is based on Fmax ( E1-04 )

4VBIAS Voltage boost after V/f conversion X — —

5Accel/decel time Accel/decel time varied by analog input X X X

coefficient

6DC injection braking DC injection braking current varied by analog input X X —

current adjust (10V/drive rated current); internal setting ( b2-02 )

ineffective

7Overtorque detection level Internal overtorque detection level ( C6-02 ) disabled X X X

8Stall prevention level Stall prevention level ( L3-06 = 100% level) varied by X — —

during running analog input

9Frequency reference Frequency reference lower limit is set by analog input. X X X

lower limit Either d2-02 setting value or analog input, whichever

is greater, becomes effective.

ASetting prohibited Analog input sets a fourth prohibited frequency, in X X X

frequency 4 addition to those set by d3-01 thru d3-03

BPID feedback Provides feedback signal for use with PID control ( b5-01 ) X X X

CPID Set Point Provides a setpoint signal for use with PID control. X X X

(Frequency reference no longer acts as PID setpoint.)

DFrequency Reference Additional frequency reference bias input. Total bias = X X

Bias 2 (FBIAS2) Internal bias (H3-03) + FBIAS + FBIAS2. FBIAS2 is based

on Fmax (E1-04).

E - F Not Used — — —

10 FWD torque limit 10V = 100% of motor rated torque (forward direction) — X X

Quadrant 1 (See Note 3)

11 REV torque limit 10V = 100% of motor rated torque (reverse direction) — X X

Quadrant 3 (See Note 3)

12 Regenerative torque limit 10V = 100% of motor rated torque (forward & reverse — X X

(TLG) regeneration) Quadrants 2 & 4 (See Note 3)

5.30 MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS (Term. 14 & 16)

GPD 515/G5

15 +15V

0-10V

(20KΩ)

–15V

See Note 1

•

AVAILABILITY

DATA FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (See Note 2)

0,1 2 3

TABLE 5-1; H3-05 and H3-09 Data Settings

5-54

Continued

AVAILABILITY

DATA FUNCTION REMARKS (SEE NO

0, 1 2 3

13 Torque reference (in 10V = 100% of motor rated torque (forward & reverse) — — X

Torque Control); Quadrants 1, 2, 3, & 4 (See Note 3)

Torque limit (in Speed

Control)

14 Torque compensation See paragraph 5.43. — — X

15 Torque limit — X X

1F “Not Used” When programmed in H3-05, terminal 16 input has no effect. X X X

When programmed in H3-09, terminal 14 input is added to

the terminal 13 frequency reference.

NOTES:

1. For a bidirectional pot input instead of 0-10V, set H3-04 = 1 (for terminal 16) or

H3-08= 1 (for terminal 14), and connect the low (negative) side of the pot to

terminal 33. If using a –10 to +10V input, connect the positive side to terminal 16

or 14, and the negative side to terminal 17.

2. Column headings refer to set value of A1-02, Control Method; 0 = V/f,

1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop Vector, 3 = Flux Vector. "X" in column indicates

Available, "—" indicates Not Available.

3. Quadrant 1 is forward motor rotation, torque in forward direction;

Quadrant 2 is forward motor rotation, torque in reverse direction (regeneration);

Quadrant 3 is reverse motor rotation, torque in reverse direction;

Quadrant 4 is reverse motor rotation, torque in forward direction (regeneration).

5.30 MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS (Term. 14 & 16)

H3-05 = 0

H3-09 = 0

100%

FREQUENCY

REF.

–10V 0%

0V 10V

–100%

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 1

H3-09 = 1

100%

FGAIN

–10V 0%

0V 10V

–100%

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

AVAILABILITY

DATA FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (See Note 2)

0,1 2 3

5-55

Continued

5.30 MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS (Term. 14 & 16)

H3-05 = 2 or C

H3-09 = 2 or C

100%

FBIAS &

FBIAS2

–10V 0%

0V 10V

–100%

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 4

H3-09 = 4

100V

VBIAS

–10V 0V 10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 5

H3-09 = 5

REDUCTION

COEFFI-

CIENT 1

–10V 0V 1V 10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

Actual accel or decel time = Accel or decel time

Coefficient

H3-05 = 6

H3-09 = 6

100%

DC INJECTION

BRAKING

CURRENT

–10V 0%

0V 10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 7

H3-09 = 7

200%

OVERTORQUE

DETECTION

LEVEL 0%

–10V 0V 10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 8

H3-09 = 8

STALL 100%

PREVENTION

LEVEL DURING 50%

RUNNING 30%

(PERCENT

OF L3-06 –10V 0V 3V 5V

10V

SETTING)

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 9

H3-09 = 9 Max. Output Freq.

( E1-04 )

FREQUENCY

REFERENCE

LOWER LIMIT 0 Hz

–10V 0V 10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = A

H3-09 = A Max. Output Freq.

( E1-04 )

SETTING

PROHIBITED

FREQUENCY 4 0 Hz

–10V 0V 10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

5-56

Continued

H3-12 : Analog Input Filter Time Factory setting: 0.00

Constant Range: 0.00 to 2.00 seconds

This parameter adjusts the time it takes to process the analog input signal. The signal

that comes into the drive on terminals 13, 14 and 16 goes through an analog to digital

converter, and then to the control circuit. This filter time constant determines the time

between converting and processing.

For cases when there is noise on the analog signal, this time constant may be increased.

Extending the processing time can help prevent erratic performance of the drive.

5.30 MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUTS (Term. 14 & 16)

H3-05 = 10

H3-09 = 10

FWD 100%

TORQUE

LIMIT

–10V 0V 10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 11

H3-09 = 11

REV 100%

TORQUE

LIMIT

–10V 0V 10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 12

H3-09 = 12

REGEN 100%

TORQUE

LIMIT

–10V 0V 10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 13

H3-09 = 13

100%

TORQUE

REFERENCE

–10V 0%

0V 10V

–100%

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 15

H3-09 = 15

100%

TORQUE

LIMIT

0V 10V

–100%

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 14

H3-09 = 14

100%

TORQUE

COMPEN-

SATION

–10V 0%

0V 10V

–100%

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

5-57

H4-01 : Multi-function Analog Monitor Factory setting: 2

Output 1 Selection Range: 1 to 38

H4-04 : Multi-function Analog Monitor Factory setting: 3

Output 2 Selection Range: 1 to 38

The analog monitor outputs provides a 0 to ±1 0

Vdc signal between terminals 21 & 22 (or 23 &

22), proportional to the value of the U1-XX

parameter identified by the setting of H4-01 (or

H4-04 ). (See Appendix 1 for listing of U1-XX

parameters.)

Factory setting, monitor output 1 =

H4-01=2 (U1-02) : Output Frequency

(10V = Fmax)

Factory setting, monitor output 2 =

H4-04=3 (U1-03) : Drive output

current

(5V = continuous rated current)

NOTE

This output is suitable for metering, but SHOULD NOT be used for external

control circuits. To produce an output signal for use by external control

circuits, an Analog Monitor option card (AO-08 or AO-12) must be installed

in the drive.

H4-02 : Multi-function Analog Monitor 1 Gain Factory Setting : 1.00

H4-05 : Multi-function Analog Monitor 2 Gain Factory Setting : 0.50

Range (each): 0.00 to 2.50

The settings of these parameters, in increments of 0.01, are used to calibrate the output at

terminals 21 & 22 or 23 & 22.

H4-03 : Multi-function Analog Monitor 1 Bias Factory Setting (each): 0.0 %

H4-06 : Multi-function Analog Monitor 2 Bias Range (each): –10.0 to +10.0 %

The settings of these parameters, in increments of 0.1 %, are used to calibrate the output

at terminals 21 & 22 or 23 & 22.

H4-07 : Multi-function Analog Monitor Signal Factory Setting: 0

Level Selection Range: 0 or 1

This function allows the analog monitor output(s) to have a unipolar output signal (0-10V),

or a bipolar output signal (0 to ±10V).

0 : Analog output is + voltage only (absolute value).

1 : Analog output is ± voltage according to sign (direction).

5.31 MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG MONITOR OUTPUT (Term. 21-23)

GPD 515/G5

Analog 21

Monitor 1

(±10 VDC

output)

Analog

Monitor 2

(±10 VDC 23

output)

MULTI-

FUNCTION

MONITOR

OUTPUT 1

+ –

●

FREQUENCY/ CURRENT

METER

(1MA FULL SCALE)

MULTI-

FUNCTION

MONITOR

OUTPUT 2

+ –

5-58

H1-01 : Terminal 3 Function Factory settings:

2-Wire control 3-Wire control

H1-02 : Terminal 4 Function H1-01 24 24

H1-03 : Terminal 5 Function H1-02 14 14

H1-04 : Terminal 6 Function H1-03 3 0

H1-05 : Terminal 7 Function H1-04 4 3

H1-06 : Terminal 8 Function H1-05 6 4

H1-06 8 6

These six parameters select the input signal

functions for terminals 3 thru 8, and can be

independently set.

Parameter settings are checked whenever

power is applied to the drive, or upon

exiting Program mode. A parameter set

value failure ( oPE3 ) will occur if any of

the following conditions are detected among

these six parameters:

(1) Two or more of the parameters contain the same value (except for External

Fault, data " 2X ").

(2) Two or three Speed Search functions (data " 61 ", " 62 ", or " 64 ") have

been selected.

(3) Any Speed Search function (data " 61 ", " 62 ", or " 64 ") has been entered

into any parameter other than H1-06 .

(4) Both the Sample/Hold (data " A ") and Up/Down (data " 10 " & " 11 ")

functions have been selected.

(5) The Up function (data " 10 ") and the Down function (data " 11 ") have

not both been selected.

(6) The Trim Control Increase (Data "1C") AND Trim Control Decrease (Data "1D")

Functions have not both been selected.

Table 5-2 lists the possible data setting values for these parameters, with the function and

a brief description for each one.

For a few of the data settings, a more detailed description is given on the following pages;

for others, the description is given in other PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES paragraphs.

EXTERNAL

CONTACTS

GPD 515/G5

3H1-01

4H1-02 MULTI-

> FUNCTION

5H1-03 INPUT

6H1-04

7H1-05

8H1-06

•

5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS (Term. 3-8)

5-59

Continued

DESCRIPTION

DATA FUNCTION Signal Levels: 0= state; 1= pulse

0Forward/Reverse selection Redefines terminals to: X X X X

for 3-wire control 1 = Run; 2 = Stop; corresponding

terminal (3-8) = FWD/REV select

1Local/Remote selection Open = Operates according to setting of X X X X

b1-01and b1-02

Closed = Operates from keys of the Digital

Operator

See Data description following this table

2Option / drive reference Open = Operates from Digital Operator and or X X X X

selection external terminals

Closed = Operates from installed option

3Multi-step reference X X X X

select 1

4Multi-step reference See paragraph 5.25 B XXXX

select 2

5Multi-step reference X X X X

select 3

6Jog frequency reference Closed = Jog selected X X X X

See paragraph 5.24 & 5.25 B

7Accel/decel time Open = Accel/decel by C1-01/ C1-02 XXXX

selection 1 Closed = Accel/decel by C1-03/ C1-04

See paragraph 5.2 B

8External base block Closed = Shuts off drive output X X X X

(N.O. contact input) (speed reference is held)

See Data description following this table

9External base block Open = Shuts off drive output X X X X

(N.C. contact input) (speed reference is held)

See Data description following this table

AAccel/decel ramp hold Closed = Hold X X X X

(speed hold command) See paragraph 5.2 B

BExternal overheat alarm Closed = " oH2 " blinks on the Digital Operator, X X X X

signal and operation continues (minor fault)

CMulti-function analog input Open = Analog inputs (terms. 14 & 16) are X X X X

selection disabled

Closed = Analog inputs (terms. 14 & 16) are

enabled

DSpeed control disable Open = Speed control enabled — X — X

Closed = Speed control disabled

EASR integral reset (IRST) Closed = Integral reset —X —X

See paragraph 5.7 C

FTerminal Not Used Drive does not react to input XXXX

AVAILABILITY

DATA FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (See Note 1)

0 1 2 3

Table 5-2. H1-01 thru H1-06 Data Settings

5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS (Term. 3-8)

5-60

Continued

5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS (Term. 3-8)

DESCRIPTION

DATA FUNCTION Signal Levels: 0= state; 1= pulse

10 Up function

See Data description following this table

XXXX

11 Down function XXXX

12 Forward jog (Jog2) See paragraph 5.24 XXXX

13 Reverse jog (Jog2) X X X X

14 Fault Reset Resets a fault, only if RUN command is X X X X

not present

15 Fast-Stop (N.O.) Open = No Effect X X X X

Closed = Ramp to stop by Fast-Stop Decel

Time ( C1-09)

16 Motor 2 Select Switches between two different sets of motor X X X X

parameters

Open = Use parameter A1-02,

E1 Parameter & E2 Parameters.

Closed = Use parameter E3-01, E4

Parameters & E5 Parameters.

17 Fast Stop (N.C.) Closed = No Effect X X X X

Open = Ramp to stop by Fast-Stop Decel Time

(C1-09)

18 Timer function

See Data description following this table

XXXX

(ON or OFF delay)

19 PID control disable Closed = PID control is disabled – setpoint X X X X

becomes frequency reference

1A Accel/decel time Open = Accel/decel by C1-01thru C1-04 XXXX

selection 2 Closed = Accel/decel by C1-05thru C1-08

See paragraph 5.2 B

1B Program lockout Open = Programming from Digital Operator X X X X

is disabled

Closed = Programming from Digital Operator

is enabled

1C Trim control increase Closed = Increase analog frequency reference X X X X

by d4-02 value

See Data description following this table

1D Trim control decrease Closed = Decrease analog frequency reference X X X X

by d4-02 value

See Data description following this table

1E Analog reference sample/ Open = Hold frequency reference X X X X

hold Closed = Sample frequency reference

See Data description following this

table

1F Frequency reference Open = Freq. ref. from term. 13 X X X X

selection Closed = Freq. ref. from term. 14

AVAILABILITY

DATA FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (See Note 1)

0 1 2 3

Table 5-2. H1-01 thru H1-06 Data Settings - Continued

5-61

Continued

NOTES:

* All contact closures must be maintained, except for speed search (Data " 61 ",

" 62", & ' 64 "), which may be momentary (see paragraph 5.32 D).

1. Column headings refer to set value of A1-02, Control Method; 0 = V/f,

1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open loop vector, 3 = Flux vector.

DESCRIPTION

DATA FUNCTION Signal Levels: 0 = state; 1 = pulse

20 External fault Second digit of setting is a hexadecimal value X X X X

thru which defines what type of external contact is

2F used and how the drive will react when the

signal input is active. See paragraph 5.17

30 PID integral reset Closed = Set calculated integral time X X X X

value to 0. See paragraph 5.36F

31 PID Integral Hold Closed = Hold integrator at its present level X X X X

(PID Control). See paragraph 5.36F

60 DC injection braking Closed = DC injection braking active X X X X

command See paragraph 5.10 D

61 Speed Search 1 Closed * = Speed Search operation from X — X —

maximum frequency

See Data description following this table

62 Speed Search 2 Closed * = Speed Search operation from set X — X —

frequency

See Data description following this table

63 Energy saving operation Closed = Energy saving X X — —

See paragraph 5.16

64 Speed Search 3 Closed * = Speed Search operation from X — X —

output frequency

See Data description following this table

65 Kinetic energy braking Closed = KEB ride-thru is disabled X X X X

ride-thru NC

66 Kinetic energy braking Closed = KEB ride-thru is enabled X X X X

ride-thru NO

71 Speed / torque control Open = Speed control operation — — — X

selection Closed = Torque control operation

See paragraph 5.43

72 Zero-Servo command Open = Zero-Servo OFF — — — X

Closed = Zero-Servo ON

See paragraph 5.49 A

77 ASR gain selection Closed = ASR proportional gain is set — — — X

according to C5-03

Table 5-2. H1-01 thru H1-06 Data Settings - Continued

5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS (Term. 3-8)

AVAILABILITY

DATA FUNCTION DESCRIPTION (See Note 1)

0 1 2 3

5-62

Continued

A. Data 1: Local/Remote

Set b1-01 and b1-02 to data " 1 " to select external inputs as the source for

frequency reference and operation commands. The use of a Local/Remote command input

allows switching between Digital Operator control and the external terminal input signals,

without the need to re-program b1-01 and b1-02 . If the status of the Local/Remote

command input is changed while the drive is running, the Local/Remote operation selection

is not completed until the next time the drive is stopped.

Closed = Controlled locally (Digital Operator)

Open = Controlled according to the setting of b1-01 and b1-02

NOTE

If manual speed is selected

– by the external Auto/Manual switch (3SS [2-wire] or 2SS [3-wire]),

– by jumper from terminal 5 to 11 (2-wire control),

or – by jumper from terminal 6 to 11 (3-wire control),

the drive speed reference will be controlled by manual speed reference

regardless of the state of the Local/Remote input.

b1-07: Local / Remote Run Selection

When switching from local (digital operator) back into remote (terminals) and a remote

run command is present, parameter b1-07 determines how the drive will react. With a

setting of "1", the drive will start running as soon as remote mode is selected. A setting

of " 0 " will require the run command to be removed and re-applied after the remote

mode is selected.

5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS (Term. 3-8)

Setting

Description

Cycle External Run

Accept External Run

Factory Setting: 0

Range: 0 to 1

5-63

Continued

B. Data 8: External Base Block by N.O. Contact

• When either the Forward Run command or

Reverse Run command is present, and the

external Base Block command is applied

(i.e. contact closed), coast stop is accom-

plished (after a 20 msec delay), while the

frequency command is maintained.

When the Base Block command is removed,

the drive will recover in a manner similar

to that of Speed Search operation, except that

it searches up from 0 Hz, and supersedes a

Speed Search command.

• When both the Forward Run command and

Reverse Run command are open, and the

external Base Block command is applied (i.e. contact closed), coast stop is accom-

plished and after a 20 msec delay the frequency command is changed to 0Hz.

When the Base Block command is removed, the drive will remain in stopped

condition until Forward Run command or Reverse Run command is again applied.

• When external Base Block command is active, a blinking " BB " will be displayed

on the Digital Operator.

C. Data 9: External Base Block by N.C. Contact

Base block operation is the same as described above, except that the Base Block contact

must be open to be recognized.

GPD 515/G5

EXTERNAL

BASE BLOCK

o o

RUN RUN

Freq. Cmd Freq. Cmd

Base Block Base Block

V out V out

20msec 20msec

t = L2-04 setting

(A) Base Block With Run Active (B) Base Block After Stop Com

5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS (Term. 3-8)

5-64

Continued

D. Data 61 : Speed Search From Max Frequency

Data 62: Speed Search From Set Frequency

Data 64: Speed Search From Output Frequency

A multi-function input terminal is utilized to activate speed search. When the external

speed search command is closed, the base is blocked for the min. base block time,

L2-03 , then the speed search is made. The operation depends on the set value.

IMPORTANT

Set values 61, 62& 64 CANNOT be selected in combination.

• When 61 is set, the speed search begins with the maximum frequency.

• When 62 is set, the speed search begins with the frequency command

that has been set after the search command was received.

• When 64 is set, the speed search begins with the last output frequency

before the speed search command was received.

RUN

SIGNAL

SPEED SEARCH

MAX FREQ., FREQ.

REF., OR OUTPUT

FREQ. WHEN SPEED

SEARCH IS INPUTTED

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

VOLTAGE AT

SPEED SEARCH

OUTPUT VOLTAGE

MIN.

BASE

BLOCK

TIME

( L2-03 )

SPEED SEARCH

OPERATION

WITHIN 0.5 SEC

NOTE: When momentary power loss ride-thru function is selected ( L2-01 = 1 or 2),

the Speed Search command must be enabled.

Speed Search Operation Timing

SPEED COINCIDENCE

POINT

NORMAL V/f

OUTPUT

( E1=03 )

5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS (Term. 3-8)

5-65

Continued

b3-01 : Speed Factory setting: 0= Disabled (when V/f control or Open

Search Loop Vector control has been selected)

Selection 1= Enabled (when V/f w/PG control or

Flux Vector control has been selected)

Range: 0 or 1

b3-02 : Speed Search Deactivation Current Factory setting: 150

Level Range: 0 to 200 %

b3-03 : Speed Search Deceleration Time Factory setting: 2.0

Range: 0.0 to 10.0 sec.

After power recovery, if the drive output current is larger than the set value of

b3-02 , speed search is started, using a decel rate per the setting of b3-03 . When

drive output current is lower than the set value of b3-02 , speed search is complete and

acceleration or deceleration is continued at the normal rate ( C1-XX ) to set frequency.

L2-03 : Minimum Baseblock Time Factory setting: See Table A3-1

Range: 0.1 to 5.0 sec.

When a momentary power loss is detected, the drive output transistors are disabled for a

period of time determined by the setting of L2-03 . The L2-03 setting should represent

the time required for the motor residual voltage to go to zero.

When the momentary power loss time exceeds the minimum base block time, the speed

search operation is started immediately after power recovery.

WHEN MIN. BASEBLOCK TIME IS LONGER THAN MOMENTARY POWER LOSS TIME

MOMENTARY POWER

LOSS TIME

MIN.

BASEBLOCK TIME

DRIVE

BASEBLOCK TIME

WHEN MIN. BASEBLOCK TIME IS SHORTER THAN MOMENTARY POWER LOSS TIME

MOMENTARY POWER

LOSS TIME

MIN.

BASEBLOCK TIME

DRIVE

BASEBLOCK TIME

5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS (Term. 3-8)

5-66

Continued

E. Data 18 : Timer Input Function

H2-01 : Multi-function Output Terminals (9 & 10) Data 12 : Timer Function

H2-02 : Multi-function Output Terminals (25 & 27)

H2-03 : Multi-function Output Terminals (26 & 27)

b4-01 : On-delay Timer Factory setting: 0.0

Range: 0.0 to 300.0 sec.

b4-02 : Off-delay Timer Factory setting: 0.0

Range: 0.0 to 300.0 sec.

When the timer function input is “closed” for longer than On-delay Timer ( b4-01 ), the

timer function output closes.

When the timer input is “open” for longer than Off-delay Timer ( b4-02 ), the timer function

output opens.

As can be seen, the timer function must be programmed as both a multi-function input and

an output to be effective.

F. Data 1E : Sample/Hold Command

This function applies only to an analog voltage or current input used as a frequency

reference at terminals 13 or 14.

If the Sample/Hold command is present (contact is closed) for more than 0.1 sec., the

frequency reference will follow (sample) the analog signal, e.g. if 5V corresponds to 50%

frequency, a 5V analog signal will produce 50% frequency reference if the Sample/Hold

command is present.

If the Sample/Hold command is removed (contact is opened) while the Drive is still in Run

condition, the frequency reference is held at the level it was at the time the Sample/Hold

command was removed, e.g. the frequency reference would remain at 50%, even though

the analog signal increased to 8V.

5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS (Term. 3-8)

Multi-function Contact

Input: Timer Function

Multi-function Contact

Output: Timer Function

b4-01 b4-02

ON ON

b4-01

ON ON

b4-02

ON ON ON

5-67

Continued

G. Data 10 : Up Function

Data 11 : Down Function

d4-01 : Frequency Reference Hold Factory setting: 0

Function Selection Data: 0 = Disabled

1 = Enabled

Programming data " 10 " and " 11 " for two of the six multi-function input terminals allows

those inputs to be used for Up/Down frequency setting by simulating the action of a MOP

(motor operated potentiometer).

NOTES:

1. Set parameter b1-02 = 1.

2. OPE3 fault will occur if " 10 " and " 11 " data settings are not used together.

3. OPE3 fault will occur if " 10 " and " 11 " data settings are programmed at the

same time as setting " A " (Accel/decel ramp hold).

4. Jog has priority over Up/Down function.

5. Up/Down has priority over Multi-step Speed inputs.

6. Up/Down is ineffective when operation is from the Digital Operator.

(NOTES continued on next page)

Sample/Hold Function Timing

SAMPLE/

HOLD CMD Open

10V 100%

80%

50%

0.11

sec.

0.1

sec.

0.05

sec.

0.15

sec.

Closed

ANALOG INPUT

5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS (Term. 3-8)

FREQ. REF.

0.1

sec.

5-68

Continued

G. (Continued)

NOTES (Continued):

7. Upper limit speed is set by the formula:

E1-04 (Fmax) x d2-01 (Freq. Ref. Upper Limit)

8. Lower limit speed is either the reference from external terminals 13 or 14,

or from d2-01 , Frequency Reference Lower Limit.

9. If d4-01 = " 0 ", Frequency Reference will be reset to 0 Hz if the stop

command is given, or if input power is removed and reapplied.

10. If d4-01 = " 1 ", the drive will retain the last valid Frequency Reference

if a stop command is given or if input power is removed, and will accelerate

to that reference upon reapplication of a run command.

EXAMPLE:

H1-05 Data 10 : Up function

H1-06 Data 11 : Down function

5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS (Term. 3-8)

GPD 515/G5

7UP

8DOWN

o o

DOWN

o o

INPUT SIGNAL FUNCTION

UP DOWN

Open Open HOLD

Closed Open UP (Frequency command approaches frequency

command upper limit)

Open Closed DOWN (Frequency command approaches minimum

output frequency or frequency command lower limit,

whichever is larger)

Closed Closed HOLD

5-69

Continued

H. Data 1C : Trim Control Increase

Data 1D : Trim Control Decrease

d4-02 : Trim Control Level Factory setting: 10

Range: 0 to 100 %

The value of d4-02 is a percentage of the maximum output frequency ( E1-04 ).

When the trim control increase input is closed, the value of d4-02 gets added to the

analog frequency reference.

When the trim control decrease input is closed, the value of d4-02 gets subtracted

from the analog frequency reference.

FWD RUN

COMMAND

DOWN

COMMAND

UPPER

LIMIT SPEED

LOWER

LIMIT SPEED

OUTPUT

FREQUENCY*

"SPEED AT SET

FREQUENCY"

MULTI-FUNCTION

OUTPUT SIGNAL * U= UP (Accel) status; D= DOWN (Decel) status; H= HOLD (constant speed) status;

U1 = At Upper Limit Speed; D1 = At Lower Limit Speed

Up/Down Frequency Setting Timing

D1 D D DHHHHHH HU1UU U

D1 D1

5.32 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT TERMINALS (Term. 3-8)

5-70

H2-01 : Contact Output (external

terminals 9 & 10)

H2-02 : Open Collector Output

(external terminals 25 & 27)

H2-03 : Open Collector Output

(external terminals 26 & 27)

A contact, or two different open collector

outputs, can be programmed to change states

during any of the conditions indicated in Table

5-3.

IMPORTANT

If an open collector output is applied to a DC relay, the relay MUST be diode

protected, as shown in the recommended configuration below.

5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27)

GPD 515/G5

o o 9

MULTI-FUNCTION

CONTACT OUTPUT

250Vac 1A OR LESS

30Vdc 1A OR LESS

(FACTORY SETTING

IS FOR SIGNAL

DURING OPERATION)

MULTI-

FUNCTION

OPEN

COLLECTOR

OUTPUTS

48Vdc AT

50mA MAX.

Recommended

Configuration for

DC Relays

▲

RELAY

DIODE

48Vdc MAX. *

* Customer

supplied

•

5-71

Continued

5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27)

DESCRIPTION

DATA FUNCTION Signal Levels: 0= state; 1= pulse

0During Operation Closed = Drive is operating X X X

1Zero speed Closed = Drive is at 0Hz X X X

2Speed at set frequency 1 Closed = Freq. Ref. – L4-02 ≤output X X X

freq ≤Freq. Ref. + L4-02

See Data description following this table

3Speed coincidence 1 Closed = Speed at set frequency and X X X

L4-01– L4-02 ≤output

freq. ≤L4-01 + L4-02

See Data description following this table

4Frequency detection 1 – low Closed = Output frequency ≤L4-01 XXX

See Data description following this table

5Frequency detection 1 – high Closed = Output frequency ≥L4-01 XXX

See Data description following this table

6Operation ready Closed = Drive is ready for operation X X X

7During undervoltage detection Closed = Undervoltage detected X X X

8During base block Closed = Drive output base block is X X X

active; motor is coasting

9Frequency reference mode Open = Command by external input X X X

Closed = Command by Digital Operator

ARun reference mode Open = Run by external input X X X

Closed = Run by Digital Operator

BOvertorque detection 1 Closed = Overtorque detected X X X

CFrequency reference missing Closed = Frequency reference is missing X X X

DBraking resistor fault Closed = Braking resistor is overheating or X X X

has faulted

EFault Closed = Drive fault has occurred XXX

(except CPF00 , CPF01 )

FNot Used

10 Alarm (minor fault) Closed = Alarm condition is present X X X

11 During fault reset Closed = Drive is performing fault reset X X X

12 Timer output function See paragraph 5.32 E XXX

AVAILABILITY

DATA CONDITION SIGNAL LEVEL (See Note 1)

0, 1 2 3

Table 5-3. H2-01 thru H2-03 Data Settings

5-72

Continued

5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27)

DESCRIPTION

DATA FUNCTION Signal Levels: 0= state; 1= pulse

13 Speed at set frequency 2 Closed = Freq. Ref. – L4-04 ≤output X X X

freq ≤Freq. Ref. + L4-04

See Data description following this table

14 Speed coincidence 2 Closed = Speed at set frequency and X X X

L4-03– L4-04 ≤output

freq. ≤L4-03 + L4-04

See Data description following this table

15 Frequency detection 2 – low Open = Output freq. ≥L4-03+ L4-04 XXX

Closed = Output frequency ≤L4-03

See Data description following this table

16 Frequency detection 2 – high Open = Output freq. ≤L4-03+ L4-04 XXX

Closed = Output frequency > L4-03

See Data description following this table

17 Overtorque detection 1 Open = Overtorque 1 detected according to X X X

(N.C.) settings of L6-01thru L6-03

18 Overtorque detection 2 Closed = Overtorque 2 detected according to X X X

(N.O.) settings of L6-04thru L6-06

19 Overtorque detection 2 Open = Overtorque 2 detected according to X X X

(N.C.) settings of L6-04thru L6-06

1A During reverse run Closed = Drive operation in reverse X X X

1B During base block 2 Open = Drive output base block is active; X X X

motor is coasting

1C Motor 2 Selected Closed = Motor 2 is selected X X X

1D Regenerating Closed = Regenerating mode [ only when A1- ——X

02 is set for Flux Vector Control ]

1E During restart Closed = Retry operation after a fault X X X

1F OL1 pre-alarm Closed = Thermal overload level exceeds X X X

90% of fault detection level

20 OH pre-alarm Closed = Cooling fin temperature exceeds X X X

L8-02 level

21 – 2F Not Used

30 During torque limit Closed = Torque limit — X X

31 During speed limit Closed = Speed limit reached [ only when A1- ——X

02 is set for Flux Vector Control ]

AVAILABILITY

DATA CONDITION SIGNAL LEVEL (See Note 1)

0, 1 2 3

Table 5-3. H2-01 thru H2-03 Data Settings - Continued

5-73

NOTES:

1. Column headings refer to set value of A1-02, Control Method; 0 = V/f,

1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open loop vector, 3 = Flux vector.

A. Data 2–5, 13–16 : Frequency or Speed Detection Output Signals

L4-01 : Speed Coincidence Detection Level Factory setting: 0.0

Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

L4-02 : Speed Coincidence Detection Width Factory setting: 2.0

Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Hz

L4-03 : Speed Coincidence Detection Factory setting: 0.0

Level (+/–) Range: –400.0 to +400.0 Hz

L4-04 : Speed Coincidence Detection Factory setting: 2.0

Width (+/–) Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Hz

These speed coincidence parameters are used to control contact output at terminals 9 &

10, or one of the open collector outputs at terminals 25 & 26 (with respect to terminal

27), when selected by H1-01 thru H1-03 . Both L4-01 and L4-02 are insensitive to

motor direction.

The output contact will close, or the open collector output will go low, when the

acceleration or deceleration is completed, or output frequency or speed is within the

detection width for the selected output function. See the timing diagrams on the following

pages.

Continued

5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27)

DESCRIPTION

DATA FUNCTION Signal Levels: 0= state; 1= pulse

32 Not Used

33 Zero-Servo complete Closed = Zero-Servo is complete — — X

See paragraph 5.49 C

34 – 36 Not Used

37 During operation Closed = Drive is operating (except during X X X

base block or injection braking)

38 – 3F Not Used

AVAILABILITY

DATA CONDITION SIGNAL LEVEL (See Note 1)

0, 1 2 3

Table 5-3. H2-01 thru H2-03 Data Settings - Continued

5-74

Continued

Frequency detection 1 – low

Frequency detection 1 – high

Frequency detection 2 – low

5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27)

H2-01 = 4 L4-01 = 30 Hz L4-02 = 5 Hz

35 Hz

30 Hz

35 Hz

L4-01 =

L4-02

: Output Freq. or

Motor Speed

L4-02

Contact

Closure

L4-01 =

H2-01 = 5 L4-01 = 30 Hz L4-02 = 5 Hz

25 Hz

30 Hz

25 Hz

L4-01 =

L4-02

: Output Freq. or

Motor Speed

L4-02

Contact

Closure

L4-01 =

H2-01 = 15 L4-03 = 30 Hz L4-04 = 5 Hz

35 Hz

30 Hz

L4-03 =

L4-04

: Output Freq. or

Motor Speed

Contact

Closure

5-75

Continued

Frequency detection 2 – high

Speed at set frequency 1

Speed at set frequency 2

5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27)

H2-01 = 16 L4-03 = 30 Hz L4-04 = 5 Hz

25 Hz

30 Hz

L4-03 =

L4-04

: Output Freq. or

Motor Speed

Contact

Closure

H2-01 = 2 L4-02 = 10 Hz

60 Hz

50 Hz

60 Hz

: Speed Reference

Contact

Closure

: Output Freq. or

Motor Speed

H2-01 = 13 L4-04 = 10 Hz

60 Hz

50 Hz

: Speed Reference

Contact

Closure

: Output Freq. or

Motor Speed

50 Hz

60 Hz

5-76

Continued

Speed coincidence 1

Speed coincidence 2

5.33 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT TERMINALS (Term. 9 & 10; 25-27)

H2-01 = 3 L4-01 = 30 Hz L4-02 = 5 Hz

35 Hz

30 Hz

35 Hz

L4-01 =

L4-02

: Output Freq. or

Motor Speed

L4-02

Contact

Closure

25 Hz

L4-01 =

H2-01 = 14 L4-03 = 30 Hz L4-04 = 5 Hz

35 Hz

30 Hz

L4-03 =

L4-04

: Output Freq. or

Motor Speed

Contact

Closure

25 Hz

5-77

L8-05 : Input Phase Loss Detection Selection Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 or 1

The input phase loss detection circuit monitors the DC bus current ripple and activates

when one of the input phases is lost. This causes a " PF " fault to occur and the motor to

coast to a stop.

Setting Description

0 Input phase loss detection disabled

1 Input phase loss detection enabled

L8-07 : Output Phase Loss Detection Selection Factory setting: 1

Range: 0 or 1

The output phase loss detection circuit monitors the DCCT's and activates when one of the

output phases is lost. This causes a " LF " fault to occur and the motor to coast to a stop.

Setting Description

0 Output phase loss detection disabled

1 Output phase loss detection enabled

5.34 PHASE LOSS DETECTION, INPUT

5.35 PHASE LOSS DETECTION, OUTPUT

5-78

The Proportional, Integral and Derivative control function provides closed-loop control, or

regulation, of a system process variable (pressure, temperature, etc.). This regulation is

accomplished by comparing a feedback signal to a setpoint reference, which results in an

error signal. The PID control algorithm then performs calculations, based upon the PID

parameter settings ( b5-01 thru b5-14 ), on this error signal. The result of the PID

algorithm is then used as the new frequency reference, or is added to the existing speed

reference.

A. b5-01 : PID Selection Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 4

Using this parameter, PID control can be enabled, and the type of PID control can be

selected.

Setting Description

0 PID Disabled

1 PID Enabled (D = Feedback)

2 PID Enabled (D = Feed forward)

3 PID Enabled, Reference + PID (D = Feedback)

4 PID Enabled, Reference + PID (D = Feedback forward)

5.36 PID CONTROL

Continued

B. Setpoint Reference Selection

b1-01 : Reference Selection Factory setting: 1

Range: 0 to 4

d1-01 thru d1-09 : Multi-step Frequency Factory settings: d1-09 = 6.0

Presets all others = 0.0

Range (each): 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

H3-01 : Auto Speed Reference Signal Factory setting: 0

Level Selection (Term. 13) Range: 0 or 1

H3-04 : Multi-Function Analog Input 1 Factory setting: 0

Level Selection (Term. 16) Range: 0 or 1

H3-05 : Multi-Function Analog Input 1 Factory setting: 0

Selection (Term. 16) Range: 0 to 1F

H3-08 : Multi-Function Analog Input 2 Factory setting: 2

Level Selection (Term. 14) Range: 0 to 2

H3-09 : Multi-Function Analog Input 2 Factory setting: 1F

Selection (Term. 14) Range: 0 to 1F

The PID setpoint can come from the frequency reference (terminal 13 for 0 – 10 VDC or the

multi-step speed parameters d1-01 thru d1-09) or a Multi-Function Analog Input.

PID Setpoint examples:

• External Terminal 13: Set b1-01 to data " 1 " or

• Multi-step speed parameters: Set b1-01 to data " 0 " (See Multi-step

Speed Setting, paragraph 5.25B) or

• External Terminal 16: Set H3-05 to data " C " or

• External Terminal 14: Set H3-09 to data " C "

C. Feedback Signal Selection

H3-05 : Multi-function Analog Input 1 Factory setting: 0

Selection (Term. 16) Range: 0 to 1F

H3-09 : Multi-function Analog Input 2 Factory setting: 1F

Selection (Term. 14) Range: 0 to 1F

Select the PID control Feedback Signal from external terminal 14 for a current signal

(4-20mA DC) or from terminal 16 for a voltage (0-10 VDC or –10 to +10 VDC).

PID Feedback examples:

• Current signal (4-20mA): Set H3-09 to data " B " and H3-08 to data " 2 ".

• Voltage signal (0-10 VDC): Set H3-05 to data " B " and H3-04 to data " 0 ".

• Voltage signal (–10 to 10 VDC): Set H3-05 to data " B " and H3-04 to

data " 1 ".

5-79

5.36 PID CONTROL

5-80

Continued

D. PID Settings

b5-02 : Proportional Gain Factory setting: 1.00

Range: 0.00 to 10.00

Proportional gain is the value by which the error signal is multiplied to generate a new

PID controller output. A higher setting will result in a more responsive system. A lower

setting will result in a more stable system.

b5-03 : Integral Time Factory setting: 1.0

Range: 0.0 to 360.0 seconds

This parameter determines how fast the PID controller will seek to eliminate any

steady-state error. The smaller the setting, the faster the error will be eliminated. To

eliminate the integral function entirely, set this parameter to 0.0 seconds. A lower

setting will result in a more responsive system. A higher setting will result in a more

stable system.

b5-04 : Integral Value Limit(1) Factory setting: 100.0

Range: 0.0 to 100.0 %

This parameter will limit the effect that the integrator can have. It works whether the

PID controller output is positive or negative. It can also be used to prevent integrator

“wind-up.”

b5-05 : Derivative Time Factory setting: 0.00

Range: 0.0 to 10.00 seconds

This parameter can be adjusted to increase system response to fast load or reference

changes, and to reduce overshoot upon startup. To eliminate the differential function

entirely, set this parameter to 0.00 seconds.

b5-06 : PID Output Limit(1) Factory setting: 100.0

Range: 0.0 to 100.0 %

Parameter b5-06 can be used to set the maximum effect the PID controller will have

on the system. It also will limit the PID output when it is either positive or negative.

NOTE: When the PID output limit is reached, the integrator will hold and not change in

value until the PID output is less than the PID output limit.

b5-07 : PID Offset Adjustment(1) Factory setting: 0.0

Range: -100.0 to 100.0 %

This parameter will add a fixed percentage to the PID output. It can be used to tune

out small system offsets. NOTE: This parameter is set as a percentage of maximum

output frequency (E1-04).

(1) These parameters are factory set for optimum results for most applications,

and generally do not need to be changed.

5.36 PID CONTROL

5-81

Continued

b5-08 : Output Lag Filter Time(1) Factory setting: 0.00

Range: 0.00 to 10.00 seconds

This parameter adds a filter to the PID output to keep it from changing too quickly.

The higher the setting, the slower the PID output will change.

b5-09 : PID Output Selection Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 or 1

b5-10 : PID Output Selection(1) Factory setting: 1.0

Range: 0.0 to 25.0

This parameter is a multiplier in the output of the PID controller. Increasing this parameter

will make the PID controller more responsive. Be careful not to increase this parameter too

much or the drive/system will become unstable.

b5-11 : PID Output Reverse Selection Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 or 1

All of these parameters are interactive, and will need to be adjusted until the control loop is

properly tuned, i.e. stable with minimal steady-state error. A general procedure for tuning

these parameters is as follows:

1. Adjust Proportional Gain until continuous oscillations in the Controlled

Variable are at a minimum.

2. The addition of Integral Time will cause the steady-state error to approach

zero. The time should be adjusted so that this minimal error is attained as

fast as possible, without making the system oscillate.

3. If necessary, adjust derivative time to reduce overshoot during startup.

The drive’s accel and decel rate times can also be used for this purpose.

(1) These parameters are factory set for optimum results for most applications,

and generally don’t need to be changed.

Setting Description

0The output of the PID controller will decrease when there is an

(Not Inverted) increase in feedback level.

1The output of the PID controller will increase when there is an

(Inverted) increase in the feedback level.

Setting Description

0If the PID controller calls for a “negative” speed (reverse), the

drive/motor will stop.

1If the PID controller calls for a “negative” speed (reverse), the

drive/motor will run in reverse.

5.36 PID CONTROL

5-82

Continued

E. Feedback Loss Detection

b5-12 : Feedback Loss Detection Selection

b5-13 : Feedback Loss Detection Level (PID) Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 100 %

b5-14 : Feedback Loss Detection Factory setting: 1.0

Delay Time (PID) Range: 0.0 to 25.5

When feedback loss detection is enabled (b5-12 = data “1” or “2”), the drive will detect if

the feedback signal falls below the b5-13 level for more than the b5-14 delay time and

respond according to the setting of b5-12.

F. Multi-Function Input Terminals

H1-01 thru H1-06 : Multi-function Inputs Data 30: PID Integral Reset

(Term. 3 thru 8)

By programming data “30” into one of the multi-function parameters (H1-01 thru H1-

06), the corresponding multi-function input terminal (3 thru 8) will reset the integrator’s

value to zero.

H1-01 thru H1-06 : Multi-function Inputs Data 31: PID Integral Hold

(Term. 3 thru 8)

By programming data “31” into one of the multi-function parameters (H1-01 thru H1-

06), the corresponding multi-function input terminal (3 thru 8) will hold the integrator’s

output value. When the contact is closed (on the Multi-Function Input Terminal), whatever

value the integrator is outputting will remain the same until the contact is opened.

5.36 PID CONTROL

Setting Description

0Feedback loss detection is disabled

1Feedback loss detection is enabled - alarm only

(drive continues running).

2Feedback loss detection is enabled - fault (drive coasts to stop)

Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 2

A1-03 : Parameter Selection / Factory setting: 0

Initialization Data: 0= No Initialization

1110= User Default Parameter

Initialization

2220= 2-Wire Control Initialization

3330= 3-Wire Control Initialization

By entering either " 2220 " or " 3330 " into this parameter, a reset to factory

configuration (parameter initialization) is accomplished. The parameters which are NOT

affected are:

A1-00 : Language Selection E1-03 : V/f Pattern Selection

A1-02 : Control Method o2-04 : GPD 515 Capacity

Selection

Factory Configuration for

Parameter

Terminal

2-Wire Control 3-Wire Control

H1-01 3 " 24 " = External Fault " 24 " = External Fault

H1-02 4 " 14 " = Fault Reset " 14 " = Fault Reset

H1-03 5 " 3 " = Multi-step Ref. Select 1 " 0 " = FWD/REV Command

H1-04 6 " 4 " = Multi-step Ref. Select 2 " 3 " = Multi-step Ref. Select 1

H1-05 7 " 6 " = Jog Freq. Ref. " 4 " = Multi-step Ref. Select 2

H1-06 8 " 8 " = External Base Block " 6 " = Jog Freq. Ref.

(N.O. contact)

CAUTION

Know your application before using either Initialization function of A1-03 . This

parameter must be set to " 0 " for Drive mode operation.

" 1110 " = User Default Parameter Initialization

" 2220 " = Factory 2-Wire Control Initialization (Maintained RUN Contact)

" 3330 " = Factory 3-Wire Control Initialization (Momentary START/STOP

Contact)

Entering either Initialization code resets all parameters to factory settings (except

for A1-00, A1-02, o2-04, & E1-03), and automatically returns A1-03 setting to " 0 "

(No Initialization). If the GPD 515 is connected for 3-Wire control and this parameter

is set to " 2220 " (2-Wire Control Initialization), the motor may run in reverse

direction WITHOUT A RUN COMMAND APPLIED. Equipment damage or personal

injury may result.

When o2-03 = 1, the existing parameter settings become default user settings and the

" 1110 " initialization option appears in A1-03 . When o2-03 is not set to " 1 ", this

option is not available. Anytime the A1-03 parameter is set to " 1110 ", all parameter

settings that have been changed return to the default user settings (only 50 parameters

may be stored as default settings). This is NOT a Factory Initialization.

5.37 RESET CODES: 2-WIRE, 3-WIRE INITIALIZATION

5-83

C3-01 : Slip Compensation Gain Factory setting: 0.0 *

Range: 0.0 to 2.5

* Note: Factory setting changes to

" 1.0" for Flux Vector and Open

Loop Vector control methods.

C3-02 : Slip Compensation Primary Delay Factory setting: 2000 *

Time Range: 0 to 10000 ms

* Note: Factory setting changes to

" 200" for Flux Vector and Open

Loop Vector control methods.

C3-03 : Slip Compensation Limit Factory setting: 200

Range: 0 to 250 %

C3-04 : Slip Compensation Selection Factory setting: 0

During Regeneration Data: 0= Disabled

1= Enabled

C3-05 : Flux Select Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 or 1

This parameter is only available in the open loop vector control method (A1-02 = 2).

When C3-05 is set to 0, the motor will enter the constant horsepower range when motor

speed exceeds motor rated synchronous speed. When C3-05 = 1, the motor will enter the

constant horsepower range when output frequency is equal to the motor rated frequency.

C3-06 : Output Voltage Limit Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 or 1

When the control method is set to open loop vector (A1-02 = 2), this parameter enables

and disables slip compensation when operating in the constant horsepower region (output

frequency is equal to or greater than motor rated frequency). In order to achieve proper

slip compensation, output voltage is reduced slightly starting at 90% of motor rated

frequency.

When the control method is set to flux vector (A1-02 = 3), a C3-06 setting of “1” will

improve torque linearity at and above base speed.

5.38 SLIP COMPENSATION

Setting Description

0Slip Included - Flux is calculated after slip compensation is applied.

1Slip Excluded - Flux is calculated after slip compensation is applied.

Setting Description

0Disabled - Output voltage limit and slip compensation are disabled

above base speed.

1Enabled - Output voltage limit and slip compensation are enabled

above base speed.

5-84

5-85

Continued

C3-01 Slip Compensation is used to increase motor speed to account for slip; this is

accomplished by boosting output frequency, with a corresponding boost in output voltage.

Sets the slip compensation gain, in increments of 0.1%. When the gain is " 1.0 ", the

output frequency is increased by 1% of the E1-06 setting at rated current. A setting of

" 0.0 " results in no slip compensation. C3-02 & C3-03 affect this gain as shown in the

block diagram. C3-04 determines whether the slip compensation gain will be enabled or

disabled during regeneration.

EXAMPLE

Desired frequency is 45 Hz

Motor slip = 2% at full load

C3-01 = 2.0

Actual output frequency at

full load = 45x1.02 = 45.90 Hz

Fref

d2-01

d2-02

Limit

E1-04 x C3-03

E1-06

C3-03

E1-06 E1-04

Output Frequency

–

400 Hz

SFS

Delay

C3-02

SOFT STARTER

C3-01

INTERNAL

FREQUENCY

REFERENCE

20%

CURRENT

DETECTOR

NOTE: When Fref is less than E1-09 setting, this function is disabled.

Slip Compensation Block Diagram

45.90 Hz actual output

2% frequency

boost

corresponding

voltage boost

45 Hz command

5.38 SLIP COMPENSATION

5-86

A. L3-04 : Stall Prevention Selection During Decel Factory setting: 1

Stall prevention during deceleration

automatically adjusts the deceleration rate

while monitoring the DC bus voltage to

prevent overvoltage during deceleration.

When the motor load is large or decel time

is short, actual decel time may be longer

than the set value because of

stall prevention.

B. L3-01 : Stall Prevention Selection During Accel Factory setting: 1

Setting Function

0 Stall prevention during acceleration disabled

1 Stall prevention during acceleration enabled

2 Stall prevention during acceleration enabled, auto adjust

5.39 STALL PREVENTION

TIME

FREQUENCY

SET

DECEL

TIME

Controls the

deceleration

time needed to

prevent over-

voltage fault.

L3-04 Function

Setting

0 Stall prevention during deceleration disabled. An excessively short deceleration time will

generate an overvoltage fault (OV) and the drive will stop.

1 Stall prevention during deceleration enabled (General Purpose). The DC bus voltage level

is monitored, and the deceleration rate is automatically extended to prevent an

overvoltage condition. This deceleration rate may be longer than the set value (C1-02).

2 Stall prevention during deceleration enabled, auto adjust (Intelligent). By monitoring DC

bus voltage, the deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that deceleration can be

completed in the shortest amount of time, regardless of the set deceleration time.

3 Stall prevention during deceleration enabled, with DB resistor. This setting lengthens

decel ramp time whenever the drive goes into current limit during a deceleration.

Intended to be used when dynamic braking is installed.

Note: Not available in the flux vector control method (A1-02 = 3).

5-87

Continued

L3-02 : Stall Prevention Level During Accel

This parameter determines the actual drive output current level during an acceleration

condition. Set in percent of drive rated output current (see Appendix 2). A setting of

" 200 " will disable stall prevention during acceleration.

During acceleration, if the output

current exceeds the value in L3-02 ,

acceleration stops and frequency is

maintained. When the output current

goes below the value set in L3-02 ,

acceleration resumes.

In the constant horsepower region

[actual output frequency ≥max.

voltage frequency ( E1-06 )], the stall

prevention level during acceleration is

changed by the following formula:

Stall prevention level during

Stall prevention level during accel (CHP)

Max. voltage frequency

accel (constant horsepower) (L3-03) Actual output frequency

L3-03 : Stall Prevention Limit During Accel (CHP) Factory setting: 50

Range: 0 to 100 %

C. L3-05 : Stall Prevention Selection During Running Factory setting: 1

Setting Function

0 Stall prevention during running disabled

1 Stall prevention during running enabled;

uses Decel time 1 ( C1-02 )

2 Stall prevention during running enabled;

uses Decel time 2 ( C1-04 )

L3-06 : Stall Prevention Level During Running Factory setting: 160

Range: 30 to 200 %

This parameter determines the actual

drive output current level while operating

at set speed (frequency). Set in percent

of drive rated output current (see

Appendix 2). A setting of " 200 " will

disable stall prevention during running.

During running at set speed, if the

output current exceeds the value set in

L3-06 , the drive will begin to

decelerate. When the output current

goes below the value set in L3-06 ,

acceleration begins, up to the set

frequency.

5.39 STALL PREVENTION

MOTOR

CURRENT

OUTPUT

FREQ.

L3-06

setting

MOTOR

CURRENT

OUTPUT

FREQ.

L3-02

setting

Factory setting: 150

Range: 0 to 200 %

5-88

b1-03 : Stopping Method Selection Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 3

Selects the stopping method suitable for the application.

Setting Description

0 Deceleration (ramp) to stop

1 Coast to stop

2 Full range DC injection to stop

3 Coast to stop with timer

A. Data 0: Deceleration to Stop

Upon removal of the FWD (REV) Run

command, the motor decelerates at

the deceleration rate determined by

the time set in Decel Time 1

( C1-02 ), and DC injection braking

is applied immediately before stop.

If the decel time is too short or the

load inertia is too large, an

overvoltage ( OV ) fault may occur

on a stop command — the decel

time must be increased.

B. Data 1: Coast to Stop

Upon removal of the FWD (REV) Run command, the motor coasts to rest.

5.40 STOPPING METHOD

Output Frequency

Run Command ON OFF

Decel Time 1

( C1-02 )

Min. Output Frequency

(Frequency at DC Injection

Braking Start) ( b2-01 )

(Factory setting: 0.5 Hz) DC Injection Braking

Time at Stop ( b2-04 )

(Factory setting: 0.5 s)

Output Frequency

Run Command ON OFF

Drive output is shut OFF

when stop command is input

5-89

Continued

C. Data 2: Full-range DC Injection Stop

When a STOP command is issued, there is a 0.5 second time delay, before a DC injection

current is applied to two phases of the motor’s stator winding. The duration of DC braking

is a time period proportional to b2-04 (at 10% output frequency) and the level of output

frequency at the time the STOP command is issued.

Braking torque is 50-70% of full load motor torque.

EXAMPLE

b2-04 = 0.5 sec (at 10% output)

100%

Braking time at Fmax (100% output frequency) = 10% x 0.5 = 5 sec.

Full Range DC Injection Braking Stop Sequence

D. Data 3: Coast to Stop With Timer

When programmed for coast to stop with timer, a Run command is ignored if issued during

the time the motor would normally be decelerating ( C1-02 ), or for the minimum base

block time ( L2-03 ), whichever is longer.

5.40 STOPPING METHOD

Output Frequency

Run Command

Run Command ignored

ON ON ONOFF OFF

Decel Time 1

( C1-02 )

Coasting Accel Time 1

( C1-01 )

RUN CMD

OUTPUT

FREQUENCY

STOP

0.5 sec

COASTING DC BRAKING TIME

b2-04 x 10

DC IN-

JECTION

BRAKING

TIME b2-04

0 10% 100%

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

AT TIME OF STOP COMMAND

5-90

E2-01 : Motor Rated Current Factory setting: See Table A3-1

Range: 0.01 to 1500.0 A

This parameter should be set according to the rated current value shown on the motor

nameplate; this value must be within 10-120% percent of the drive rated current (refer to

Specifications in Appendices 2 & 3 of this manual).

L1-01 : Motor Overload Protection Selection Factory setting: 1

Setting Electronic Thermal Characteristics

0 Electronic thermal overload protection disabled

1 Electronic thermal overload protection enabled

L1-02 : Motor Overload Protection Time Factory setting: 8.0

Constant Range: 0.1 to 20.0 min.

This parameter sets the electronic thermal overload relay protection time. Actual overload

time can be calculated using the time from the overload characteristics curves then

multiplying that time by L1-02 /8.

The drive protects against motor overload with a UL-recognized, built-in electronic thermal

overload relay.

The electronic thermal overload function monitors motor temperature, based on drive

output current and time, to protect the motor from overheating. When the electronic

thermal overload relay is enabled, an " OL1 Motor Overloaded " fault occurs, shutting

OFF the drive output and preventing excessive overheating of the motor.

When operating with one drive connected to only one motor, an external thermal relay is

not needed. When operating several motors with one drive, install a thermal overload relay

on each motor.

5.41 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

5-91

Continued

E1-02 : Motor Selection Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 2

Setting Electronic Thermal Characteristics

0 General-purpose motor (TEFC)

1 Blower cooled or totally enclosed non-ventilated (TEBC or TENV)

2 Vector Motor

This parameter sets whether a general-purpose or a blower-cooled motor is used. The

motor overload detection function operates differently, as shown, for each of these two

motor types.

Standard Fan Cooled Motor Overload Curve

L1-01 = 0 & L2-01 = 8.0 Minutes

0 Hz

10 Hz

20 Hz

60 Hz

40 Hz

5.41 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

5-92

Continued

Standard Blower Cooled Motor Overload Curve

L1-01 = 1 & L1-02 = 8.0 Minutes

Vector Motor Overload Curve

L1-01 = 2 & L1-02 = 8.0 Minutes

NOTE: If a TEFC motor is going to be run at or near 100% of rated current at

frequencies below 30 Hz for an extended period of time, select the blower cooled

curve ( E1-02 = 1).

All

Frequencies

0 Hz

5.6 Hz

≥

5.41 THERMAL OVERLOAD PROTECTION

5-93

C4-02 : Torque Compensation Time Factory setting: See Table A3-2

Constant Range: 0 to 10000 ms

This parameter adjusts a time delay for the torque compensation gain. Increase to add

torque stability, decrease to improve torque response.

C4-01 : Torque Compensation Gain [ KT] Factory setting: 1.00

Range: 0.00 to 2.50

Sets the torque compensation, in increments

of 0.1. When the motor has the same

capacity as that of the drive, the gain is 1.0.

When a smaller motor is used, the gain should

be set to 1.5 (typical).

This parameter, in conjunction with E2-05

(Motor Line-to-Line Resistance) and E2-07

& E2-08 (Motor Iron Core Saturation

Coefficient 1 & 2), is used by the drive’s

automatic torque boost function to match the

drive’s output voltage boost to the motor

load. Except for the most demanding of high

starting torque applications, the factory

settings of these parameters will be

adequate. The factory settings are

programmed to match the performance

characteristics of typical AC motors.

The calculation of compensated torque

uses the following formula:

(

√3

•Vac •Iac •Cos Φ) – WI – Rcable

Compensated Value ≈Frequency x KT

Where

* WI = E2-07, E2-08

Rcable = E2-05

KT= C4-01

Φ= Power Factor (calculated by the drive)

* Adjusted by Auto-tune feature.

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

( HZ )

OUTPUT VOLTAGE

( VAC )

460

345

230

115

14 V

1.5 HZ

30 60

PROGRAMMED V/F PATTERN

(NO LOAD)

AUTO TORQUE BOOST

V/F PATTERN

Example of Torque Compensation

Operation

5.42 TORQUE COMPENSATION

5-94

Continued

C4-03 : Forward Torque Compensation At Start Factory setting: 0.0

(Open Loop Vector Only) Range: 0.0 to 200.0 %

C4-04 : Reverse Torque Compensation At Start Factory setting: 0.0

(Open Loop Vector Only) Range: -200.0 to 0.0 %

C4-05 : Torque Compensation At Start Time Factory setting: 10

Constant (Open Loop Vector Only) Range: 0 to 200 ms

Parameters C4-03 thru C4-05 help to improve the starting / breakaway torque response

when using the open loop vector control method (A1-02 = 2). The amount of torque

applied at start when a forward run is commanded is set by parameter C4-03. The amount

of torque applied at start when a reverse run is commanded is set by parameter C4-04.

The amount of time that the torque is applied is controlled by parameter C4-05.

5.42 TORQUE COMPENSATION

5-95

NOTE: This function can only be used in Flux Vector control method ( A1-02 = 3 ).

One of two methods may be used to run the drive in torque control.

A1. Torque control can be set by programming parameter d5-01 .

d5-01 : Torque Control Selection Factory setting: 0

Setting Control Method

0 Speed Control

1 Torque Control

A2. Torque control can be set by programming a multi-function input terminal for Speed /

Torque Control Selection (Data 71). The drive will be in torque control when the

corresponding input terminal is closed. This selection can be delayed by programming

d5-06 for a delay time.

H1-01 thru H1-06 : Multi-function Input Data 71: Speed / Torque

(Term. 3 thru 8) Control Selection

d5-06 : Speed/Torque Control Selection Timer Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 100 ms

B. Regardless of which way torque control is selected, the torque reference will be input

to the drive at terminals 16 & 17 (Multi-function analog input).

H3-05 : Multi-function Analog Input Data 13: Torque

(Term. 16) Reference

The scaling (with factory defaults for gain & bias) is 10V on terminal 16 = 100% of the

motor rated torque.

5.43 TORQUE CONTROL (COMMAND)

5-96

Continued

C. d5-03 : Speed Limit Selection Factory setting: 1

Range: 1 or 2

d5-04 : Speed Limit Factory setting: 0

Range: –120 to +120 %

When setting the drive for torque control, a speed limit is required. This speed limit can

come from either a programmed value ( d5-04 ), or an analog input (Term. 13 or 14).

d5-03

Setting Speed Limit Source Programming Required

1Analog Input Reference source needs to be set for terminals ( b1-01 = 1 )

(Term. 13 or 14) AND the drive needs to be set for “Remote”reference

(REF light on the Digital Operator needs to be on).

and

d5-03 (Speed Limit Selection) must be set to “Analog Input”.

2Programmed d5-04 is set as a percentage of the maximum frequency.

Value (NOTE: this value can be set to a negative value by pressing

( d5-04 ) the “up arrow”or “down arrow”keys while the left-most zero is

flashing on the Digital Operator display.

and

d5-03 (Speed Limit Selection) must be set to “Program Setting”.

D. Torque compensation can be utilized by programming terminal 14 for Torque

Compensation ( H3-09 = 14). The analog voltage present on terminal 14 will determine

torque compensation value.

E. d5-02 : Torque Reference Delay Time Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 1000 ms

This function is used to avoid excessive changes in torque, which may be caused by

abnormal resonance when the torque reference changes rapidly.

F. d5-05 : Speed Limit Bias Factory setting: 10

Range: 0 to 120 %

Sets bias value for speed limit (torque control mode only) as a percentage of maximum

frequency.

5.43 TORQUE CONTROL (COMMAND)

TORQUE REF.

(from Term. 16)

1 + sT

TORQUE

REF.

d5-02

5-97

Continued

G. Simplified block diagram:

5.43 TORQUE CONTROL (COMMAND)

TORQUE

COMPENSATION

(TCMP)

TORQUE

REFERENCE

(TREF)

TORQUE LIMIT

SPEED

LIMIT

(SLIM)

SFS

1 + ST

T = d5-02

SPEED

LIMITING

CIRCUIT

MOTOR SPEED

Term. 14

d5-05

Term. 16

H3-01 or H3-09 = 14

Programmed

Value ( d5-04 )

Term. 13

H3-05 or H3-09 = 14

The figure below shows the relationship between speed, speed limit, torque, and

torque limit.

(-) Speed

Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit

L7-04

(+) Torque

d5-05

Speed Limit

Bias

d5-05

Speed Limit

Bias

(-) Torque

Slope is proportional

to C5-01

Forward Regenerative Torque Limit

L7-03

(+) Speed

Torque Reference

Speed

Limit

5-98

Torque detection is used to compare drive rated output current with the overtorque

detection level. When the output current is equal to or greater than the defined level, an

overtorque condition exists. This will be indicated as an " OL3 " fault on the Digital

Operator. This feature can be selected to operate over a wide range of conditions.

A. L6-01 : Torque Detection Selection 1 Factory setting (each): 0

L6-04 : Torque Detection Selection 2

These parameters determine whether the torque detection function of the drive is

enabled, under what conditions it will detect for overtorque, and what operation it will

perform after detecting an overtorque.

Torque Operation After Detection

Setting Detection Overtorque Detection Condition

0 Disabled —— ——

1 Enabled Continues Only at set frequency

2 Enabled Continues At all times except during stopping

or DC injection braking

3 Enabled Coast to stop Only at set frequency

4 Enabled Coast to stop At all times except during stopping

or DC injection braking

—For overtorque detection during accel or decel, set to " 2 " or " 4 ".

—For continuous operation after overtorque detection, set to " 1 " or

" 2 ". During detection, the Digital Operator displays and “ OL3 ”

alarm (blinking).

—To stop the drive at an overtorque detection fault, set to " 3 " or

" 4 ". At detection, the Digital Operator displays an " OL3 " fault.

B. L6-02 : Overtorque Detection Level 1 Factory setting (each): 150

L6-05 : Overtorque Detection Level 2 Range (each): 0 to 300 %

These are the reference points for determining that an overtorque condition exists. Set as

a percent of drive rated current (see Appendix 2).

C. L6-03 : Overtorque Detection Time 1 Factory setting (each): 0.1

L6-06 : Overtorque Detection Time 2 Range (each): 0.0 to 10.0 seconds

Determines how long an overtorque condition must exist before another event will occur,

e.g. coast to stop, multi-function output change of state, or " OL3 " warning or fault

display.

5.44 TORQUE DETECTION

5-99

Continued

D. H3-05 : Multi-function Analog Input Data 7: External Overtorque

(Term. 16) Detection Level Adjustment

The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control

of the overtorque detection level. When this function is programmed into H3-05 , the

internal overtorque detection level ( L6-02 ) is disabled.

E. H2-01 : Multi-function Output (Term. 9 & 10) Data B: Overtorque

H2-02 : Multi-function Output (Term. 25-27) Detection

H2-03 : Multi-function Output (Term. 26-27)

A contact, or two open collector outputs, can be programmed to change states during an

overtorque detection condition.

5.44 TORQUE DETECTION

1R drive/G5

15 +15V

16 0-10V (20 KΩ)

OVERTORQUE

DETECTION

LEVEL

200%

OVERTORQUE

DETECTION

LEVEL

0V 10V

VOLTAGE REFERENCE

5-100

Continued

EXAMPLE OF OVERTORQUE DETECTION

L6-01 setting: 2— Detect during run, energize multi-function output, display alarm

L6-02 setting: 110 % — Level at which torque detection is sensed

L6-03 setting: 1.0 s — Time delay before overtorque event occurs

H2-01 setting: B— "Torque Detection 1" multi-function output (normally open)

110%

TORQUE 100%

REFERENCE

00.5 sec 1 sec

60 Hz

MOTOR

SPEED

RUN

SIGNAL

CONTACT

OUTPUT

(TORQUE

DETECTION 1)

TERM. 9 & 10

Torque Detection Timing Diagram

5.44 TORQUE DETECTION

A. L7-01 : Forward Torque Limit Factory setting (each): 200

L7-02 : Reverse Torque Limit Range (each): 0 to 300 %

L7-03 : Forward Regenerative Torque Limit

L7-04 : Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit

These parameters provide the ability to limit the amount of torque produced by the motor

in all four quadrants of operation: FWD motoring, REV motoring, FWD regen, and REV regen.

The torque limit functions as a torque current reference limit. Torque limit is active in both

speed mode and torque mode.

EXAMPLE:

L7-01 Forward Torque Limit = 150 %

L7-02 Reverse Torque Limit = 150 %

L7-03 Forward Regenerative Torque Limit = 20 %

L7-04 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit = 20 %

During regeneration, the regeneration torque limits have been exceeded, thus the actual

speed (Sfb) doesn’t follow the speed reference (Sref). This example also demonstrates the

accel/decel selection 1 ( H1-06 data 7).

5.45 TORQUE LIMIT

C1-02

(10 sec)

C1-04

(7.5 sec)

C1-01

C1-04

FWD. RUN

REV. RUN

H1-06 : 7

(Accel/Decel

Time Selection 1)

SPEED FEEDBACK: Sfb.

SPEED REFERENCE: Sref.

C1-01

(15 sec)

C1-03

(5 sec)

Sfb.

Sref.

Sfb.

C1-03

FWD Regen Torque Lim. = 20%

REV Regen Torque Lim. = 20%

5-101

Continued

B. H3-05 : Multi-function Analog Input 1 Selection Data 10: FWD Torque Limit

(Term. 16)

The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of

the torque limit for both FWD & REV modes. However, the analog reference controls both

FWD torque limit & REV regen torque limit.

NOTE: A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function,

which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority.

EXAMPLE:

Forward Torque Limit L7-01 = 80 %

FWD Torque Limit (Term. 16) = 100% (10V)

The L7-01 value will have priority over the analog reference value.

Data 11: REV Torque Limit

The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of

the torque limit for both FWD & REV modes. However, the analog reference controls both

REV torque limit & FWD regen torque limit.

NOTE: A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function,

which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority.

5.45 TORQUE LIMIT

TORQUE

LIMIT

1R is a calibration pot only.

GPD 515/G5

15 +15V

16 0-10V (20K Ω)

TORQUE

LIMIT

1R is a calibration pot only.

GPD 515/G5

15 +15V

16 0-10V (20K Ω)

H3-05 = 10

FWD 100%

TORQUE

LIMIT

–10V 0V 10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 11

REV 100%

TORQUE

LIMIT

–10V 0V 10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

5-102

5-103

Continued

Data 12: Regenerative Torque

Limit

The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of

the torque limit for both FWD & REV modes. However, the analog reference controls both

FWD torque limit & REV regenerative torque limits.

NOTE: A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function,

which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority.

Data 13* : FWD & REV Torque

Limit

* NOTE: When H3-05 is set for " 13", Terminal 16 is a torque limit ONLY if speed

mode is selected ( d5-01 = 0 ). If d5-01 = 1 (torque mode), Terminal 16 will be

a torque reference.

Data 15: FWD & REV Torque

Limit

The multi-function analog input at terminal 16 may be configured to allow analog control of

the torque limit for both FWD & REV modes. However, the analog reference controls both

FWD & REV torque limits, and the FWD & REV regenerative torque limits.

NOTE: A minimum priority circuit is associated with the torque limit function,

which means that the lowest value torque limit setting will have priority.

5.45 TORQUE LIMIT

TORQUE

LIMIT

1R is a calibration pot only.

GPD 515/G5

15 +15V

16 0-10V (20K Ω)

TORQUE

LIMIT

1R is a calibration pot only.

GPD 515/G5

15 +15V

16 0-10V (20K Ω)

H3-05 = 12

REGEN 100%

TORQUE

LIMIT

–10V 0V 10V

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

H3-05 = 15

100%

TORQUE

LIMIT

0V 10V

–100%

MULTI-FUNCTION ANALOG INPUT

E3-01: Control Method Selection (Motor 2) Factory setting : 2

Range : 0 to 4

These seven parameters define the V/f pattern for motor 2. The illustration below shows

how these parameters relate to each other in establishing the V/f pattern.

Parameter E3-01 determines which control method the drive will use when motor 2 is

selected. If E3-01 is set to a 2 or a 3, the second motor needs to be auto-tuned. First

select motor 2 (via a multi-function input) then run the auto-tuning routine as described in

Section 2.2A or 2.2B. Parameters E4-01 thru E4-07 and E5-01 thru E5-06 are set

when an auto-tune is executed on motor 2. If auto-tuning is not possible, use section 2.4

and the table below to manually calculate and enter the motor parameters.

5-104

5.45.1 TWO MOTOR OPERATION

Vmax

(E4-02)

(E4-05)

Vmin

(E4-07)

OUTPUT

VOLTAGE

Fmin

(E4-06)

(E4-04)

Fbase

(E4-03)

Fmax

(E4-01)

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

Parameter Description Set by Auto-Tune? Equivalent Motor 1 Parameter

E5-01 Motor Rated Current (Motor 2) Yes E2-01

E5-02 Motor Rated Slip (Motor 2) Yes E2-02

E5-03 Motor No-load Current (Motor 2) Yes E2-03

E5-04 Number of Motor Poles (Motor 2) Yes E2-04

E5-05 Motor Line-to-line Resistance (Motor 2) Yes E2-05

E5-06 Motor Leakage Inductance (Motor 2) Yes E2-06

Setting Description

0 V/f control

1 V/f with PG feedback

2 Open loop vector

3 Flux vector

Factory Settings

Parameter Description 230V Ratings 460V Ratings 600V Ratings

E4-01 Maximum Output Frequency (Motor 2) 60.0 Hz 60.0 Hz 60.0 Hz

E4-02 Maximum Voltage (Motor 2) 230.0 V460.0 V575.0 V

E4-03 Base Frequency (Motor 2) 60.0 Hz 60.0 Hz 60.0 Hz

E4-04 Mid. Output Frequency (Motor 2) 3.0 Hz 3.0 Hz 3.0 Hz

E4-05 Mid. Output Voltage (Motor 2) 12.6 V25.3 V36.6 V

E4-06 Min. Output Frequency (Motor 2) 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz 0.5 Hz

E4-07 Min. Output Voltage (Motor 2) 2.3 V4.6 V6.5 V

Continued

H1-01 thru H1-06 : Multi-function Inputs Data 16: Motor 2 Select

(Term. 3 thru 8)

This function allows the drive to control two different motors at different times. When a

multi-function input is set to a data of “16”, two different sets of motor parameters can

be selected with a contact closure.

The table above illustrates which parameters are used when motor 1 or motor 2 is

selected.

The drive needs to be in the stop condition before the multi-function input is opened or

closed, otherwise a “Motor Running” warning will be displayed.

H2-01 thru H2-03 : Multi-function Outputs Data 1C : Motor 2 Selected

(Term. 9 & 10, 25,

26, & 27)

When a multi-function output terminal is programmed to a data of “1C”, that output will

close whenever motor 2 is selected. As shown in the example below, a multi-function input

selects between motor 1 and motor 2. The multi-function output will only change states

when the drive is in the stopped condition in order to prevent internal drive damage.

Multi-Function Input Control Method Setting V/f Pattern Motor

Term. Parameter Parameters Parameters

Open (Motor 1) A1-02 E1-04 thru E1-13 E2-01 thru E2-09

Closed (Motor 2) E3-01 E4-01 thru E4-07 E5-01 thru E5-06

5-105

5.45.1 TWO MOTOR OPERATION

5-106

A2-01 thru A2-32 : User Select Parameters Data: Programmable

(see below)

This function allows the user to select an exclusive list of parameters, providing a

customized access level.

When the Access Level ( A1-01 ) is set to "Advanced", the "Function A2 User

Constants" option will appear in the top level of the menu. The parameters desired for

custom access are entered into A2-XX parameters.

After any parameters have been programmed, the "User Program" option appears in the

choice of Access Levels. Choosing this option will allow only those parameters

programmed in A2-XX to be accessed in "Programming". Up to 32 parameters may be

programmed. To add parameters to or delete parameters from A2-XX , change the

Access Level back to Advanced.

o2-03 : User Parameter Default Value Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 2

Setting Description

0 Disabled

1 Set Default

2 Clears all

This parameter is used to store settings as initialization values. Set all parameters to the

user-defined default values, then set o2-03 to "1"; each changed parameter value is

then accepted and stored as its initialization value. Up to 50 parameters may have data

stored as their new (user-defined) initialization value.

"User Initialize" becomes available in the Initialize Parameter option ( A1-03 ). Setting

this parameter to "1110" resets all settings to the user-defined defaults, rather than to

factory defaults.

E1-03 : V/f Pattern Selection

This parameter is factory preset to " F". Table 5-4 describes 14 other preset patterns,

one of which may be better suited for your specific application and load characteristics.

However, if none of these patterns are suitable, this parameter can be set to " F" (V/f

pattern - custom). The exact pattern is then defined by the settings of E1-04 thru

E1-10 , described in paragraph 5.48, V/f Pattern – Custom.

5.46 USER PARAMETERS

5.47 V/f PATTERN - STANDARD

5-107

APPLI- Sn-02 V/f PATTERN APPLI- Sn-02 V/f PATTERN

CATION SPECIFICATION DATA (NOTE 3 CATION SPECIFICATION DATA (NOTE 3)

Starting

50Hz 050Hz Torque 8

Low

Starting

Torque 9

High

60Hz Starting

60Hz Satura- 160Hz Torque A

tion Low

50Hz Starting

Satura- 2Torque B

tion High

72Hz 390Hz C

Variable

50Hz Torque 4120Hz D

Variable

Torque 5

Variable

60Hz Torque 6180Hz E

Variable

Torque 7

NOTES:

✵ Consult Yaskawa for assistance when these settings are desired (typically used for blowers, centrifugal pumps, and fans).

1. The following conditions must be considered when selecting a V/f pattern:

– Pattern matches the voltage-frequency characteristics of the motor.

– Maximum motor speed.

2. V/f pattern for high starting torque should be selected for:

– Wiring distance.

– Large voltage drop at start.

– AC reactor connected to drive input or output.

– Use of motor rated below drive max. output.

3. Patterns shown are for 230V input; for other input, multiply all (V) values by (VIN/230). i.e., for 460V input, multiply

by 460/230 = 2. For 575V input, multiply by 575=2.5

E❋

(V)

230

57.5

40.2

11.5

9.2

0 1.5 25 60 (Hz)

(V)

230

34.5

28.9

0 4.5 6 60 (Hz) 180

(V)

230

40.2

20.7

0 3 6 60 120 (Hz)

(V)

230

57.5

40.2

11.5

9.2

0 1.3 25 50 (Hz)

(V)

230

17.2

11.5

0 2.3 4.5 60 90 (Hz)

(V)

230

17.2

11.5

0 1.8 3.6 60 72(Hz)

(V)

230

26.4

20.7

14.9

0 1.5 3 60 (Hz)

(V)

230

26.4

20.7

16.1

13.8

0 1.3 2.5 50 (Hz)

(V)

230

17.2

11.5

0 1.5 3 50 60 (Hz)

(V)

230

17.2

11.5

0 1.3 2.5 50 (Hz)

APPLI- E1-03 V/f PATTERN APPLI- E1-03 V/f PATTERN

CATION SPECIFICATION DATA (NOTE 3) CATION SPECIFICATION DATA (NOTE 3)

Table 5-4. Standard (Preset) V/f Patterns

230

5-108

A. E1-01 : Input Voltage Setting

This parameter should be set to match the rated (nominal) input voltage.

Initial Voltage Values

230V RATINGS 460V RATINGS 600V RATINGS

B. E1-04 : Maximum Output Frequency

E1-05 : Maximum Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230.0 V460.0 V575.0 V

E1-06 : Base Frequency

E1-07 : Mid. Output Frequency A

E1-08 : Mid. Output Voltage A . . . . . . . . . . 12.6 V25.3 V36.6 V

E1-09 : Min. Output Frequency

E1-10 : Min. Output Voltage. . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 V4.6 V6.5 V

E1-11 : Mid. Output Frequency B

E1-12 : Mid. Output Voltage B . . . . . . . . . . 0.0 V0.0 V0.0 V

E1-13 : Base Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0 V0.0 V0.0 V

These ten parameters define the custom V/f pattern, only if E1-03 is set to " F "

(see paragraph 5.47). The illustration below shows how these constants relate to each

other in establishing the custom V/f pattern.

5.48 V/f PATTERN - CUSTOM

V/f Characteristics Set by E1-04 thru E1-10

Vmax

( E1-05 )

( E1-12 )

Vbase

( E1-13 )

OUTPUT

VOLTAGE

( E1-08 )

Vmin

( E1-10 )

Fmin FAFbase FBFmax

( E1-09 )( E1-07 ) ( E1-06 )( E1-11 )( E1-04 )

OUTPUT FREQUENCY

Factory Setting: 230, 460or 575V

Range: 155 to 255 V (230V ratings)

310 to 510 V (460V ratings)

445 to 733 V (600V ratings)

5-109

Continued

NOTE: To establish a V/f pattern with a straight line from Fmin to Fbase, set

FA= Fmin, FB= 0.0 Hz, and Vbase = 0.0 V. The settings of VA, VBand Vbase

are then disregarded and do not affect the V/f pattern.

IMPORTANT

The parameter settings are checked whenever power is applied to

the drive, or each time the ENTER key is pressed while in the

Program mode. A parameter set value failure ( OPE5 ) will occur if

any part of the following relationship among E1-04 thru E1-13

is not TRUE:

Fmax ≥FB≥Fbase ≥FA≥Fmin (unless FAor FB= 0.0)

5.48 V/f PATTERN - CUSTOM

5-110

NOTE: This function can only be used in Flux Vector control method ( A1-02 = 3 ).

A. H1-01 thru H1-06 : Multi-function Input Data 72: Zero Servo Command

(Term. 3 thru 8) (for Speed control mode only)

By programming data " 72 " into one of the multi-function

input parameters ( H1-01 thru H1-06 ), one of the multi-

function input terminals (3 thru 8) becomes a zero-servo

control selection input. When the input terminal (i.e.

external contact) is open, the zero-servo function is

disabled, and when the contact is closed, the zero-servo

function is enabled.

The purpose of the zero-servo function is to provide

position control capability at zero speed. When zero-servo

is enabled, and the actual speed is less than the DC Injection Start Frequency ( b2-01 ),

the shaft position is maintained by monitoring the PG feedback pulses, and correcting the

position error. However, this function doesn’t have the same capabilities of a position

controller, because there is no marker pulse feedback. Therefore, it will not stop in the

same position every time the servo function is enabled.

CAUTION

Applications that require decelerating large inertia loads in very short decel times

may cause overshoots, and a possible runaway condition, causing equipment

damage. Adjustment of zero-servo gain ( b9-01) may be required. Setting b9-01

to " 0 " may correct a runaway condition.

b2-01 : DC Injection Braking Start Frequency Factory setting: 0.5

Range: 0.0 to 10.0 Hz

The speed level at which the zero-servo function is enabled is determined by b2-01 (DC

Injection Braking Start Frequency), and the closure of the multi-function input. This

function also determines operation at zero speed.

5.49 ZERO-SERVO CONTROL

GPD 515/G5

o o

ZERO

SERVO

5-111

Continued

B. b9-01 : Zero-Servo Gain Factory setting: 5

Range: 0 to 100

This function provides an adjustment for the position loop gain.

CAUTION

The higher the gain, the better the response. However, too high a gain can cause

hunting or overshoot, and possible runaway condition.

Zero-Servo Timing

C. b9-02 : Zero-Servo Completion Width Factory setting: 10

Range: 0 to 16383 pulses

H2-01 thru H2-03 : Multi-function Output Data 33: Zero-Servo

(Term. 9 & 10; 25; 26) Completed

(See paragraph 5.33)

The function of b9-02 is to set the number of pulses used for the multi-function output

terminals. During zero-servo, the multi-function output will be closed (ON) until the

number set into b9-02 has been completed. After the number of pulses have been

completed, the multi-function output changes to the open (OFF) state.

5.49 ZERO-SERVO CONTROL

DC Injection Braking Start Freq. ( b2-01 )

position loop

(zero-servo)

speed loop

Speed

Load

Zero Servo

Position Error

5-112

NOTE: This function can only be used in Flux Vector control method ( A1-02 = 3 ).

A. b1-05 : Zero Speed Operation Factory setting: 0

Range: 0 to 3

The setting of this parameter determines which Zero Speed mode is enabled (see figures

on following pages).

Setting Description

0 Run at Frequency Reference

1 STOP

2 Run at Minimum Frequency

3 Run at Zero RPM

E1-09 : Minimum Output Frequency Factory setting: 0.0 *

Range: 0.0 to 400.0 Hz

* Note: If control method is anything other than Flux

Vector ( A1-02= 3 ), the Factory Setting is 0.5

This parameter sets the speed reference level at which Zero Speed mode operation will

activate, in accordance with the selection programmed in b1-05 (see figures on following

pages).

When the Speed Reference input is an analog signal, Zero Speed mode operation over long

periods of time will cause the output to drift.

5.50 ZERO SPEED CONTROL

SPEED

REF.

A/D

E1-09

b1-05 = 0

SPEED

FEEDBACK

INPUT TO S-CURVE

OUTPUT OF A/D CONVERTER

–

SOFT START

(S-CURVE)

–

ASR

TIME

E1-09

SPEED

REF.

ASR OUTPUT WITH ANALOG INPUT

b1-05 = 2

b1-05 = 1 or 3

E1-09

5-113

Continued

b1-05 : 0Run at Frequency Reference

E1-09 : (Minimum Output Frequency) ineffective

5.50 ZERO SPEED CONTROL

RUN / STOP

SPEED

REFERENCE

ACTUAL

SPEED

INTERNAL

RUN

STOP

ZERO SPEED

CONTROL

ZERO SPEED

CONTROL

RUN

STOP

INTERNAL

SPEED REF

b2-04

DC Injection Braking Time at Stop

b1-05 : 1STOP

E1-09 : (Minimum Output Frequency) effective

5-114

5-115

Continued

b1-05 : 2Run at Minimum Frequency

E1-09 : (Minimum Output Frequency) effective

5.50 ZERO SPEED CONTROL

RUN / STOP

SPEED

REFERENCE

ACTUAL

SPEED

INTERNAL

RUN

RUN STOP

ZERO SPEED

CONTROL

ZERO SPEED

CONTROL

RUN STOP

INTERNAL

SPEED REF

E1-09

b2-04

DC Injection Braking Time at Stop

5-116

Continued

b1-05 : 3Run at Zero RPM

E1-09 : (Minimum Output Frequency) effective

5.50 ZERO SPEED CONTROL

RUN / STOP

SPEED

REFERENCE

INTERNAL

RUN

RUN STOP

ZERO SPEED

CONTROL

ZERO SPEED

CONTROL

RUN STOP

E1-09

INTERNAL

SPEED REF

ACTUAL

SPEED

b2-04

DC Injection Braking

Time at Stop

6-1

A failure in the GPD 515/G5 can fall into one of two categories, Alarm or Fault.

A blinking "Alarm" indication is a warning that a drive trouble condition will soon occur, or

that a programming error has been made. The drive will continue to operate during an

"Alarm" indication.

A blinking "Minor Fault" indication is displayed during less serious faults, or when a

problem exists in the external circuitry. The drive will continue to operate, and a "Minor

Fault" contact will be closed if a multi-function output is programmed for the condition.

A steady "Major Fault" indication is displayed when the drive’s Fault relay has tripped.

The motor coasts to a stop, and a fault signal output is present at control circuit

terminals 18 - 20.

INDICATION

(DISPLAY) FAILURE INDICATION ITEM DESCRIPTION

Communication Communication error while drive is set for A

Option Card error Run Command and/or Frequency Reference (Note 2)

from Serial Communication card.

SI-B communication Control data was not received when power supply A

error was turned on.

Communication error Control data was not received for 2 seconds after M

initial communication.

Motor out of control Drive cannot determine speed of motor – M

Open Loop Vector Control Method ( A1-02 = 2)

only. (Note 3)

Control circuit fault 1 Communication between Digital Operator and M

drive was not established within 5 seconds

after power was applied, or an internal hardware or

software fault was detected on power-up. (Note 3)

Control circuit fault 2 Communication errors between the Digital Operator M

and drive occurred for over 2 seconds after

communication was last established, or an internal

hardware or software fault occurred after power-up.

(Note 3)

Table 6-1. Fault Indication and Details

DIGITAL OPERATOR TYPE

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION DETAILS (Note 1)

6.1 GENERAL

Section 6. FAULT INDICATION

& TROUBLESHOOTING

CALL

Serial Com Call

BUS

Option Com Err

Memobus Com Err

Out of Control

CPF00

COM-ERR (OP & INV)

CPF01

COM-ERR (OP & INV)

6-2

Table 6-1. Fault Indication and Details – Continued

DIGITAL OPERATOR TYPE

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION DETAILS (Note 1)

CPF02

BB Circuit Failure

Baseblock circuit fault Drive failure.

(Note 3)

Replace Control card.

CPF03

EPROM Error

CPF04

Internal A/D Err

CPF05

External A/D Err

EPROM fault

Internal A/D fault

External A/D fault

CPF06

Option Error

Option card

connection failure

Check option card connection.

Option card failure.

(Note 3)

CPF20

Option A/D Error

A/D converter fault in

Analog Speed

Reference card

Option card (AI-14B) A/D converter malfunction.

(Note 3)

CPF21

Option CPU down

Communication option card

self-diagnostic error.

Communication option card failure. M

CPF22

Option Type Err

Communication option card

Model code error.

CPF23

Option DPRAM Err

Communication option card

DPRAM error.

DEV

Speed Deviation

Speed deviation Deviation between speed reference and speed

feedback exceeded the deviation level ( F1-10

& F1-11 ). Stop mode selection possible ( F1-04 ).

(Note2)

External Fault

Both FWD and REV

commands were applied

simultaneously

Drive is in “temporary” Ramp to Stop condition; one

input command must be removed to resume

operation.

EF0

Opt External Flt

External fault input from

Communication option card.

Check communication option card connection and

signal.

(Note 2)

EF3

External Fault 3

External fault signal at

terminal 3

Stop mode selection possible ( H1-01 thru H1-06 ).

(See Section 5.17)

(Note 2)

EF4

External Fault 4

External fault signal at

terminal 4

(Note 3)

E - 15

SI - F/G Com Err

SI - F/G Communications

Error

A communications error occurred and b1-01=3

and/or b1-02=3.

(Note2)

A fault condition has occurred in the external

circuit(s) monitored by the contact providing input to

the indicated terminal.

6-3

DIGITAL OPERATOR TYPE

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION DETAILS (Note 1)

EF6

External Fault 6

External fault signal at

terminal 6

A fault condition has occurred in the external

circuit(s) monitored by the contact providing input to

the indicated terminal.

Stop mode selection possible ( H1-01 thru H1-06).

(See Section 5.17)

(Note 3)

EF7

External Fault 7

EF8

External Fault 8

ERR

EPROM R/W Err

External fault signal

at terminal 7

External fault signal at

terminal 8

EPROM write-in fault m

Ground Fault

Ground fault Drive output ground current exceeded 50% of

driverated current.

Output Pha Loss

Drive output has open

phase

Problem in drive-to-motor wiring. Enable/disable

with L8-07.

Overcurrent

Overcurrent M

Heatsnk Overtemp

Cooling fin overheat Heatsink fin temperature exceeded the setting of

L8-02 .(Note 3)

(Note 2)

OH1

Heatsnk MAX Temp

Drive overheat Heatsink fin temperature exceeded 105˚C (221˚F)

(Note 3), or internal cooling fan has failed.

OH2

Over Heat 2

Drive overheat Pre-alarm A multi-function input (H1-01 to H1-06) is

programmed for OH2 Alarm Signal (data “B”) and

the corresponding input terminal is closed.

OL1

Motor Overloaded

Motor overload Protects the motor. Motor thermal overload

protection has tripped. L1-02 has been exceeded

(initial value: 150% for 60 sec.). (Note 3)

drive failure.

Cycle power, then attempt to initialize.

Replace Control card.

Drive output current exceeded 200% of drive rated

current. (Note 3)

Table 6-1. Fault Indication and Details – Continued

EF5

External Fault 5

External fault signal at

terminal 5

(Note 2)

FbL

Feedback Loss

PID Feedback Reference

Loss

(Note 2)

PID feedback reference loss detection is enabled

(b5-12 = 1 or 2) and the PID feedback input is less than

the PID feedback loss detection level (b5-13) for longer

than the PID feedback loss detection time (b5-14).

E-10

SI-F / G CPU Down

SI-F / G Communications

Error

(Note 2)

A communications error occurred and

b1-03 = 3 and/or b1-02 = 3.

6-4

DIGITAL OPERATOR TYPE

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION DETAILS (Note 1)

OPE01

kVA Selection

Drive capacity

selection fault

o2-04 has been changed from the correct factory

setting value. Refer to Table A3-1.

OPE02

Limit

OPE03

Terminal

OPE05

Sequence Select

Parameter set out of range

Multi-function input

setting fault

Option card

selection error

OPE06

PG Opt Missing

PG-X2 card not installed Control method set to Flux Vector or V/F with PG,

and no PG-X2 card is installed.

OPE07

Analog Selection

Multi-function analog

input selection error

Both multi-function analog inputs (H3-05 and H3-09) have

been programmed for the same data (except 1F) OR an

AI-14B option card is connected, the drive is programmed

for 3-channel individual (F2-01=0), and a multi-function

input is programmed for Option/Inverter Selection (H1-01

to H1-06=2).

OPE08

Terminal

Selection Parameter error A parameter has been changed that is not available

in the present Control Method. Example: H1-08=72

(Zero Servo Command) is set while the drive is in

Flux Vector Control (A1-02=3), then the Control

Method is changed to Open Loop Vector (A1-02=2).

OPE10

V/F Ptrn Setting

V/f data setting fault Occurs when the custom V/f pattern does not meet

the following criteria:

( E1-04 ) ≥( E1-06 )> ( E1-07 ) ≥( E1-09 )

OPE11

CarrFrq/ON-Delay

Carrier frequency

parameter(s) set out

of range

Occurs when the carrier frequency parameters are

set as follows: ( C6-01 ) > 5 kHz and ( C6-02 ) ≤5

kHz;( C6-03 ) > 6 and ( C6-01 ) < ( C6-02 )

OPR

Oper Disconnect

Operator disconnected Digital Operator has been disconnected from drive

while in Run mode.

(Note 2)

Frequency reference and/or run source is set for

option card (b1-01=3 and/or b1-02=3), but no

option card is connected.

H1-01 thru H1-06 (multi-function input)-2 or

more parameters are set to the same data (other

than " F " and " FF ").

See paragraph 5.32.

One or more parameter values are not within the

allowable setting range.

Table 6-1. Fault Indication and Details – Continued

OL4

Overtorque Det 2

Overtorque detect 2 Output current exceeds Overtorque Detection

Level 2 ( L6-05 ).

(Note 2)

OL2

Inv Overloaded

Drive overload Protects the drive. Drive overload protection has

tripped.

OL3

Overtorque Det 1

Overtorque detect 1 Output current exceeds Overtorque Detection

Level 1 ( L6-02 ).

(Note 2)

6-5

DIGITAL OPERATOR TYPE

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION DETAILS (Note 1)

PGO

PG Open

PG cable wires are

disconnected

Pulse generator is disconnected from the PG-X2

card (Terminal TA1).

(Note 2)

PUF

DC Bus Fuse Open

DynBrk Resistor

DynBrk Transistor

Fuse blown

Braking resistor overheat

Braking transistor failure

Short Circuit

Short circuit on drive output

terminals

Very low impedance on output of drive.

Check for correct motor wiring / capacity.

SVE

Zero Servo Fault

Zero Servo fault Shaft position changed by more than 500,000

revolutions during zero servo operation.

DC Bus Undervolt

Momentary power loss Low voltage has been detected, but momentary

power loss ride-thru is enabled ( L2-01 ), and

momentary power loss ride-thru time ( L2-02 )

has not yet been exceeded. (Note 3)

UV1

DC Bus Undervolt

Main circuit undervoltage A

UV2

CTL PS Undervolt

Control circuit

undervoltage

Control circuit voltage is low during operation. A

UV3

MC Answerback

Main contactor fault Main circuit magnetic contactor (soft charge

contactor) does not operate correctly.

Braking transistor failure.

Braking resistor unit temperature exceeds the

allowable value. (Heatsink-mount resistor only,

and only if L8-01=1).

DC fuse has cleared. Check for short circuit in

output circuitry. (Note 3)

Occurs 2 seconds after detection of low voltage.

Detection level: approx 190VDC for 230V rated unit;

approx 380VDC for 460V rated unit; approx 546

VDC for 600V rated unit. (Note 3)

Table 6-1. Fault Indication and Details – Continued

Input Pha Loss

drive input phase missing Incoming power supply has an open phase, or a

large imbalance exists between L1, L2 &

L3.Enable/disable with L8-05 .

NOTES:

1. A= Alarm; m= Minor Fault; M= Major Fault.

2. The stop mode, and therefore the fault type (alarm, minor or major), is selectable.

3. See section 6.4 for flowcharts to use in troubleshooting these fault conditions.

Overspeed

Motor overspeed Motor speed exceeds overspeed level ( F1-08 &

F1-09 ). Stop mode selection possible ( F1-03 ).

(Note 3)

(Note 2)

DC Bus Overvolt

Overvoltage Detection level: Approx. 400VDC for 230V rated

unit; Approx. 800V for 460VDC rated unit; approx

1050 VDC for 600V rated unit. (Note 3)

6-6

INDICATION

Motor data is not correct • Check the input data.

• Check the drive and motor capacities.

Line-to-line resistance not

within tolerance

• Check the input data.

• Check the motor wiring.

No-load current (magnetizing

current) not within tolerance

Iron core saturation

coefficient 1 not within

tolerance

Iron core saturation

coefficient 2 not within

tolerance

Rated slip not within

tolerance

Motor did not accelerate in • Increase acceleration time ( C1-01 ).

the specified time • Increase torque limit values ( L7-01 , -02 ) if they

are reduced from factory settings.

• Uncouple the motor from the load.

Encoder phasing opposite • Swap two motor leads.

that of motor phasing OR

• Swap channels on the input to the PG-X2 card

(on terminal block TA1, swap wires at terminals

4 & 6 and swap wires at terminals 5 & 7).

Torque reference exceeded • Uncouple motor from load.

100% during auto-tuning • Increase acceleration time ( C1-01 ).

• Check input data, especially the encoder PPR

( F1-01 ).

Torque reference exceeded

20% during auto-tuning

A minor drive fault occurred • Check Table 6-1 for specific minor

fault indicated by “XXX.”

PG cable wires are • Pulse generator is disconnected from

disconnected the PG-X2 card (Terminal TA1).

Check PG wiring.

6.2 AUTO-TUNING FAULTS & CORRECTIVE ACTIONS

DIGITAL OPERATOR

DISPLAY DESCRIPTION CORRECTIVE ACTION

Tune Aborted

Data Invalid

Tune Aborted

Resistance

Tune Aborted

No-Load Current

Tune Aborted

Sat Coef 1

Tune Aborted

Sat Coef 2

Tune Aborted

Rated Slip

Tune Aborted

Accelerate

Tune Aborted

PG Direction

Tune Aborted

Motor Speed

Tune Aborted

Over Load

(Displayed after completion of tuning)

Tune Aborted

Minor Fault : XXX

Tune Aborted

PG Circuit

6-7

A . Displaying Fault Conditions

Whenever the fault relay trips (drive shutdown), the fault that caused the trip (except for

Illegal Constant or Control Function Hardware) is entered into non-volatile RAM. The drive

also retains the operating conditions when the fault occurred.

These conditions can only be displayed when the drive is in the Drive mode (DRIVE light is

on).

If a major fault has just The DRIVE and STOP lights are

occurred, but the drive illuminated, and the FWD, REV,

has not been reset, SEQ, & REF lights are flashing.

proceed directly to Step A.

If the drive has been reset, Press , then ,

the conditions at the last

fault can still be displayed:

then 4 times

Press

Proceed to Step A.

Step A

Display the frequency reference Press

that was present when the fault

occurred.

Press

Display the output frequency Press

that was present when the

fault occurred.

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

(See Note 1)

Table 6-2. Displaying Fault Conditions

6.3 DISPLAYING FAULTS

EF3

External Fault 3

Function U2

Fault Trace

Current Fault

None

Last Fault

External Fault 3

Frequency Ref

U2-03= 10.00 Hz

Output Freq

U2-04= 10.00 Hz

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

6-8

Continue pressing to cycle through all of the condition displays. These include: output current,

output voltage, DC bus voltage, kWatts, input terminal status, output terminal

status, operation status, and elapsed time.

NOTE: To decode the input terminal status, output terminal status, and operation status displays, refer to Appendix 1,

Table A1-10, U1-10 to U1-12.

NOTES:

1. Actual displays will differ depending on the recorded fault and the operating conditions.

If the FWD, REV, SEQ, & REF lights are flashing, enter a RESET command (from the Digital

Operator or external signal) to prepare the drive for restart of operation.

IMPORTANT: In 2-wire control, any RUN/STOP command must be removed before

the RESET will be accepted.

B. Displaying Fault History

Whenever the fault relay trips (drive shutdown), the fault that caused the trip (except for

Illegal Constant or Control Function Hardware) is entered into non-volatile RAM. The drive

retains the last four faults and the operating conditions when the last fault occurred.

(NOTE: Time is in operating hours.)

These faults can only be displayed when the drive is in the Drive mode (DRIVE light is on).

The drive can be stopped or running.

Display the fault history Press , then ,

function menu.

then twice

Display the last fault that Press

occurred (most recent in time)

Display the second from the Press

last fault that occurred.

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

(See Note 1)

Table 6-2. Displaying Fault Conditions – Continued

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

(See Note 1)

Table 6-3. Displaying Fault History

Function U3

Fault History

Last Fault

External Fault 3

Fault Message 2

Motor Overloaded

DATA

ENTER

DATA

ENTER

6-9

Display the third from the Press

last fault that occurred.

Display the fourth from the Press

last fault that occurred.

NOTE: If less than four faults

have occurred since the drive

was initialized, "None" will appear

on the Digital Operator.

Display the operating hours Press

when the last fault occurred.

Display the operating hours Press

when the second from the last

fault occurred.

Display the operating hours Press

when the third from the last

fault occurred.

Display the operating hours Press

when the fourth from the last

fault occurred.

NOTES:

1. Actual displays will differ depending on the recorded fault and the operating conditions.

DESCRIPTION KEY SEQUENCE DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

(See Note 1)

Table 6-3. Displaying Fault History – Continued

Fault Message 3

DC Bus Undervolt

Fault Message 4

None

Elapsed Time 1

U3-05= 57 H

Elapsed Time 2

U3-06= 41 H

Elapsed Time 3

U3-07= 5 H

Elapsed Time 4

U3-08= 0 H

6-10

If the drive malfunctions, locate the cause and take corrective action by following the

flowcharts given in this section.

A. TROUBLESHOOTING MOTOR SYMPTOMS

Motor Does Not Rotate................................................................................ Chart 6.1

Motor Stalls During Acceleration.................................................................. Chart 6.2

Motor Does Not Rotate at Set Speed.......................................................... Chart 6.3

Motor Hunting .............................................................................................. Chart 6.4

B. TROUBLESHOOTING FOR FAULT CONDITIONS

oV – Overvoltage ........................................................................................ Chart 6.5

PUF – DC Bus Fuse Open ............................................................................. Chart 6.6

oC – Overcurrent ......................................................................................... Chart 6.7

oL1 – Motor Overload ................................................................................. Chart 6.8

UV – Undervoltage ...................................................................................... Chart 6.9

oH – Heatsink Overtemp ............................................................................. Chart 6.10

CPFXX – Control Function Error ................................................................... Chart 6.11

EFX – External Fault .................................................................................... Chart 6.12

oS – Overspeed ........................................................................................... Chart 6.13

CF – Out of Control ..................................................................................... Chart 6.14

WARNING

Oscilloscope chassis may be at voltages potentially hazardous to

life if not properly grounded. If oscilloscope is used to measure

high voltage waveforms, use only a dual channel oscilloscope in

the differential mode with X100 probes. Always connect

oscilloscope chassis to earth ground.

WARNING

Voltages dangerous to life exist when equipment is open and

energized. Do not work alone.

CAUTION

To prevent equipment damage always remove incoming three-

phase power before test equipment is connected or removed.

Never disconnect or connect the wiring while the power is applied.

6.4 TROUBLESHOOTING FLOWCHARTS

6-11

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.1

MOTOR DOES NOT ROTATE

"CHARGE" LAMP

ON MAIN PC BOARD

LIT?

CHECK CIRCUIT

BREAKER, MAGNETIC

CONTACTOR AND

INPUT POWER.

3-WIRE CONTROL 2-WIRE CONTROL

(CONTROL BY

EXT. INPUTS)

(CONTROL

BY DIGITAL

OPERATOR)

YES

RATED VOLTAGE

ACROSS TERMINALS

L1(R), L2(S), AND L3(T)?

FAULT

SHOWN ON

ALPHA-NUMERIC

DISPLAY?

GO TO APPROPRIATE

CHART, 6.5 THRU 6.13.

RUN

LAMP

ON?

STOP COMMAND

STILL ON?

(OPEN CIRCUIT

BETWEEN

TERMINALS 11 AND 2)

RUN

COMMAND ON?

(CLOSED CIRCUIT

[MOMENTARY INPUT]

BETWEEN

TERMINALS 11 AND 1)

STOP

COMMAND

INPUT.

INPUT RUN

COMMAND.

YES

FWD RUN/STOP

& REV RUN/STOP

BOTH OFF?

(OPEN CIRCUITS FROM

TERMINAL 11 TO

TERMINALS 1 AND 2)

FWD RUN/STOP

& REV RUN/STOP

BOTH ON?

(CLOSED CIRCUITS FROM

TERMINAL 11 TO

TERMINALS 1 AND 2)

RELEASE

ONE

RUN/STOP

COMMAND

INPUT.

INPUT A

RUN/STOP

COMMAND.

DRIVE'S

CONTROL POWER

CIRCUIT IS FAULTY.

APPROX. 15VDC FROM

TERMINAL 15(+) TO 17?

ATO NEXT

PAG E

DIGITAL

OPERATOR

ASSEMBLY

IS FAULTY.

REPLACE.

PROPER FREQUENCY

REFERENCE INPUT?

(TERMINAL 17(–) TO 13 ( U1-15 ),

14 ( U1-16 ), OR 16 ( U1-17 ) )

CHECK EXTERNAL

CIRCUITS FOR

PROBLEM AND

REPAIR.

YES

DISPLAY U1-10,

INPUT STATUS

6-12

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.1 (Continued)

AFROM

PRECEDING

PAG E

PROPER CONNECTIONS

FROM DRIVE TO

MOTOR?

TORQUE LIMIT

SETTING

CORRECT?

CONTROL METHOD?

V/F w/ PG Flux Vector V/F Open Loop Vector

CHECK CON-

NECTIONS FOR

PROBLEM AND

REPAIR. YES

PROPER

CONNECTIONS

FROM DRIVE

TO PG

(ENCODER)?

PROPER

CONNECTIONS

FROM DRIVE

TO PG

(ENCODER)?

YES

NO YES YES

VOLTAGE PRESENT ACROSS

OUTPUT TERMINALS

T1(U), T2(V) AND T3(W)?

VOLTAGE PRESENT AT

MOTOR TERMINALS

T1(U), T2(V) AND T3(W)?

VOLTAGE BALANCED

(WITHIN 2%)

BETWEEN PHASES, AT

T1(U), T2(V) AND T3(W)?

DRIVE

IS FAULTY.

YES

CHECK FOR

PROBLEM IN MOTOR,

MECHANICAL

SYSTEM OR BRAKE.

SET TORQUE LIMIT

(ANALOG INPUT, OR

L7-01 & L7-02 ) TO

PROPER VALUE.

DRIVE

IS FAULTY.

LOAD TORQUE

TOO LARGE?

- REDUCE LOAD

TORQUE (DISCON-

NECT LOAD).

- REPLACE DRIVE

WITH ONE OF

LARGER CAPACITY.

MOTOR

IS FAULTY.

6-13

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.2

MOTOR STALLS DURING ACCELERATION

ACCELERATION TIME

TOO SHORT?

YES

WITH DRIVE IN

STOPPED CONDITION,

EXTEND ACCELER-

ATION TIME BY

REPROGRAMMING

C1-01, C1-03, C1-05,

OR C1-07 .

WITH DRIVE

IN STOPPED

CONDITION, SET

OPTIMUM V/f

PATTERN BY

REPROGRAMMING

E1-03 .

LOAD TORQUE

TOO HIGH?

LOAD

INERTIA

LARGE?

CHECK IF SPECIAL

MOTOR IS USED.

LARGE MOTOR

TERMINAL

VOLTAGE DROP?

- USE LARGER WIRE

BETWEEN DRIVE

AND MOTOR.

- SHORTEN WIRING

DISTANCE BETWEEN

DRIVE AND MOTOR.

- DECREASE LOAD

INERTIA.

- EXTEND ACCEL-

ERATION TIME BY

REPROGRAMMING

C1-01, C1-03, C1-05,

OR C1-07 .

- DECREASE LOAD

TORQUE.

- REPLACE DRIVE

WITH ONE OF

LARGER

CAPACITY.

CONTROL METHOD?

V/F Flux Vector

or or

V/F w/ PG Open Loop Vector

YES

V/f SELECTION

APPROPRIATE?

6-14

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.3

MOTOR DOES NOT ROTATE AT SET SPEED

CORRECT MOTOR FOR

USE WITH DRIVE?

YES CONSULT YASKAWA

ABOUT MOTOR SELECTION.

PROPER CONNECTIONS

FROM DRIVE TO

MOTOR AND PG?

NO CHECK CONNECTIONS

FOR PROBLEM AND

REPAIR.

YES

NO CHECK EXTERNAL

CIRCUITS FOR

PROBLEM AND

REPAIR.

YES

ALL GROUP bPARAMETER

SETTINGS PROPER

FOR APPLICATION?

CHECK SETTINGS;

REPROGRAM

AS REQUIRED.

YES

IS PG OUTPUT

SIGNAL NORMAL?

(See Section 6.6)

IS PG

POWER SUPPLY

NORMAL?

YES

EXCESSIVE

MECHANICAL SYSTEM

CHATTER?

YES

CHECK FOR

PROBLEM IN MOTOR,

MECHANICAL SYSTEM

OR BRAKE.

YES

DRIVE'S

CONTROL POWER

CIRCUIT IS FAULTY.

APPROX. 15VDC FROM

TERMINAL 15(+) TO 17?

DRIVE

IS FAULTY.

CONSULT

YASKAWA.

CONTROL METHOD?

Flux Vector V/F

or or

V/F w/ PG Open Loop Vector

CONTROL METHOD?

V/F Flux Vector

or or

Open Loop Vector V/F w/ PG

PROPER

CONNECTIONS

FROM DRIVE

TO MOTOR?

CHECK CON-

NECTIONS FOR

PROBLEM AND

REPAIR.

PROPER FREQUENCY

REFERENCE INPUT?

(TERMINAL 17(–) TO 13 ( U1-15 ),

14 ( U1-16 ), OR 16 ( U1-17 ) )

6-15

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.4

MOTOR HUNTING

PROPER PHASE SEQUENCE

OF CONNECTIONS FROM

DRIVE TO MOTOR?

NO CHECK CONNECTIONS

FOR PROBLEM AND

REPAIR.

YES

PROPER CONNECTIONS

FROM DRIVE TO

PG (ENCODER)?

NO CHECK CONNECTIONS

FOR PROBLEM AND

REPAIR.

CHECK STALL

PREVENTION

SETTINGS

( L3-01 OR L3-06 ).

YES

ALL PARAMETER SETTINGS

RELATED TO ASR PROPER

FOR APPLICATION?

DOES MOTOR STILL

HUNT?

WITH DRIVE IN STOPPED

CONDITION, REDUCE APPLICABLE

ASR PROPORTIONAL GAIN

( C5-01 OR C5-03 ) SETTING.

CHECK SETTINGS;

REPROGRAM

AS REQUIRED.

DETERMINE THE

OPTIMUM SETTING FOR

WHICH THE MOTOR

WILL NOT HUNT.

REFER TO PARA. 2.2

AND VERIFY NOISE

PROBLEM, THEN

CORRECT.

YES

EXCESSIVE

MECHANICAL SYSTEM

CHATTER?

ERRONEOUS

OPERATION DUE

TO NOISE?

YES

CHECK FOR

PROBLEM IN MOTOR,

MECHANICAL SYSTEM

OR BRAKE.

REDUCE ASR OUTPUT

LAG TIME ( C5-06 ) BY

SMALL AMOUNTS UNTIL

AMOUNT OF CHATTER

IS ACCEPTABLE.

YES

DRIVE

IS FAULTY.

CONTROL METHOD?

V/F Flux Vector

or or

Open Loop Vector V/F w/ PG

6-16

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.5

" oV – Overvoltage " FAULT INDICATION

IS INPUT AC SUPPLY

VOLTAGE CORRECT?

DECREASE TO

PROPER VOLTAGE

RANGE.

YES

DOES OV TRIP

OCCUR ONLY

DURING DECEL-

ERATION?

DOES OV TRIP

STILL OCCUR

DURING DECEL-

ERATION?

WITH DRIVE IN

STOPPED CONDITION,

INCREASE DECELER-

ATION TIME BY

REPROGRAMMING

C1-02, C1-04, C1-06,

OR C1-08 .

REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:

• CONNECT SURGE

SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY

AND MAGNETIC CON-

TACTOR COILS.

• PROVIDE LINE FILTER

TO REMOVE NOISE ON

INPUT POWER LINE.

ERRONEOUS

OPERATION DUE

TO NOISE?

CONTROL SIGNALS TO

GATE DRIVE PCB ARE

FAULTY. REPLACE

CONTROL PCB.

IS BRAKING

OPTION

INSTALLED?

ADD BRAKING OPTION,

OR REPLACE DRIVE

WITH ONE OF LARGER

CAPACITY.

CHECK LOAD

INERTIA

REQUIREMENTS.

6-17

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.6

" PUF – DC Bus Fuse Open " FAULT INDICATION

CAUTION

DO NOT REPLACE DC BUS FUSE WITHOUT

FIRST CHECKING OUTPUT TRANSISTORS.

DISCONNECT LEADS FROM

OUTPUT TERMINALS

T1(U), T2(V) AND T3(W).

ARE MOTOR WINDINGS

SHORTED (T1 TO T2,

T2 TO T3, OR T3 TO T1)?

MOTOR

IS FAULTY.

LOCATE AND

REMOVE SHORT.

REPLACE

DAMAGED POWER

TRANSISTORS.

YES

ARE DRIVE

OUTPUT PHASES

SHORTED TO GROUND?

T1(U), T2(V), T3(W) TO G(E).

CHECK POWER TRANSISTORS

(SEE PARAGRAPH 6.5).

ARE TRANSISTORS

DAMAGED?

DRIVE

IS FAULTY.

6-18

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.7

" oC – Overcurrent " FAULT INDICATION

DOES OUTPUT

CURRENT EXCEED

200% OF RATING?

WITH DRIVE IN STOPPED CON-

DITION, INCREASE ACCELERATION

TIME BY REPROGRAMMING C1-01,

C1-03, C1-05, OR C1-07 , IF OC

TRIP OCCURS ONLY DURING

ACCELERATION.

OTHERWISE, REDUCE LOAD.

YES

DOES OC TRIP

OCCUR, OR MC

ANSWERBACK

TRIP, WHEN POWER

IS TURNED ON?

MACHINE JAMMED

OR MOTOR

FAILURE?

CLEAR JAM, OR

REPLACE MOTOR.

DISCONNECT WIRING

FROM OUTPUT TERMINALS

T1, T2 AND T3 AND

CHECK LOAD IMPEDANCE.

CHECK POWER

TRANSISTORS

(SEE PARAGRAPH 6.5).

ARE TRANSISTORS

DAMAGED?

REPLACE

DAMAGED POWER

TRANSISTORS. WITH DRIVE IN STOPPED

CONDITION, INCREASE

ACCELERATION TIME BY

REPROGRAMMING C1-01,

C1-03, C1-05, OR C1-07 .

DOES OC TRIP

STILL OCCUR? DECREASE

LOAD INERTIA.

MOTOR STARTED BY CONTACTS

WIRED BETWEEN DRIVE

AND MOTOR?

- REWIRE TO ELIMINATE MOTOR

FULL VOLTAGE STARTING.

- REPLACE DRIVE WITH

ONE OF LARGER CAPACITY.

ERRONEOUS OPERATION

DUE TO NOISE? REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:

• CONNECT SURGE SUPPRESSOR

TO RELAY AND MAGNETIC CON-

TACTOR COILS.

• PROVIDE LINE FILTER TO

REMOVE NOISE ON INPUT

POWER LINE.

CONTROL PCB OR GATE

DRIVE PCB IS FAULTY.

REPLACE FAULTY BOARD.

6-19

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.8

" oL1 – Motor Overload " FAULT INDICATION

LOAD TOO LARGE

(MOTOR OVERHEATED)?

YES

DECREASE LOAD

WITHIN RATING.

CHECK MOTOR

AND LOAD.

SET ACCORDING TO

APPENDIX 3, TABLE A3-1.

WITH DRIVE IN

STOPPED CONDITION,

REPROGRAM L1-01 & L1-02 .

IS DRIVE CAPACITY

( o2-04 ) FACTORY SET

CORRECTLY?

IS ELECTRONIC THERMAL

OVERLOAD ( L1-01 & L1-02 )

SET CORRECTLY?

DISCONNECT WIRING FROM

OUTPUT TERMINALS T1(U),

T2(V) AND T3(W). IS OL

STILL INDICATED?

REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:

• CONNECT SURGE

SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY

AND MAGNETIC CON-

TACTOR COILS.

• PROVIDE LINE FILTER

TO REMOVE NOISE ON

INPUT POWER LINE.

PG-X2 PCB, CONTROL

PCB, OR GATE DRIVE

PCB IS FAULTY.

REPLACE FAULTY BOARD.

ERRONEOUS OPERATION

DUE TO NOISE?

6-20

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.9

" UV – Undervoltage " FAULT INDICATION

IS INPUT AC

SUPPLY

CORRECT?

YES

IS THERE

AT LEAST 450VDC

(FOR 460V DRIVE) OR

225VDC (FOR 230V DRIVE)

ON THE DC BUS?

(SELECT MONITOR DISPLAY

U1-07 TO CHECK VOLTAGE)

- INCREASE VOLTAGE

WITHIN PROPER RANGE.

- CHECK WIRING BETWEEN

MAIN AC CONTACTOR

AND DRIVE.

DRIVE

IS FAULTY.

REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:

• CONNECT SURGE

SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY

AND MAGNETIC CON-

TACTOR COILS.

• PROVIDE LINE FILTER

TO REMOVE NOISE ON

INPUT POWER LINE.

ERRONEOUS OPERATION

DUE TO NOISE?

CONTROL PCB OR GATE

DRIVE PCB IS FAULTY.

REPLACE FAULTY BOARD.

6-21

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.10

" oH – Heatsink Overtemp " FAULT INDICATION

IS AMBIENT

TEMPERATURE

45°C (113°F)

OR GREATER?

REDUCE AMBIENT

TEMPERATURE.

YES

IS HEAT SINK

CLEAN?

COOLING FAN

STOPPED?

CLEAN HEAT

SINK.

REPLACE

COOLING FAN.

ERRONEOUS OPERATION

DUE TO NOISE?

CONTROL PCB OR GATE

DRIVE PCB IS FAULTY.

REPLACE FAULTY BOARD.

REMOVE NOISE SOURCE:

• CONNECT SURGE

SUPPRESSOR TO RELAY

AND MAGNETIC CON-

TACTOR COILS.

• PROVIDE LINE FILTER

TO REMOVE NOISE ON

INPUT POWER LINE.

6-22

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.11

" CPFXX – " CONTROL FUNCTION ERROR FAULT INDICATION

1. CHECK THAT ALL DRIVE

HARNESS CONNECTORS,

AND CONTROL BOARD

MOUNTED PCB's, ARE

FIRMLY SEATED.

2.CHECK THAT NO NOISE

SOURCE IS PRESENT.

3. REPROGRAM A1-03 USING

FACTORY RESET CODES.

OBSERVE CAUTION

ON PAGE vii.

4. CHECK o2-04 FOR PROPER

VALUE.

TURN OFF POWER. AFTER

"CHARGE" LAMP ON MAIN

PC BOARD GOES OUT,

TURN POWER BACK ON.

IS CPF STILL

INDICATED?

IS CPF STILL

INDICATED?

YES

SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION

HAS DETECTED FAILURE IN

THE CPU OR PERIPHERAL

COMPONENTS.

REPLACE THE CONTROL PCB,

OR APPROPRIATE CONTROL

MOUNTED PCB.

DRIVE IS OK.

RETURN TO NORMAL

OPERATION.

6-23

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.12

" EFX – " EXTERNAL FAULT INDICATION

IS AN EXTERNAL FAULT SIGNAL

PRESENT (CLOSED CIRCUIT

BETWEEN TERMINAL 3 AND

11; OR OPEN CIRCUIT

BETWEEN TERMINAL 11

AND WHICHEVER TERMINAL

(4-8) HAS BEEN PROGRAMMED

FOR EXT. FAULT INPUT)?

YES FAULT HAS OCCURRED

IN CIRCUITS OUTSIDE

THE DRIVE.

TROUBLESHOOT AND

CORRECT.

CONTROL PCB IS

FAULTY. REPLACE.

6-24

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.13

" oS – Overspeed " FAULT INDICATION

CORRECT ENCODER PPR

VALUE PROGRAMMED

IN F1-01 ?

RE-PROGRAM

F1-01 SETTING.

CONSULT YASKAWA

ABOUT SPECIFICATIONS OF

USER-SUPPLIED ENCODER.

ENCODER

PROBLEM.

YES

EXCESSIVE NOISE

ON ENCODER

SIGNAL INPUTS TO

THE DRIVE?

(See Section 6.6)

FORWARD DIRECTION OK,

BUT TRACKING PROBLEM

IN REVERSE DIRECTION?

CONSULT

YASKAWA.

6-25

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.14

" CF – Out of Control " FAULT INDICATION

ARE REGENERATIVE

TORQUE LIMITS SET

HIGH ENOUGH?

INCREASE L7-03 AND

L7-04 .

INCREASE C1-02 (OR

C1-04 , C1-06 , OR C1-08 )

REPROGRAM E2-02

TO PROPER SETTING.

YES

CAN DECELERATION

TIME BE EXTENDED?

INCREASE E1-09

(TYPICALLY TO 1.5 Hz )

YES

CAN MINIMUM

FREQUENCY BE

INCREASED?

IS MOTOR RATED SLIP

SET PROPERLY?

CONSULT

YASKAWA.

6-26

NO DIGITAL OPERATOR DISPLAY

TROUBLESHOOTING CHART 6.15

230/460

L1, L2, L3?

YES

CHARGE

LAMP

ON?

APPLY

POWER

EITHER CONTROL CARD

OR GATE DRIVE IS

FAULTY

REPLACE

GATE DRIVE

BOARD

DISPLAY

IS VOLTAGE

BETWEEN

TERM. 1 & 11

≈24 VDC?

IS VOLTAGE

BETWEEN

OR TERM. 15/17

+15 VDC?

CHECK ALL

CONNECTORS,

EXCHANGE

OPERATOR /

CABLE

DAMAGED PRECHARGE

RESISTOR, INPUT

DIODES, OR OUTPUT

TRANSISTORS

YES

IS VOLTAGE

BETWEEN

TERM. 15 & 17

+15 VDC?

6-27

A . DIODE MODULE

Measure the resistance across the module terminals with a volt-ohm meter. Set the meter

at the X1 range. The measured resistance should be within the values listed in Table 6-4.

NOTE: If the DC bus fuse is blown (PUF), the values shown below may not be accurate.

WARNING

Power should be removed from L1, L2, & L3 and the CHARGE light

should be out prior to conducting these tests.

RESISTANCE TEST FOR 3Ø CONVERTER MODULES (BRIDGE RECT)

VOM RESISTANCE SCALE R x 1

+ IS THE POSITIVE POLARITY LEAD *

– IS THE NEGATIVE POLARITY LEAD

* The VOM red lead is not necessarily the positive potential in the resistance mode. For these tests the + lead

refers to the positive potential. Make sure you know which polarity you have on your VOM.

+ – NORMAL ABNORMAL

READING READING

ON ON (OHMS) (OHMS)

L1 + 1

L2 + 1

L3 + 1 2.5 to 50 Ω0 Ω

– L1 or or INFINITE

– L2 0.25 to 0.7

– L3 if using

scale

+ – NORMAL ABNORMAL

READING READING

ON ON (OHMS) (OHMS)

+ – NORMAL ABNORMAL

READING READING

ON ON (OHMS) (OHMS)

L1 –

L2 – LESS

L3 – INFINITE THAN

+ 2 L1 1M Ω

+ 2 L2

+ 2 L3

+ 2 – MAGNITUDE 0 Ω

OF CAP or INFINITE

CHARGE TO

INFINITE

+ – NORMAL ABNORMAL

READING READING

ON ON (OHMS) (OHMS)

▲▲▲

+ 2 or + 1

–

●

●●

●

Table 6-4. Diode Module Resistances

▲

6.5 DIODE AND IGBT (TRANSISTOR) MODULE RESISTANCE TEST

B. TRANSISTOR MODULE

Measure the resistance across the module terminals with a volt-ohm meter. Set the meter

to the X1 range. The measured resistance should be within the values listed in Table 6-5.

NOTE: If the DC bus fuse is blown (PUF), the values shown below may not be

accurate.

RESISTANCE TEST FOR 3Ø TRANSISTOR MODULES

VOM RESISTANCE SCALE R x 1

+ IS THE POSITIVE POLARITY LEAD *

- IS THE NEGATIVE POLARITY LEAD

* The VOM red lead is not necessarily the positive potential in the resistance mode. For these tests the + lead

refers to the positive potential. Make sure you know which polarity you have on your VOM.

6-28

▲▲▲

●●

●

T1 or

T2 or

T3 or

B1, + 1 or + 3

–

Table 6-5. Transistor Module Resistances

▲

T1/U

T2/V

T3/W

2.5 to 50 Ωor

0.3 to 0.7 if

using

scale

INFINITE

0 Ωor

INFINITE

0 Ω

NORMAL

READING

(OHMS)

ABNORMAL

READING

(OHMS)

–

B1/ + 3/ +1

T1/U

T2/V

T3/W

T1/U

T2/V

T3/W

–

B1/ + 3/ +1

–

6-29

In order to check the encoder pulses, an oscilloscope is needed. The pulses can be

checked after they have been processed by the PG-X2 card or at the motor.

WARNING

The following tests require power to be applied to the drive while

the front cover is off. Proper precautions should be taken to

prevent electric shock and damage to the equipment.

A . Checking Encoder Pulses at Test Points on the PG-X2 Card

1. Remove power from L1, L2, & L3 and wait for the CHARGE light to go out.

2. Connect the common of the oscilloscope to the test point labeled GND.

3. Connect one channel of the scope to PA. (If the scope is two channel, connect the

second channel to PB).

4. Set the scope for 2V/div, 50ms/div, normal trigger, and rising edge trigger.

5. Apply power to the GPD 515, but do NOT apply a run command.

6. Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both

channels at a +5V level, 50% duty cycle, and they should be separated by 90

electrical

degrees (half a pulse).

7. If one or both channels do not have the correct pulses present (i.e. missing pulses,

incorrect duty cycle, improper voltage, etc.), go to procedure B.

B. Checking the Pulses at the Input to the PG-X2 Card

1. Remove power from L1, L2, & L3 and wait for the CHARGE light to go out.

2. Connect the common of the scope to terminal 2 of TA1.

3. Connect one channel of the scope to terminal 4 of TA1. (If the scope is two channel,

connect the second channel to terminal 5 of TA1.)

4. Set the scope for 5V/div, 50ms/div, normal trigger, and rising edge trigger.

5. Apply power to the drive, but do NOT apply a run command.

6. Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both

channels, 50% duty cycle, and they should be the inverse of each other (separated by

180 electrical degrees).

7. Disconnect the two scope channels, and reconnect them to terminals 6 and 7 of TA1.

6.6 CHECKING ENCODER PULSES

6-30

8. Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both

channels, 50% duty cycle, and they should be the inverse of each other (separated by

180 electrical degrees.

9. If one or both channels do not have the correct pulses present (i.e. missing pulses,

incorrect duty cycle, improper voltage, etc.), go to procedure C.

Figure 6-1. PG-X2 Card Inputs / Test Points

NOTE 1: Encoder output voltage should be at or near the encoder power supply voltage.

6-31

C. Checking the Pulses at a VCM Motor

1. Remove power from L1, L2, & L3 and wait for the CHARGE light to go out.

2. Take apart the military style connector at the motor.

3. Connect the common of the scope to pin F.

4. Connect one channel of the scope to pin A. (If the scope is two channel, connect the

second channel to pin H.)

5. Set the scope for 5V/div, 50ms/div, normal trigger, and rising edge trigger.

6. Apply power to the drive, but do NOT apply a run command.

7. Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both

channels, 50% duty cycle, and they should be the inverse of each other (separated by

180 electrical degrees).

8. Disconnect the two scope channels, and reconnect them to pins B and I.

9. Turn the motor shaft by hand. As Figure 6-1 shows, there should be pulses on both

channels, 50% duty cycle, and they should be the inverse of each other (separated by

180 electrical degrees).

10. If no pulses can be seen on any of the four pins (A, B, H, & I), check the power supply

between pins D and F. If it is not at or near 12VDC, check the power supply back at

the PG-X2 card on TA1 terminals 1 & 2. If the power supply is not good at TA1,

replace the PG-X2 card.

6-32

A1-1

The GPD 515/G5 control circuits use various parameters to select functions and

character-istics of the drive. For methods of changing of parameter settings, see Section

The following tables list all parameters in numerical order. For each parameter, reference

paragraph(s) in Section 2 or 5 are listed (if applicable) where the features of the drive

affected by that parameter are described.

A1-00 Language 0 : English 1 0 - 6 0 Q Q Q Q 2.3

Selection 1 : Japanese (See Note 1)

2 : German

3 : French

4 : Italian

5 : Spanish

6 : Portuguese

A1-01 Parameter 0 : Operation only 1 0 - 4 2 Q Q Q Q 5.4

Access 1 : User program See

Level 2 : Quick-start Note

3 : Basic 2

4 : Advanced

A1-02 Control 0 : V/f control 1 0 - 3 2 Q Q Q Q 2.2

Method 1 : V/f with PG feedback (See Note 1)

Selection 2 : Open loop vector

3 : Flux vector

A1-03 Initialize 0 : No initialize 1 0000 - 0000 Q Q Q Q 5.37

Parameters 1110 : User initialize 9999

2220 : 2-wire initialize

3330 : 3-wire initialize

A1-04 Enter 1 0000 - 0000 Q Q Q Q

Password 9999

A2-01 User Program Select parameters to be 1 b1-01 - - - - - A A A A 5.4

thru Access available in User Program o2-09

A2-32 Parameters Access Level

NOTES:

1. Settings of these parameters will not be initialized by programming A1-03 to

“ 1110 ”, “ 2220 ”, or “ 3330 ”.

2. Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level

( A1-01) and Control Method ( A1-02; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop

Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the

Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;

— = not available.

Table A1-1. Drive AX-XX Parameters

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 2)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

Appendix 1. LISTING OF PARAMETERS

A1-2

b1-01 Reference 0 : Digital Operator 1 0 - 4 1 Q Q Q Q 5.25 A,

Selection 1 : Terminal 5.28,

2 : Serial communication 5.36

3 : Option PCB

4 : EWS

b1-02 Operation 0 : Digital Operator 1 0 - 4 1 Q Q Q Q 5.25 A,

Method 1 : Terminal 5.28

Selection 2 : Serial communication

3 : Option PCB

4 : EWS

b1-03 Stopping 0 : Ramp to stop 1 0 - 3 0 Q Q Q Q 5.10,2

Method 1 : Coast to stop (See Note 1) 5.40

Selection 2 : DC injection to stop

3 : Coast with timer

b1-04 Reverse 0 : Enable reverse operation 1 0, 1 0 B B B B

Operation 1 : Disable reverse operation

Prohibit

b1-05 Zero-Speed 0 : Run at frequency reference 1 0 - 3 0 — — — A 5.50

Operation 1 : Stop

(level 2 : Run at min. freq. ( E1-09 )

determined 3 : Run at zero speed

by E1-09 )

b1-06 Logic Input 0 : 2ms – 2 scans 1 0, 1 1 A A A A

Scan Rate 1 : 5ms – 2 scans

b1-07 Local/Remote 0 : Cycle external Run 1 0, 1 0 A A A A 5.32A

Run Selection 1 : Accept external Run

b1-08 Run Command 0 : Run command is disabled 1 0 - 1 0 A A A A 5.26

Selection during program mode

During 1 : Run command enabled

Program during program mode

b2-01 DC Injection 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 10.0 0.5 B B B B 5.10,

Braking Start 5.32

Frequency

b2-02 DC Injection 1 % 0 - 100 50 B B B — 5.10

Braking

Current

b2-03 DC Injection 0.01 0.00 - 10.00 0.00 B B B B 5.10

Braking Time sec

at Start

b2-04 DC Injection 0.01 0.00 - 10.00 0.00 B B B B 5.10

Braking Time sec

at Stop

b2-08 Field 100% is no load current value 1% 0 - 500 0 — — A A 5.10B

Compensation at Min. frequency (E1-09).

At Start

Table A1-2. Drive bX-XX Parameters

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 3)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-3

b3-01 Speed Search 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 0 A A A A 5.32 D

Selection 1 : Enabled (See Note 2)

b3-02 Speed Search 1 % 0 - 200 100 A — A — 5.32 D

Deactivation (See Note 2)

Current Level

b3-03 Speed Search 0.1 0.0 - 10.0 2.0 A — A — 5.32 D

Deceleration sec

Time

b4-01 Timer 0.1 0.0 - 300.0 0.0 A A A A 5.32 E

Function sec

ON-Delay

Time

b4-02 Timer 0.1 0.0 - 300.0 0.0 A A A A 5.32 E

Function sec

OFF-Delay

Time

b5-01 PID Control 0 : Disabled 1 0 - 4 0 A A A A 5.36

Mode 1 : D=Feedback

Selection 2 : D=Feed forward

3 : Reference + PID

(D=Feedback)

4 : Reference + PID

(D=Feed Forward)

b5-02 PID 0.01 0.00 - 25.00 1.00 A A A A 5.36

Proportional

Gain

b5-03 PID Integral 0.1 0.0 - 360.0 1.0 A A A A 5.36

Time sec

b5-04 PID Integral 0.1 % 0.0 - 100.0 100.0 A A A A 5.36

Limit

b5-05 PID 0.01 0.00 - 10.00 0.00 A A A A 5.36

Differential sec

Time

b5-06 PID Output 0.1 % 0.0 - 100.0 100.0 A A A A 5.36

Limit

b5-07 PID Offset 0.01 % –100.0 - 0.0 A A A A 5.36

Adjustment 100.0

b5-08 PID Primary 0.01 0.00 - 10.00 0.00 A A A A 5.36

Delay Time sec

Constant

b5-09 PID Output 0 : Not Inverted 1 0, 1 0 A A A A 5.36D

Selection 1 : Inverted

Table A1-2. Drive bX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 3)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-4

b5-10 PID Output 0.1 0.0 - 25.0 1.0 A A A A 5.36D

Gain

b5-11 PID Output 0 : If PID output tries to go 1 0, 1 0 A A A A 5.36D

Reverse negative, it will be limited

Selection to 0 (motor stops)

1 : PID output is allowed to go

negative (motor runs in

reverse)

b5-12 Feedback Loss 0 : Detection is disabled 1 0 - 2 0 A A A A 5.36E

Detection 1 : Detection is enabled -

Selection (PID) alarm only

2 : Detection is enabled - fault

b5-13 Feedback 1% 0 - 100 0 A A A A 5.36E

Loss Detection

Level (PID)

b5-14 Feedback 0.1 0.0 - 25.5 1.0 A A A A 5.36E

Loss Detection sec

Delay Time

(PID)

b6-01 Dwell 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 0.0 A A A A 5.14

Frequency

at Start

b6-02 Dwell Time 0.1 0.0 - 10.0 0.0 A A A A 5.14

at Start sec

b6-03 Dwell 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 0.0 A A A A 5.14

Frequency

at Stop

b6-04 Dwell Time 0.1 0.0 - 10.0 0.0 A A A A 5.14

at Stop sec

b7-01 Droop Control 0.1 % 0.0 - 100.0 0.0 — — — A 5.13

Level

b7-02 Droop Control 0.01 0.03 - 2.00 0.05 — — — A 5.13

Delay Time sec

b8-01 Energy-saving 1 % 0 - 100 80 A A — — 5.16A

Gain

b8-02 Energy-saving 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 0.0 A A — — 5.16A

Frequency

b8-03 Automatic 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 0 — — A A 5.16B

Energy-saving 1 : Enabled

Selection

b8-04 Automatic 0.1 0.0 - 10.0 Note 2 — — A A 5.16B

Energy-saving

Gain

Table A1-2. Drive bX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 3)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-5

b8-05 Automatic 0.01 0.0 - 10.0 Note 2 — — A A 5.16B

Energy-saving sec

Time Constant

b9-01 Zero-Servo 1 0 - 100 5 — — — A 5.49

Gain

b9-02 Zero-Servo 1 0 - 16383 10 — — — A 5.49

Completion

Width

Table A1-2. Drive bX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 3)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

NOTES:

1. Setting range is only 0 and 1 when control method is set to Flux Vector control

( A1-02 = 3).

2. Will change with control method. See Appendix 3, Table A3-2.

3. Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level

( A1-01) and Control Method ( A1-02; 0 = V/f, 1 - V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop

Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the

Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;

— = not available.

A1-6

C1-01 Acceleration 0.01 0.00 - 600.00 10.00 Q Q Q Q 5.2

Time 1 sec. or or

C1-02 Deceleration or 0.0 - 6000.0 10.0 Q Q Q Q 5.2

Time 1 0.1

C1-03 Acceleration sec. (Dependent (Dependent B B B B 5.2

Time 2

(Depen-

upon C1-10 upon C1-10

C1-04 Deceleration

dent

setting) setting) BB BB 5.2

Time 2

upon

C1-05 Acceleration C1-10 AA AA 5.2

Time 3

setting)

C1-06 Deceleration AAAA 5.2

Time 3

C1-07 Acceleration AAAA 5.2

Time 4

C1-08 Deceleration AAAA 5.2

Time 4

C1-09 Fast-Stop BBBB 5.2

Decel. Time

C1-10 Accel/Decel 0 : 0.01 seconds 1 0, 1 1 A A A A 5.2

Time Setting 1 : 0.1 seconds

Unit

C1-11 Accel/Decel 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 0.00 A A A A 5.2

Time Switching

Frequency

C2-01 S-Curve 0.01 0.0 - 2.50 0.20 A A A A 5.3

Characteristic sec

at Accel. Start

C2-02 S-Curve 0.01 0.0 - 2.50 0.20 A A A A 5.3

Characteristic sec

at Accel. End

C2-03 S-Curve 0.01 0.0 - 2.50 0.20 A A A A 5.3

Characteristic sec

at Decel. Start

C2-04 S-Curve 0.01 0.0 - 2.50 0.00 A A A A 5.3

Characteristic sec

at Decel. End

Table A1-3. Drive CX-XX Parameters

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 3)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-7

C3-01 Slip 0.1 0.0 - 2.5 (See Note 1) B — B B 5.38

Compensation

Gain

C3-02 Slip 1 ms 0 - 10000 (See Note 1) A — A — 5.38

Compensation

Primary Delay

Time

C3-03 Slip 1 % 0 - 250 200 A — A — 5.38

Compensation

Limit

C3-04 Slip 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 0 A A A — 5.38

Compensation 1 : Enabled

Selection

During

Regeneration

C3-05 Flux Select 0 : Slip Included - Flux is 1 0, 1 0 — — A — 5.38

calculated after slip

compensation is applied

1 : Slip Excluded - Flux is

calculated before slip

compensation is applied

C3-06 Output Voltage 0 : Disabled - Output voltage 1 0, 1 0 — — A A 5.38

Limit limit and slip compensation

are disabled above base

speed

1 : Enabled - Output voltage

limit and slip compensation

are enabled above base

speed

C4-01 Torque 0.01 0.00 - 2.50 1.00 B B B — 5.42

Compensation

Gain

C4-02 Torque 1 ms 0 - 10000 (See Note 1) A A A — 5.42

Compensation

Time Constant

C4-03 Forward Torque 0.1% 0.0 - 200.0 0.0 — — A — 5.42

Compensation

At Start

C4-04 Reverse Torque 0.1% -200.0 - 0.0 0.0 — — A — 5.42

Compensation

At Start

C4-05 Torque 1 ms 0 - 200 10 — — A — 5.42

Compensation

At Start Time

Constant

Table A1-3. Drive CX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 3)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-8

C5-01 ASR 0.01 0.00 - 300.00 (See Note 1) — B — B 5.7

Proportional

Gain 1

C5-02 ASR Integral 0.001 0.000 - (See Note 1) — B — B 5.7

Time 1 sec 10.000

C5-03 ASR 0.01 0.00 - 300.00 (See Note 1) — B — B 5.7

Proportional

Gain 2

C5-04 ASR Integral 0.001 0.000 - (See Note 1) — B — B 5.7

Time 2 sec 10.000

C5-05 ASR Limit 0.1 % 0.0 - 20.0 5.0 — A — —

C5-06 ASR Primary 0.001 0.000 - 0.500 0.004 — — — A 5.7

Delay Time sec

C5-07 ASR 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 0.0 — — — A 5.7

Switching

Frequency

C5-08 ASR Integral 1 % 0 - 400 400 — — — A

Limit

C6-01 Carrier 0.1 0.4 - 15.0 10.0 B B B B 5.8

Frequency kHz (See Note 2) (See Note 2)

Upper Limit

C6-02 Carrier 0.1 0.4 - 15.0 10.0 A A — — 5.8

Frequency kHz (See Note 2) (See Note 2)

Lower Limit

C6-03 Carrier 1 00 - 99 00 A A — — 5.8

Frequency (See Note 2) (See Note 2)

Proportional

Gain

C7-01 Hunting 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 1 A A — — 5.23

Prevention 1 : Enabled

Selection

C7-02 Hunting 0.01 0.00 - 2.50 1.00 A A — — 5.23

Prevention

Gain

Table A1-3. Drive CX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 3)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-9

C8-08 AFR Gain 0.01 0.00 - 10.00 1.00 — — A — 5.6

C8-09 AFR Time 1 ms 0 - 2000 50 — — A — 5.6

C8-30 Carrier 0 : Fc = 2 kHz 1 0, 1 2 — — A —

Frequency 1 : Fc = C6-01

During Auto- 2 : Fc = 5 kHz

Tuning

NOTES:

1. Factory setting differs depending on the control method ( A1-02).

2. Setting range and factory setting differ depending on drive capacity and the control

method.

3. Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level

( A1-01) and Control Method ( A1-02; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop

Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the

Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;

— = not available.

Table A1-3. Drive CX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 3)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-10

d1-01 Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0 0.00 Q Q Q Q 5.25 B

Reference 1

d1-02 Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0 0.00 Q Q Q Q 5.25 B

Reference 2

d1-03 Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0 0.00 Q Q Q Q 5.25 B

Reference 3

d1-04 Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0 0.00 Q Q Q Q 5.25 B

Reference 4

d1-05 Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0 0.00 B B B B 5.25 B

Reference 5

d1-06 Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0 0.00 B B B B 5.25 B

Reference 6

d1-07 Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0 0.00 B B B B 5.25 B

Reference 7

d1-08 Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0 0.00 B B B B 5.25 B

Reference 8

d1-09 Jog Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.00 - 400.0 6.00 Q Q Q Q 5.24,

Reference 5.25 B

d2-01 Frequency 0.1 % 0.0 - 110.0 100.0 B B B B 5.22,

Reference 5.32 G

Upper Limit

d2-02 Frequency 0.1 % 0.0 - 109.0 0.0 B B B B 5.22

Reference

Lower Limit

d3-01 Critical 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 0.0 B B B B 5.9

Frequency

Rejection 1

d3-02 Critical 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 0.0 B B B B 5.9

Frequency

Rejection 2

d3-03 Critical 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 0.0 B B B B 5.9

Frequency

Rejection 3

d3-04 Critical 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 20.0 1.0 B B B B 5.9

Frequency

Rejection

Width

d4-01 Frequency 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 0 A A A A 5.21,

Reference 1 : Enabled 5.32 G

Hold

Function

Selection

Table A1-4. Drive dX-XX Parameters

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 1)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-11

d4-02 Trim Control 1 % 0 - 100 10 A A A A 5.32 H

Level

d5-01 Torque Control 0 : Speed Control 1 0, 1 0 — — — A 5.43

Selection 1 : Torque Control

d5-02 Torque 1 ms 0 - 1000 0 — — — A 5.43

Reference

Delay Time

d5-03 Speed Limit 1 : Analog input 1 1, 2 1 — — — A 5.43

Selection (term. 13 & 14)

2 : d5-04 setting

d5-04 Speed Limit 1 % –120 - +120 0 — — — A 5.43

d5-05 Speed Limit 1 % 0 - 120 10 — — — A 5.43

Bias

d5-06 Speed/Torque 1 ms 0 - 1000 0 — — — A 5.43

Control

Switching

Timer

NOTES:

1. Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level

( A1-01) and Control Method ( A1-02; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop

Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the

Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;

— = not available.

Table A1-4. Drive dX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 1)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-12

E1-01 Input Voltage 1 V 155 - 255 230 Q Q Q Q 5.48

Setting (230V ratings) (230V ratings)

310 - 510 460

(460V ratings) (460V ratings)

445 - 733 575

(600V ratings) (600V ratings)

E1-02 Motor 0 : General Purpose motor 1 0 - 2 0 Q Q Q Q 5.41

Selection (TEFC)

1 : Blower Cooled motor

(TENV or TEBC)

2 : Vector Motor

E1-03 V/f Pattern 0 to E : 15 preset V/f patterns 1 H 0 - F F Q Q - - 5.47

Selection F : Custom pattern using E1-04

thru E1-10

E1-04 Maximum 0.1 Hz 40.0 - 400.0 60.0 Q Q Q Q 2.4,

Output 5.48

Frequency

E1-05 Maximum 0.1 V 0.0 - 255.0 230.0 Q Q Q Q 2.4,

Voltage (230V ratings) (230V ratings) 5.48

0.0 - 510.0 460.0

(460V ratings) (460V ratings)

0.0 - 733.1 575.0

(600V ratings) (600V ratings)

E1-06 Base 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 60.0 Q Q Q Q 2.4,

Frequency 5.48

E1-07 Mid. Output 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 (See Note 1) Q Q A - 5.48

Frequency A

E1-08 Mid. Output 0.1 V (See Note 1) Q Q A - 5.48

Voltage A 0.0 - 255.0 12.6

(230V ratings) (460V ratings)

0.0 - 510.0 25.3

(460V ratings) (460V ratings)

0.0 - 733.1 36.3

(600V ratings) (600V ratings)

E1-09 Min. Output 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 (See Note 1) Q Q A A 5.48

Frequency

E1-10 Min. Output 0.1 V (See Note 1) Q Q A - 5.48

Voltage A 0.0 - 255.0 2.3

(230V ratings) (460V ratings)

0.0 - 510.0 4.6

(460V ratings) (460V ratings)

0.0 - 733.1 6.5

(600V ratings) (600V ratings)

E1-11 Mid. Output 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 0.0 A A A A 5.48

Frequency B

E1-12 Mid. Output 0.1 V 0.0 - 255.0 0.0 A A Q Q 5.48

Voltage B (230V ratings)

0.0 - 510.0

(460V ratings)

0.0 - 733.1

(600V ratings)

E1-13 Base Voltage 0.1 V 0.0 - 255.0 0.0 A A Q Q 5.48

(230V ratings)

0.0 - 510.0

(460V ratings)

0.0 - 733.1

(600V ratings)

Table A1-5. Drive EX-XX Parameters

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 1)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-13

E2-01 Motor Rated (

See

0.00 - 1500.0 (See Note 3) Q Q Q Q 2.4,

Current

Note 2

)5.41

E2-02 Motor Rated 0.01 0.00 - 20.00 (See Note 3) A A Q Q 2.4

Slip Hz

E2-03 Motor No-load 0.01 A 0.00 - 1500.0 (See Note 3) A A Q Q 2.4

Current

E2-04 Number of 1 2 - 48 4 — Q — Q 2.4

Motor Poles pole

E2-05 Motor 0.001 0.000 - (See Note 3) A A A A 2.4

Line-to-line Ω65.000

Resistance

E2-06 Motor Leakage 0.1 % 0.0 - 40.0 (See Note 3) — — A A 2.4

Inductance

E2-07 Motor 0.01 0.00 - 0.50 0.50 — — A A 2.4

Iron-core

Saturation

Coefficient 1

E2-08 Motor 0.01 0.50 - 0.75 0.75 — — A A 2.4

Iron-core

Saturation

Coefficient 2

E2-09 Motor 0.1 % 0.0 - 10.0 0.0 — — — A 2.4

Mechanical

Loss

E2-10 Torque 1 W 0 - 65535 (See A A — —

Compensation Note 3)

Iron Loss

Table A1-5. Drive EX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 4)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

Control

Method

Selection

(Motor 2)

0 : V/f control

1 : V/f with PG feedback

2 : Open loop vector

3 : Flux vector

10 - 3 2

(See Note 5)

QQQQ5.45.1

E3-01

Maximum

Output

Frequency

(Motor 2)

0.1 Hz 40.0 - 400.0 60.0 QQQQ5.45.1

E4-01

Maximum

Voltage

(Motor 2)

0.1 V 0.0 - 255.0

(230V ratings)

0.0 - 510.0

(460V ratings)

0.0 - 733.1

(600V ratings)

230.0

(230V ratings)

460.0

(460V ratings)

575.0

(600V ratings)

QQQQ5.45.1

E4-02

Base

Frequency

(Motor 2)

0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 60.0 QQQQ5.45.1

E4-03

Mid. Output

Frequency

(Motor 2)

0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 (See Note 1) QQQQ5.45.1

E4-04

A1-14

E4-05 Mid. Output 0.1 Hz (See Note 1) Q Q Q Q 5.45.1

Voltage 0.0 - 255.0 12.6

(Motor 2) (230V ratings) (230V ratings)

0.0 - 510.0 25.3

(460V ratings) (460V ratings)

0.0 - 733.1 36.3

(600V ratings) (600V ratings)

E4-06 Min. Output 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 (See Note 1) Q Q Q A 5.45.1

Frequency

(Motor 2)

E4-07 Min. Output 0.1 V (See Note 1) Q Q Q Q 5.45.1

Voltage 0.0 - 255.0 2.3

(Motor 2) (230V ratings) (230V ratings)

0.0 - 510.0 4.6

(460V ratings) (460V ratings)

0.0 - 733.1 6.5

(600V ratings) (600V ratings)

E5-01 Rated (See 0.00 - 1500.0 (See Note 3) Q Q Q Q 5.45.1

Current Note 2) (See Note 3)

(Motor 2)

E5-02 Rated 0.01 0.00 - 20.00 (See Note 3) A A Q Q 5.45.1

Slip Hz

(Motor 2)

E5-03 No-load (See 0.00 - 1500.0 (See Note 3) A A Q Q 5.45.1

Current Note 2)

(Motor 2)

E5-04 Number of 2 2 - 48 4 — A — A 5.45.1

Motor Poles poles

(Motor 2)

E5-05 Line-to-line 0.001 0.000 - (See Note 3) A A A A 5.45.1

Resistance Ω65.000

(Motor 2)

E5-06 Leakage 0.1% 0.0 - 40.0 (See Note 3) — — A A 5.45.1

Inductance

(Motor 2)

Table A1-5. Drive EX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 4)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

NOTES: 1 . Factory setting differs depending on the selected Control Method ( A1-02).

2. Setting increment is 0.01A for models GPD515C-A003 thru -A033 (CIMR-G5M20P41F thru

27P51F), -B001 thru -B021 (40P41F thru 47P51F), and -C003 thru -C012 (51P51F thru

57P51F).

Setting increment is 0.1A for models GPD515C-A049 thru -A300 (CIMR-G5M20111F thru

20750F), -B001 thru -B011 (40111F thru 43000F), and -C017 thru -C200 (50111F thru

51600F).

3. Factory setting differs depending on drive capacity.

4. Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level

( A1-01) and Control Method ( A1-02; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop

Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the

Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;

— = not available.

5. Settings of these parameters will not be initialized by programming A1-03 to

“1110”, “2220”, or “3330”.

A1-15

F1-01 Encoder (PG) 1 ppr 0 - 60000 1024 — Q — Q 2.2 B,D,

Constant 5.15 A

F1-02 Operation 0 : Ramp to stop 1 0 - 3 1 — B — B 5.15 B

Selection at 1 : Coast to stop

PG Open 2 : Fast-stop

Circuit 3 : Alarm only

F1-03 Operation 0 : Ramp to stop 1 0 - 3 1 — B — B 5.15 C

Selection at 1 : Coast to stop

Overspeed 2 : Fast-stop

3 : Alarm only

F1-04 Operation 0 : Ramp to stop 1 0 - 3 3 — B — B 5.15 D

Selection at 1 : Coast to stop

Speed 2 : Fast-stop

Deviation 3 : Alarm only

F1-05 PG Rotation 0 : Counter-clockwise 1 0, 1 0 — B — B 5.15 E

1 : Clockwise

F1-06 PG Division Effective only with control 1 1 - 132 1 — B — B

Separate

Rate (PG circuit board PG-B2

Opt. Instr.

Pulse Monitor

Sheet

F1-07 Integral Value 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 0 — B — — 5.15 F

During 1 : Enable

Accel/Decel

Selection

F1-08 Overspeed 1 % 0 - 120 115 — A — A 5.15 C

Detection

Level

F1-09 Overspeed 0.1 0.0 - 2.0 (See Note 1) — A — A 5.15 C

Detection sec

Delay Time

F1-10 Excessive 1 % 0 - 50 10 — A — A 5.15 D

Speed

Deviation

Detection

Level

F1-11 Excessive 0.1 0.0 - 10.0 0.5 — A — A 5.15 D

Speed sec

Deviation

Detection

Delay Time

F1-12 Number of PG 1 0 - 1000 0 — A — — 5.15 G

Gear Teeth 1

F1-13 Number of PG 1 0 - 1000 0 — A — — 5.15 G

Gear Teeth 2

F1-14 PGo Detect 0.1 0.0 - 10.0 2.0 — A — A 5.15 B

Time sec

Table A1-6. Drive FX-XX Parameters

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 2)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-16

F2-01 AI-14 Bi-polar 0 : 3-channel individual 1 0, 1 0 B B B —

Separate

or Uni-polar 1 : 3-channel addition

Option

Input

Instr.

Selection

Sheet

F3-01 DI-16 Digital 0 :

BCD 1%

5 :

BCD 0.01 Hz

1 0 - 7 0 BB BB

Separate

Input Option 1 :

BCD 0.1 %

6 :

BCD (5DG)

Option

2 :

BCD 0.01 % 0.01 Hz

Instr.

3 :

BCD 1 Hz

7 :

Binary

Sheet

4 :

BCD 0.1 Hz

F4-01 AO-08 / AO-12 1 1 - 38 2 B B B B

Separate

Channel 1

Option

Monitor

Instr.

Selection

Sheet

F4-02 AO-08 / AO-12 0.01 0.00 - 2.50 1.00 B B B B

Separate

Channel 1

Option

Gain

Instr.

Sheet

F4-03 AO-08 / AO-12 1 1 - 38 3 B B B B

Separate

Channel 2

Option

Monitor

Instr.

Selection

Sheet

F4-04 AO-08 / AO-12 0.01 0.00 - 2.50 0.50 B B B B

Separate

Channel 2

Option

Gain

Instr.

F4-05 AO-08 / AO-12 0.1% -10.0 - 10.0 0.0 B B B B

Separate

Channel 1

Option

Bias

Instr.

Sheet

F4-06 AO-08 / AO-12 0.1% -10.0 - 10.0 0.0 B B B B

Separate

Channel 2

Option

Bias

Instr.

Sheet

F5-01 DO-02 1 0 - 37 0 B B B B

Separate

Channel 1

Option

Output

Instr.

Selection

Sheet

F5-02 DO-02 1 0 - 37 1 B B B B

Separate

Channel 2

Option

Output

Instr.

Selection

Sheet

F6-01 DO-08 Output 0 : 8-channel individual 1 0, 1 0 B B B B

Separate

Mode 1 : Binary output

Option

Selection

Instr.

Sheet

F7-01 PO-36F 0 : 1 x Output frequency 1 0 - 4 1 B B B B

Separate

Frequency 1 : 6 x Output frequency

Option

Multiple 2 : 10 x Output frequency

Instr.

Selection 3 : 12 x Output frequency

Sheet

4 : 36 x Output frequency

Table A1-6. Drive FX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 2)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-17

F8-01 Communication 0 : Rampt to Stop 1 0, 1 1 B B B —

Error (E-15) 1 : Coast to Stop

Detection 2 : Fast Stop

Selection 3 : Alarm Only

F9-01 Option 0 : Normally Open 1 0, 1 0 A A A A

External Fault 1 : Normally Closed

(EFO)

Selection

F9-02 Option 0 : Always Detected 1 0, 1 0 A A A A

External Fault 1 : Only During Run

(EFO)

Detection

F9-03 Option 0 : Ramp to Stop 1 0 - 3 1 A A A A

External Fault 1 : Coast to Stop

(EFO) 2 : Fast Stop

Action 3 : Alarm Only

F9-04 Trace 1 0 - 60,000 0 A A A A

Sample

Time

F9-05 Torque 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 1 — — — A

Reference 1 : Enabled

Limit

Selection

F9-06 DP-RAM 0 : Ramp to Stop 1 0 - 3 1 A A A A

Communication 1 : Coast to Stop

(BUS) Fault 2 : Fast Stop

Selection 3 : Alarm Only

Table A1-6. Drive FX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 2)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

NOTES:

1. Factory setting differs depending on the selected Control Method ( A1-02) - see

Table A3-2.

2. Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level

( A1-01) and Control Method ( A1-02; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop

Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the

Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;

— = not available.

A1-18

H1-01 Multi-function 1 0 - 77 24 B B B B 5.16,

Input 5.25,

(Terminal 3) 5.32

H1-02 Multi-function 1 0 - 77 14 B B B B 5.16,

Input 5.25,

(Terminal 4) 5.32

H1-03 Multi-function 1 0 - 77 3 (0) B B B B 5.16,

Input (See Note 1) 5.25,

(Terminal 5) 5.32

H1-04 Multi-function 1 0 - 77 4 (3) B B B B 5.16,

Input (See Note 1) 5.25,

(Terminal 6) 5.32

H1-05 Multi-function 1 0 - 77 6 (4) B B B B 5.16,

Input (See Note 1) 5.25,

(Terminal 7) 5.32

H1-06 Multi-function 1 0 - 77 8 (6) B B B B 5.16,

Input (See Note 1) 5.25,

(Terminal 8) 5.32

H2-01 Multi-function 1 0 - 37 0 B B B B 5.33

Output

(Term. 9 & 10)

H2-02 Multi-function 1 0 - 37 1 B B B B 5.33

Output

(Term. 25-27)

H2-03 Multi-function 1 0 - 37 2 B B B B 5.33

Output

(Term. 26-27)

H3-01 Auto Speed 0 : 0 to 10 VDC 1 0, 1 0 B B B B 5.19

Reference 1 : ±10 VDC

Signal Level

Selection

(Terminal 13)

H3-02 Auto Speed 0.1 % 0.0 - 1000.0 100.0 B B B B 5.18

Reference

Signal Gain

(Terminal 13)

H3-03 Auto Speed 0.1 % –100.0 - 0.0 B B B B 5.18

Reference +100.0

Signal Bias

(Terminal 13)

Table A1-7. Drive HX-XX Parameters

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 2)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-19

H3-04 Multi-function 0 : 0 to 10 VDC 1 0, 1 0 B B B B 5.19

Analog Input 1 1 : ±10 VDC

Signal Level

Selection

(Terminal 16)

H3-05 Multi-function 1 0 - 1F 0 B B B B 5.30

Analog

Input 1

Selection

(Terminal 16)

H3-06 Multi-function 0.1 % 0.0 - 1000.0 100.0 B B B B 5.18

Analog

Input 1 Gain

(Terminal 16)

H3-07 Multi-function 0.1 % –100.0 - 0.0 B B B B 5.18

Analog +100.0

Input 1 Bias

(Terminal 16)

H3-08 Multi-function 0 : 0 to 10 VDC 1 0 - 2 2 A A A A 5.19

Analog Input 2 1 : ±10 VDC

Signal Level 2 : 4-20 mA

Selection

(Terminal 14)

H3-09 Multi-function 1 0 - 1F 1F A A A A 5.30

Analog

Input 2

Selection

(Terminal 14)

H3-10 Multi-function 0.1 % 0.0 - 1000.0 100.0 A A A A 5.18

Analog

Input 2 Gain

(Terminal 14)

H3-11 Multi-function 0.1 % –100.0 - 0.0 A A A A 5.18

Analog +100.0

Input 2 Bias

(Terminal 14)

H3-12 Analog Input 0.01 0.00 - 2.00 0.00 A A A A

Filter Time sec

Constant

H4-01 Multi-function 1 1 - 38 2 B B B B 5.31

Analog

Monitor 1

Selection

(Terminal 21)

H4-02 Multi-function 0.01 0.00 - 2.50 1.00 B B B B 5.31

Analog

Monitor 1 Gain

(Terminal 21)

Table A1-7. Drive HX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 2)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-20

H4-03 Multi-function 0.1 % –10.0 - +10.0 0.0 B B B B 5.31

Analog

Monitor 1 Bias

(Terminal 21)

H4-04 Multi-function 1 1 - 38 3 B B B B 5.31

Analog

Monitor 2

Selection

(Terminal 23)

H4-05 Multi-function 0.01 0.00 - 2.50 0.50 B B B B 5.31

Analog

Monitor 2 Gain

(Terminal 23)

H4-06 Multi-function 0.1 % –10.0 - +10.0 0.0 B B B B 5.31

Analog

Monitor 2 Bias

(Terminal 23)

H4-07 Multi-function 0 : 0 to 10 VDC 1 0, 1 0 B B B B 5.31

Analog Monitor 1 : ±10 VDC

Signal Level

Selection

(Term. 21 & 23)

H5-01 Serial Comm. 1 0 - 1F 1F A A A A 5.28

Station

Address

H5-02 Serial Comm. 0 : 1200 baud 1 0 - 4 3 A A A A 5.28

Baud Rate 1 : 2400 baud

2 : 4800 baud

3 : 9600 baud

4 : 19.2 kbaud

H5-03 Serial Comm. 0 : No parity 1 0 - 2 0 A A A A 5.28

Parity Select 1 : Even parity

2 : Odd parity

H5-04 Stopping 0 : Ramp to stop 1 0 - 3 3 A A A A 5.28

Method After 1 : Coast to stop

Serial Comm. 2 : Fast-stop

Error 3 : Alarm only

H5-05 Serial Comm. 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 1 A A A A 5.28

Fault Detect 1 : Enabled

NOTES:

1. Factory settings in the parentheses are values obtained at a 3-wire initialization.

2. Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level

( A1-01) and Control Method ( A1-02; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop

Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the

Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;

— = not available.

Table A1-7. Drive HX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 2)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-21

L1-01 Motor 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 1 B B B B 5.41

Overload 1 : Enabled (Coast to Stop)

Protection

Selection

L1-02 Motor 0.1 0.1 - 20.0 8.0 B B B B 5.41

Overload min

Protection

Time Constant

L2-01 Momentary 0 : Disabled 1 0 - 2 0 B B B B 5.29

Power Loss 1 : Power loss ride-thru

Detection 2 : CPU power active

Selection

L2-02 Momentary 0.1 0.0 - 2.0 (See Note 1) B B B B 5.29

Power Loss sec

Ride-thru Time

L2-03 Momentary 0.1 0.1 - 5.0 (See Note 1) B B B B 5.32 D

Power Loss sec

Minimum Base

Block Time

L2-04 Momentary 0.1 0.0 - 5.0 (See Note 1) A A A A 5.32 D

Power Loss sec

Recovery

Ramp Time

L2-05 Undervoltage 1 V A A A A 5.29

Detection sec

Level

L2-06 KEB 0.1 % 0.0 - 100.0 0.0 A A A A

Frequency

L3-01 Stall 0 : Disabled 1 0 - 2 1 B B B — 5.39

Prevention 1 : General-purpose

Selection 2 : Intelligent (See Note 2)

During Accel

L3-02 Stall 1 % 0 - 200 150 B B B — 5.39

Prevention

Level During

Accel

L3-03 Stall 1 % 0 - 100 50 A A A — 5.39

Prevention

Level During

Accel (CHP)

L3-04 Stall 0 : Disabled 1 0 - 3 1 B B B B 5.39

Prevention 1 : General-purpose

Selection 2 : Intelligent (See Note 2)

During Decel 3 : Stall Prevent w/Resistor

Table A1-8. Drive LX-XX Parameters

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 4)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

150 -210

(230V ratings)

300 - 420

(460V ratings)

431 - 603

(600V ratings)

190

(230V ratings)

380

(460V ratings)

546

(600V ratings)

A1-22

L3-05 Stall 0 : Disabled 1 0 - 2 1 B B — — 5.39

Prevention 1 : Decel time 1

Selection 2 : Decel time 2

During

Running

L3-06 Stall 1 % 30 - 200 160 B B — — 5.39

Prevention

Level During

Running

L4-01 Speed 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 0.0 B B B B 5.33

Coincidence

Frequency

L4-02 Speed 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 20.0 2.0 B B B B 5.33

Coincidence

Width

L4-03 Speed 0.1 Hz –400.0 - 0.0 A A A A 5.33

Coincidence +400.0

Frequency (±)

L4-04 Speed 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 20.0 2.0 A A A A 5.33

Coincidence

Width (±)

L4-05 Frequency 0 : Stop 1 0, 1 0 A A A A 5.20

Reference 1 : Run at 80% of frequency

Loss reference

Detection

Selection

L5-01 Number of 1 0 - 10 0 B B B B 5.5

Auto Restart time

Attempts

L5-02 Auto Restart 0 : No fault relay 1 0, 1 0 B B B B 5.5

Operation 1 : Fault relay active

Selection

L6-01 Torque 0 : Disabled 1 0 - 4 0 B B B B 5.44

Detection 1 : Detected during speed

Selection 1 agree, and operation

continues after detection

2 : Detected during running,

and operation continues

after detection

3 : Detected during speed

agree, and drive faults

4 : Detected during running,

and drive faults

Table A1-8. Drive LX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 4)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-23

L6-02 Torque 1 % 0 - 300 150 B B B B 5.44

Detection

Level 1

L6-03 Torque 0.1 0.0 - 10.0 0.1 B B B B 5.44

Detection sec

Time 1

L6-04 Torque 0 : Disabled 1 0 - 4 0 A A A A 5.44

Detection 1 : Detected during speed

Selection 2 agree, and operation

continues after detection

2 : Detected during running,

and operation continues

after detection

3 : Detected during speed

agree, and drive faults

4 : Detected during running,

and drive faults

L6-05 Torque 1 % 0 - 300 150 A A A A 5.44

Detection

Level 2

L6-06 Torque 0.1 0.0 - 10.0 0.1 A A A A 5.44

Detection sec

Time 2

L7-01 Forward 1 % 0 - 300 200 — — B B 5.45

Torque Limit

L7-02 Reverse 1 % 0 - 300 200 — — B B 5.45

Torque Limit

L7-03 Forward 1 % 0 - 300 200 — — B B 5.45

Regenerative

Torque Limit

L7-04 Reverse 1 % 0 - 300 200 — — B B 5.45

Regenerative

Torque Limit

L8-01 Internal 0 : Not provided 1 0, 1 0 B B B B 5.27

Dynamic 1 : Provided

Braking

Resistor

Protection

L8-02 OH (Overheat) 1 °C 50 - 130 (See Note 1) A A A A 5.27

Protection

Alarm Level

Table A1-8. Drive LX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 4)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-24

L8-03 Operation 0 : Ramp to stop 1 0 - 3 3 A A A A 5.27

Selection After 1 : Coast to stop

OH (Overheat) 2 : Fast-stop

Pre-alarm 3 : Alarm only

L8-05 Input 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 0 A A A A 5.34

Open-phase 1 : Enabled

Protection

Selection

L8-07 Output 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 1 A A A A 5.35

Open-phase 1 : Enabled

Protection

Selection

L8-10 Output Ground 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 1 A A A A 5.27

Fault Detection 1 : Enabled

Selection

L8-17 IGBT 0 : Conventional 1 0 - 3 1 A A A — 5.27

Protection 1 : Lower carrier frequency

at Low when I > 100% and

Frequency Fout < 10.0 Hz

2 : Short Term OL2

(2 seconds if Fout

< 6.0 Hz and I > 175%

3 : Limit current to 150%

L8-19 OL2 Selection 0 : Low frequency OL2 1 0, 1 0 A A A A 5.27

at Low Speed disabled

1 : Low frequency OL2

enabled

NOTES:

1. Factory setting differs depending on drive capacity.

2. When Vector control ( A1-02= 2 or 3) is selected, set value 2 (Intelligent) cannot

be set.

3. Factory setting differs depending on the Control Method selected by ( A1-02).

4. Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level

( A1-01) and Control Method ( A1-02; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop

Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the

Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;

— = not available.

Table A1-8. Drive LX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 4)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-25

o1-01 Monitor 1 4 - 38 6 B B B B 5.12

Selection

o1-02 Monitor 1 : Frequency reference 1 1 - 4 1 B B B B 5.12

Selection 2 : Output frequency

After Power-up 3 : Output current

4 : Selected monitor

o1-03 Digital 1 0 - 39999 0 B B B B 5.11

Operator

Display

Selection

o1-04 Digital 0 : Hz 1 0, 1 0 — — — B 5.11

Operator 1 : RPM

Display Units

o1-05 Parameter / 0 : Parameter number 1 0, 1 0 A A A A 5.11

Address 1 : MODBUS address

Display

Selection

o2-01 LOCAL/ 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 1 B B B B 5.26

REMOTE Key 1 : Enabled

Selection

o2-02 STOP Key 0 : Disabled 1 0, 1 1 B B B B 5.26

Function 1 : Enabled

During

Remote Run

o2-03 User 0 : Disabled 1 0 - 2 0 B B B B 5.46

Parameter 1 : Set default

Default Value 2 : Clear all

o2-04 kVA Selection 1 0 - FF (See Note 1) B B B B Table

(Drive Model A3-1

No.)

o2-05 Digital 0 : Drive accepts frequency 1 0, 1 0 A A A A 5.26

Operator command after ENTER

"Motor is pressed

Operated Pot" 1 : Drive accepts frequency

command immediately

o2-06 Operation 0 : Disabled (operation 1 0, 1 1 A A A A 5.26

Selection continues)

When Digital 1 : Enabled (motor coasts to

Operator is stop and fault is displayed

Disconnected

o2-07 Elapsed 1 0 - 65535 — A A A A 5.26

Operating hour

Hour Timer

Set

Table A1-9. Drive oX-XX Parameters

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 2)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-26

o2-08 Elapsed 0 : Timer active whenever 1 0, 1 0 A A A A 5.26

Operating power is applied to drive

Hour Timer 1 : Timer active whenever

Selection drive is in "run" mode

o2-09 Initial Mode 0 : Japanese Spec. 1 0 - 2 1 A A A A

Selection 1 : American Spec.

2 : European Spec.

NOTES:

1. Not initialized. Factory setting differs depending on the drive capacity.

2. Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level

( A1-01) and Control Method ( A1-02; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop

Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the

Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;

— = not available.

Table A1-9. Drive oX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

FUNCTION

INCRE-

SETTING FACTORY ACCESS LEVEL PARA.

DESCRIPTION (See Note 2)

NUMBER NAME

MENT

RANGE SETTING 0 1 2 3 REF .

A1-27

U1-01 Frequency (See 10V / max. O O O O

Reference Note 1) output freq.

( E1-04 )

U1-02 Output (See 10V / max. O O O O

Frequency Note 1) output freq.

( E1-04 )

U1-03 Output Current (See 10V / drive O O O O

Note 2) rated current

U1-04 Control Method 0 : V/f control — — O O O O

(4) 1 : V/f with PG feedback

2 : Open loop vector

3 : Flux vector

U1-05 Motor Speed 0.01 Hz 10V / max. — O O O

(4) output freq.

( E1-04 or

E4-01 )

U1-06 Output Voltage 0.1 V O O O O

U1-07 DC Bus Voltage 0.1 V O O O O

(4)

U1-08 Output Power 0.1 kW 10V / drive O O O O

(4) capacity (kW)

U1-09 Torque 0.1 % 10V / motor — — O O

(4) Reference rated torque

(internal)

U1-10 Input Terminal — — O O O O

(4) Status

Control circuit terminal 1 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 2 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 3 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 4 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 5 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 6 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 7 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 8 : "Closed"

U1-11 Output Terminal — — O O O O

(4) Status

Control circuit terminals 9-10 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 25 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 26 : "Closed"

Not Used

Fault contact output active

Table A1-10. Drive UX-XX Parameters

PARAMETER

DISPLAY

ANALOG MONITOR

ACCESS LEVEL

MONITOR ITEM DESCRIPTION (See Note 3)

NUMBER UNIT OUTPUT LEVEL 0 1 2 3

11111111

10V / 230V or

10V / 460V or

10V / 575V

10V / 400V or

10V / 800V or

10V / 1150V

10000111

A1-28

U1-12 Operation Status — — O O O O

(4)

During run

During zero-speed

During reverse run

During reset signal input

During speed agree

Drive operation ready

Minor fault

Major fault

U1-13 Elapsed 1 hour — O O O O

(4) Operation

Time

U1-14 Software No. EXAMPLE: 01114 — — OOOO

(4) (Flash ID No.)

U1-15 Control Circuit 0.1 % 10V / 10V B B B B

(4) Terminal 13

Input Voltage

U1-16 Control Circuit 0.1 % 10V / 10V or B B B B

(4) Terminal 14 10V / 20mA

Input Voltage

U1-17 Control Circuit 0.1 % 10V / 10V B B B B

(4) Terminal 16

Input Voltage

U1-18 Motor Secondary 0.1 % 10V / motor B B B B

(4) Current (Iq) rated primary

current

( E2-01 )

U1-19 Motor Exciting 0.1 % 10V / motor — — B B

(4) Current rated primary

current

( E2-01 )

U1-20 Output 0.01 Hz 10V / max. A A A A

(4) Frequency output freq.

After Soft-start ( E1-04 )

U1-21 Automatic 0.01 % 10V / max. — A — A

(4) Speed output freq.

Regulator Input ( E1-04 )

U1-22 Automatic Analog monitor output level becomes 0.01 % 10V / motor — A — A

(4) Speed 10V / max output frequency with V/F rated primary

Regulator control. current

Output ( E2-01 )

Table A1-10. Drive UX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

DISPLAY

ANALOG MONITOR

ACCESS LEVEL

MONITOR ITEM DESCRIPTION (See Note 3)

NUMBER UNIT OUTPUT LEVEL 0 1 2 3

11111111

A1-29

U1-23 Speed Deviation 0.01 % 10V / max. — A — A

(4) Regulator Input output freq.

( E1-04 )

U1-24 PID Feedback 0.01 % 10V / max. A A A A

(4) Amount output freq.

( E1-04 )

U1-25 DI-16H Input Displays an input value according to the — — A A A A

(4) Status setting of F3-01 .

U1-26 Output Voltage 0.1 V 10V / 230V or — — A A

(4) Reference Vq 10V / 460V or

10V / 575V

U1-27 Output Voltage 0.1 V 10V / 230V or — — A A

(4) Reference Vd 10V / 460V or

10V / 575V

U1-28 CPU ID No. EXAMPLE: 00110 — — AAAA

(4)

U1-32 ACR (q-Axis) 0.1 % — — A A

(4) Output

U1-33 ACR (d-Axis) 0.1 % — — A A

(4) Output

U1-34 OPE Detected — — A A A A

(4)

U1-35 Zero-Servo Only available with Zero-Servo 1 pulse — — — — A

(4) Pulse Count function in Flux Vector control.

U1-36 PID Input Displays PID Error 0.01% 10V / 100% A A A A

(Setpoint minus Feedback)

U1-37 PID Output Displays PID Output 0.01% 10V / 100% A A A A

(100% = E1-04)

U1-38 PID Setpoint 0.01% 10V / 100% A A A A

U2-01 Current Fault — — O O O O

U2-02 Last Fault — — O O O O

U2-03 Frequency At time of most recent fault 0.01 Hz — O O O O

Reference

U2-04 Output At time of most recent fault 0.01 Hz — O O O O

Frequency

U2-05 Output Current At time of most recent fault (See — O O O O

Note 2)

Table A1-10. Drive UX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

DISPLAY

ANALOG MONITOR

ACCESS LEVEL

MONITOR ITEM DESCRIPTION (See Note 3)

NUMBER UNIT OUTPUT LEVEL 0 1 2 3

A1-30

U2-14 Elapsed Time At time of most recent fault 1 hour — O O O O

U3-01 Last Fault Most recent fault — — O O O O

U3-02 Fault 2nd most recent fault — — O O O O

Message 2

Table A1-10. Drive UX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

DISPLAY

ANALOG MONITOR

ACCESS LEVEL

MONITOR ITEM DESCRIPTION (See Note 3)

NUMBER UNIT OUTPUT LEVEL 0 1 2 3

11111111

Control circuit terminal 1 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 2 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 3 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 4 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 5 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 6 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 7 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 8 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminals 9-10 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 25 : "Closed"

Control circuit terminal 26 : "Closed"

Not Used

Fault contact output active

10000111

During run

During zero-speed

During reverse run

During reset signal input

During speed agree

Drive operation ready

Minor fault

Major fault

11111111

U2-06 Motor Speed At time of most recent fault 0.01 Hz — O O O O

U2-07 Output Voltage At time of most recent fault 0.1 V — O O O O

U2-08 DC Bus Voltage At time of most recent fault 1 V — O O O O

U2-09 Output kWatts At time of most recent fault 0.1 kW — O O O O

U2-10 Torque At time of most recent fault 0.1 % — — — — O

Reference

U2-11 Input Terminal At time of most recent fault — — O O O O

Status

U2-12 Output Terminal At time of most recent fault — — O O O O

Status

U2-13 Inverter Status At time of most recent fault — — O O O O

A1-31

U3-03 Fault Message 3 3rd most recent fault — — O O O O

U3-04 Fault Message 4 4th most recent (oldest) fault — — O O O O

U3-05 Elapsed Time 1 Of most recent fault 1 hour — O O O O

U3-06 Elapsed Time 2 Of 2nd most recent fault 1 hour — O O O O

U3-07 Elapsed Time 3 Of 3rd most recent fault 1 hour — O O O O

U3-08 Elapsed Time 4 Of oldest fault 1 hour — O O O O

Table A1-10. Drive UX-XX Parameters – Continued

PARAMETER

DISPLAY

ANALOG MONITOR

ACCESS LEVEL

MONITOR ITEM DESCRIPTION (See Note 3)

NUMBER UNIT OUTPUT LEVEL 0 1 2 3

NOTES:

1. Display unit differs depending on setting of o1-03.

2. Display unit = 0.01A for models GPD515C-A003 thru -A033 (CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 27P51F),

-B001 thru -B021 (40P41F thru 47P51F), and -C003 thru -C012 (51P51F thru 57P51F).

Display unit = 0.1A for models GPD515C-A049 thru -A300 (CIMR-G5M20111F thru 20750F),

-B001 thru -B011 (40111F thru 43000F), and -C017 thru -C200 (50111F thru 51600F).

3. Capability to view and set specific parameters is dependent upon the Access Level

( A1-01) and Control Method ( A1-02; 0 = V/f, 1 = V/f w/PG, 2 = Open Loop

Vector, 3 = Flux Vector) the drive is programmed for. Each column represents the

Access Level for a given Control Method: Q = Quick-start; B = Basic; A = Advanced;

— = not available.

4. Monitor items U1-04,U1-05,and U1-07through U1-35can only be viewed from

within the U1 Monitor Parameter function (i.e. press “down arrow” key, then

DATA / ENTER, then scroll up or down to view the desired monitor item). See

paragraph 4.3, Digital Operator Menu Trees for more details.

A1-32

A1-00 Language Selection 2.3

A1-01 Parameter Access Level Table A1-1

b5-02 Proportional Gain 5.36

b5-03 Integral Time 5.36

b5-04 Integral Value Limit 5.36

b5-05 Derivative Time 5.36

b5-06 PID Limit 5.36

b5-07 Offset 5.36

b5-08 Output Lag Filter Time 5.36

C1-01 Acceleration Time 1 5.2

C1-02 Deceleration Time 1 5.2

C1-03 Acceleration Time 2 5.2

C1-04 Deceleration Time 2 5.2

C1-10 Accel/Decel Time Setting Unit 5.2

C3-01 Slip Compensation Time 5.38

C4-01 Torque Compensation Gain 5.42

C5-01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 5.7

C5-02 ASR Integral Time 1 5.7

C5-03 ASR Proportional Gain 2 5.7

C5-04 ASR Integral Time 2 5.7

d1-01 Frequency Reference 1 5.23, 5.25 B

d1-02 Frequency Reference 2 5.23, 5.25 B

d1-03 Frequency Reference 3 5.23, 5.25 B

d1-04 Frequency Reference 4 5.23, 5.25 B

d1-05 Frequency Reference 5 5.23, 5.25 B

d1-06 Frequency Reference 6 5.23, 5.25 B

d1-07 Frequency Reference 7 5.23, 5.25 B

d1-08 Frequency Reference 8 5.23, 5.25 B

d1-09 Jog Frequency Reference 5.23, 5.25 B

F4-02 AO-08 / AO-12 Channel 1 Gain Option Instr. Sheet

F4-04 AO-08 / AO-12 Channel 2 Gain Option Instr. Sheet

H3-02 Auto Speed Reference Signal Gain (Term. 13) 5.18

H3-03 Auto Speed Reference Signal Bias (Term. 13) 5.18

H3-06 Multi-function Analog Input 1 Gain (Term. 16) 5.18

H3-07 Multi-function Analog Input 1 Bias (Term. 16) 5.18

H3-10 Multi-function Analog Input 2 Gain (Term. 14) 5.18

H3-11 Multi-function Analog Input 2 Bias (Term. 14) 5.18

H4-02 Multi-function Analog Monitor 1 Gain (Term. 21) 5.31

H4-03 Multi-function Analog Monitor 1 Bias (Term. 21) 5.31

H4-05 Multi-function Analog Monitor 2 Gain (Term. 23) 5.31

H4-06 Multi-function Analog Monitor 2 Bias (Term. 23) 5.31

o1-01 Monitor Selection 5.12

o1-02 Monitor Selection After Power-up 5.12

Table A1-11. Run Operative Parameters

PARAMETER FUNCTION NAME PARA. REF.

NUMBER

A2-1

208 / 230V Class drive

Input Power Voltage : 3 Phase 200 / 208 / 220 / 230 VAC + 10%, – 15%

Frequency : 50 / 60 Hz ± 5%

Output Power Voltage : 0 - 230V (proportional to input voltage)

Frequency: 0 - 400 Hz (V/Hz pattern selectable)

NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE 100% CONT. RATED RECOMMENDED

RECOMMENDED

MODEL NO. MODEL NO. RATED NOMINAL OUTPUT INPUT MCCB

INPUT

CIMR-G5M GPD515C- kVA HP AMPS AMPS RATING

(1)

(AMPS) FUSING (AMPS)(2)

20P41F A003 1.2 0.75 3.2 3.9 7 5.6

20P71F A006 2.3 1 & 1.5 6 7.2 15 10

21P51F A008 3.0 2 8 9.6 15 12

22P21F A011 4.2 3 11 13.2 30 17.5

23P71F A017 6.7 5 17.5 21 30 30

25P51F A025 9.5 7.5 25 30 50 45

27P51F A033 13 10 33 40 50 60

20111F A049 19 15 49 59 75 90

20151F A064 24 20 64 77 100 100

20181F A080 30 25 & 30 80 88 150 125

20221F A096 37 30 96 106 150 175

20300F A130 50 40 & 50 130 143 250 200

20370F A160 61 60 160 176 250 250

20550F A224 85 75 224 247 400 400

20750F A300 110 100 300 330 400 400

380 / 415 / 460V Class drive

Input Power Voltage : 3 Phase 380 / 400 / 415 / 440 / 460 VAC + 10%, – 15%

Frequency : 50 / 60 Hz ± 5%

Output Power Voltage : 0 - 460V (proportional to input voltage)

Frequency: 0 - 400 Hz (V/Hz pattern selectable)

NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE 100% CONT. RATED RECOMMENDED

RECOMMENDED

MODEL NO. MODEL NO. RATED NOMINAL OUTPUT INPUT MCCB

INPUT

CIMR-G5M GPD515C- kVA HP AMPS AMPS RATING

(1)

(AMPS) FUSING (AMPS)(2)

40P41F B001 1.4 0.75 1.8 2.2 3 3

40P71F B003 2.6 1 & 2 3.4 4.1 7 6

41P51F B004 3.7 3 4.8 5.8 7 8

43P71F B008 6.1 5 8 9.6 15 12

44P01F B011 8.6 7.5 11 13.2 30 17.5

45P51F B014 11 10 14 16.8 30 20

47P51F B021 14 15 21 26 30 30

40111F B027 21 20 27 33 50 45

40151F B034 26 25 34 40 50 50

40181F B041 31 30 41 46 75 70

40221F B052 40 40 52 58 75 90

40301F B065 50 50 65 72 100 100

40371F B080 61 60 80 88 150 125

40451F B096 73 75 96 106 150 150

40551F B128 98 100 128 141 250 200

40750F B165 130 125 165 182 250 250

41100F B224 170 150 224 247 400 400

41600F B302 230 200 & 250 302 330 400 400

41850F B380 290 300 380 456 600 600

42200F B450 340 300 & 350 450 540 800 400 (3)

43000F B605 460 400 & 500 605 726 1000 450 (3)

SECTION A.

Input Voltage Related Specifications

Table A2-1. Standard Specifications

( 1 ) Molded-case circuit breaker must be rated for at least 18,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity.

(2 ) Fuses should be of the current-limiting time-delay type offering protection for semi-conductor devices.

( 3 ) Two fuses of this rating are required for each phase.

Appendix 2. SPECIFICATIONS

(table continued on next page)

A2-2

600V Class drive

Input Power Voltage : 3 Phase 500/ 575/ 600 VAC +/– 10%

Frequency : 50 / 60 Hz ± 5%

Output Power Voltage : 0 - 575V (proportional to input voltage)

Frequency: 0 - 400 Hz (V/Hz pattern selectable)

NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE 100% CONT. RATED RECOMMENDED

RECOMMENDED

MODEL NO. MODEL NO. RATED NOMINAL OUTPUT INPUT MCCB

INPUT

CIMR-G5M GPD515C- kVA HP AMPS AMPS RATING

(1)

(AMPS) FUSING (AMPS)(2)

51P51F C003 2 2 3.5 4.3 10 10

52P21F C004 3 3 4.1 5.1 10 10

53P71F C006 5 5 6.3 7.7 20 15

55P51F C010 7.5 7.5 9.8 12.1 20 25

57P51F C012 10 10 12.5 15.4 20 30

50111F C017 15 15 17 21 30 40

50151F C022 20 20 22 28 50 50

50181F C027 25 25 27 33 60 60

50221F C032 30 30 32 40 60 70

50301F C041 40 40 41 51 100 100

50371F C052 50 50 52 64 100 125

50451F C062 60 60 62 76 100 156

50551F C077 75 75 77 95 150 200

50751F C099 100 100 99 122 225 250

50900F C130 125 125 130 160 225 300

51100F C172 150 150 172 211 300 400

51600F C200 200 200 200 246 400 500

SECTION A.

Input Voltage Related

Table A2-1. Standard Specifications (Continued)

( 1 ) Molded-case circuit breaker must be rated for at least 18,000 RMS symmetrical amperes interrupting capacity.

(2 ) Fuses should be of the current-limiting time-delay type offering protection for semi-conductor devices.

A2-3

SECTION C. ALL drives

Control Method Sine-coded PWM (Digital flux vector)

Frequency/Speed Range 100:1 (including at stall) (1000:1 possible with PG)

Control

Precision Digital ref.: ± 0.01% (–10 to 40°C, +14 to +140°F)

Analog ref.: ± 0.1% (25 ±10° C, 77 ±50°F)

Frequency Control Range 0.1 to 400 Hz

Speed Control Accuracy ± 0.2% (± 0.02% with PG)

Frequency/Speed Reference Digital Operator reference: 0.01 Hz (12 bits)

Setting Resolution (0.1 Hz @ 100 Hz and above)

Analog reference: 0.03 Hz/60 Hz (11 bits)

Control Starting Torque 150% / 1 Hz (150% / 0 RPM with PG)

Characteristics

Output Frequency Resolution 0.01 Hz

Auto Speed Reference Signal ± 10 VDC (20K Ohms), or 4-20mA (250 Ohms)

Accel / Decel Time 0 to 6000 sec (resolution: 0.1 sec)

(Accel / Decel times set independently, 4 steps available)

Torque Limit 4 types available

Braking Torque Approximately 20%

V/F Pattern Selection 15 Standard Patterns:

4 for general purpose; 4 for high starting torque;

4 for fans and pumps; 3 for constant horsepower.

1 Custom Pattern: defined by parameter settings.

Selectable Functions Multi-step speed operation (9 steps max.), S-curve accel/decel,

zero speed control, servo lock, arbitrary torque detection, etc.

Motor Overload Protection Electronic thermal overload relay

Instantaneous Overcurrent Motor coasts to a stop at approximately 200% rated current.

Fuse Blown Protection Motor coasts to a stop by blown fuse.

Overload Motor coasts a stop after 60 sec. at 150% of rated output

current.

Protective

Functions Overvoltage Motor coasts to a stop if drive DC bus voltage exceeds

400 VDC (230V unit), or 800VDC (460V unit), or 1050VDC

(600V unit).

Undervoltage Motor coasts to a stop if drive DC bus voltage drops to

190 VDC or below (230V unit), 380 VDC or below (460V unit),

546VDC or below (600V unit).

Momentary Power Failure Factory setting provides for motor to coast to a stop after

momentary power failure of more than 15 ms. Can be

reprogrammed to allow continuous operation (ride-through)

during power failure of up to 2 seconds or longer (see Note 2).

Heatsink Overheat Thermistor

SECTION C. ALL drives

Table A2-1. Standard Specifications (Continued)

(table continued on next page)

A2-4

SECTION C. ALL drives (CONTINUED)

Stall Prevention Stall prevention at acceleration/deceleration and constant

Protective speed operation.

Functions

(continued) Ground Fault Provided by electronic circuit.

Power Charge Indication "CHARGE" lamp remains lit until bus voltage drops below 50 V.

Location Indoor (protected from corrosive gases and dust)

Ambient Temperature –10 to 40°C (+14 to 104°F) for NEMA 1;

–10 to 45°C (+14 to 113°F) for protected chassis

Environmental

Conditions Storage Temperature (Note 3) –20 to 60°C (–4 to 140°F)

Humidity 95% RH (no condensation)

Vibration 1 G at less than 20 Hz, up to 0.2 G at 20 to 50 Hz

Elevation 3300 ft (1000 m) or less

SECTION D

Rated speed 1750 rpm (4 poles, 60Hz)

Pulse Generator 1024 ppr

Thermistor Standard

Load Connection Direct coupling or belt drive

Insulation Type Class F

Ambient Temperature –20 to +40°C (–4 to +104°F)

Location Indoor

SECTION C. ALL drives (Continued)

NOTES:

1. Overload capacity: 150% of rated for 60 sec.

2. See paragraph 5.29 for detailed information.

3. Temperature during shipping. Storing in this temperature for a long period may deteriorate main circuit capacitor.

4. 1HP motor VMB001C is an inverter-duty foot mount with C-Face.

Table A2-1. Standard Specifications (Continued)

SECTION D. All VCMs

A3-1

Parameter o2-04 (Drive Capacity Selection) is factory preset per the input voltage and

output current ratings of the drive, although the drive displays the voltage and kW rating.

This parameter setting determines the factory settings for the parameters listed in the

table below. If the Control PCB has been replaced, the new board MUST have o2-04

programmed to the appropriate set value BEFORE again operating the drive in the Drive

mode.

2 3 0 V

20P41F A003 0.75 3.2 0 15.0 15.0 1.90 2.90 1.20 9.842 18.2 0.7 0.5 0.3 95 14

20P71F A006 1 & 1.5 6 1 15.0 15.0 3.30 2.50 1.80 5.156 13.8 1.0 0.5 0.3 95 26

21P51F A008 2 8 2 15.0 15.0 6.20 2.60 2.80 1.997 18.5 1.0 0.5 0.3 95 53

22P21F A011 3 11 3 15.0 15.0 8.50 2.90 3.00 1.601 18.4 1.0 0.5 0.3 95 77

23P71F A017 5 17.5 4 15.0 15.0 14.00 2.73 4.50 0.771 19.6 2.0 0.5 0.3 95 112

25P51F A025 7.5 25 5 15.0 15.0 19.60 1.50 5.10 0.399 18.2 2.0 0.7 0.3 95 172

27P51F A033 10 33 6 15.0 15.0 26.60 1.30 8.00 0.288 15.5 2.0 0.7 0.3 95 262

20111F A049 15 49 7 15.0 15.0 39.7 1.70 11.2 0.230 19.5 2.0 0.7 0.3 95 245

20151F A064 20 64 8 15.0 15.0 53.0 1.60 15.2 0.138 17.2 2.0 0.7 0.3 95 272

20181F A080 25 & 30 80 9 15.0 15.0 65.8 1.67 15.7 0.101 20.1 2.0 1.0 0.6 95 505

20221F A096 30 96 A 10.0 10.0 77.2 1.70 18.5 0.079 19.5 2.0 1.0 0.6 95 538

20300F A130 40 & 50 130 b 10.0 10.0 105.0 1.80 21.9 0.064 20.8 2.0 1.0 0.6 95 699

20370F A160 60 160 C 10.0 10.0 131.0 1.33 38.2 0.039 18.8 2.0 1.0 0.6 95 823

20550F A224 75 224 E 10.0 10.0 190.0 1.43 45.6 0.022 20.5 2.0 1.0 1.0 95 852

20750F A300 100 300 F 10.0 10.0 260.0 1.39 72.0 0.023 20.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 95 960

4 6 0 V

40P41F B001 0.75 1.8 20 10.0 10.0 1.00 2.90 0.60 38.198 18.2 1.0 0.5 0.3 95 14

40P71F B003 1 & 2 3.4 21 10.0 10.0 1.60 2.60 0.80 22.459 14.3 1.0 0.5 0.3 95 26

41P51F B004 3 4.8 22 10.0 10.0 3.10 2.50 1.40 10.100 18.3 1.0 0.5 0.3 95 53

43P71F B008 5 8 24 10.0 10.0 7.00 2.70 2.30 3.333 19.3 2.0 0.5 0.3 95 130

44P01F B011 7.5 11 25 10.0 10.0 7.00 2.70 2.30 3.333 19.3 2.0 0.7 0.3 95 130

45P51F B014 10 14 26 10.0 10.0 9.80 1.50 2.60 1.595 18.2 2.0 0.7 0.3 95 193

47P51F B021 15 21 27 10.0 10.0 13.30 1.30 4.00 1.152 15.5 2.0 0.7 0.3 95 263

40111F B027 20 27 28 10.0 10.0 19.9 1.70 5.6 0.922 19.6 2.0 0.7 0.3 95 385

40151F B034 25 34 29 10.0 10.0 26.5 1.60 7.6 0.550 17.2 2.0 0.7 0.3 95 440

40181F B041 30 41 2A 10.0 10.0 32.9 1.67 7.8 0.403 20.1 2.0 1.0 0.6 95 508

40221F B052 40 52 2b 8.0 8.0 38.6 1.70 9.2 0.316 23.5 2.0 1.0 0.6 95 586

40301F B065 50 65 2C 8.0 8.0 52.3 1.80 10.9 0.269 20.7 2.0 1.0 0.6 95 750

Appendix 3. CAPACITY & CONTROL METHOD

RELATED PARAMETERS

(table continued on next page)

Table A3-1. Parameters Related to GPD 515 Capacity

PARAMETER

NEW OLD NOMINAL OUTPUT

DRIVE

MODEL MODEL

HP AMPS

NO. NO.

CIMR-G5M GPD515C–

o2-04 C6-01 C6-02 E2-01 E2-02 E2-03 E2-05 E2-06 L2-02 L2-03 L2-04 L8-02

&&&&&

E5-01 E5-02 E5-03 E5-05 E5-06 E2-10

(kHz) (kHz) (Amps) (Hz) (Amps) (ohms) (%) (sec.) (sec.) (sec.) (sec.) (watts)

4 6 0 V – Continued

40371F

B080 60 80 2d 6.0 6.0 65.6 1.33 19.1 0.155 18.8 2.0 1.0 0.6 95 925

40451F

B096 75 96 2E 6.0 6.0 79.7 1.60 22.0 0.122 19.9 2.0 1.0 0.6 95 1125

40551F

B128 100 128 2F 6.0 6.0 95.0 1.46 24.0 0.088 20.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 100 1260

40750F

B165 125 165 30 6.0 6.0 130.0 1.39 36.0 0.092 20.0 2.0 1.0 1.0 95 1600

41100F

B224 150 224 32 5.0 5.0 190.0 1.40 49.0 0.046 20.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 110 2150

41600F

B302 200 & 250 302 34 5.0 5.0 270.0 1.35 70.0 0.029 20.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 100 2850

41850F

B380 300 380 35 2.0 * 2.0 310.0 1.30 81.0 0.025 20.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 95 3200

42200F

B450 300 & 350 450 36 2.0 * 2.0 370.0 1.30 96.0 0.020 20.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 95 3700

43000F

B605 400 & 500 605 37 2.0 * 2.0 500.0 1.25 130.0 0.014 20.0 2.0 2.0 1.0 95 4700

NOTES:

* 2.5 kHz is maximum carrier frequency.

PARAMETER

NEW OLD NOMINAL OUTPUT

DRIVE

MODEL MODEL

HP AMPS

NO. NO.

CIMR-G5M GPD515C–

A3-2

6 0 0 V

51P51F

C003 2 3.5 42 10.0 10.0 2.70 2.50 0.90 13.720 18.3 1.0 0.5 0.3 95 53

52P21F

C004 3 4.1 43 10.0 10.0 3.90 3.00 1.20 8.825 18.7 1.0 0.5 0.3 95 77

53P71F

C006 5 6.3 44 10.0 10.0 6.10 2.70 1.90 4.939 19.3 2.0 0.5 0.3 95 130

55P51F

C010 7.5 9.8 45 10.0 10.0 9.00 1.50 2.70 2.601 18.2 2.0 0.5 0.3 95 193

57P51F

C012 10 12.5 46 10.0 10.0 11.00 1.30 3.30 1.446 15.5 2.0 0.5 0.3 95 263

50111F

C017 15 17 47 10.0 10.0 17.0 1.70 5.1 1.171 19.6 2.0 0.5 0.3 95 385

50151F

C022 20 22 48 10.0 10.0 22.0 1.60 6.6 0.896 17.2 2.0 0.5 0.3 95 440

50181F

C027 25 27 49 10.0 10.0 27.0 1.67 8.1 0.658 20.1 2.0 0.5 0.6 95 508

50221F

C032 30 32 4A 10.0 10.0 32.0 1.70 9.6 0.518 23.5 2.0 0.5 0.6 95 586

50301F

C041 40 41 4B 10.0 10.0 41.0 1.80 12.3 0.438 20.7 2.0 1.0 0.6 95 750

50371F

C052 50 52 4C 10.0 10.0 52.0 1.33 15.6 0.267 18.8 2.0 1.0 0.6 95 925

50451F

C062 60 62 4D 10.0 10.0 62.0 1.60 18.6 0.210 19.9 2.0 1.0 0.6 95 1125

50551F

C077 75 77 4E 10.0 10.0 77.0 1.46 23.1 0.150 20.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 95 1260

50751F

C099 100 99 4F 2.0 1.0 99.0 1.39 29.7 0.099 20.0 2.0 1.0 1.5 95 1600

50900F

C130 125 130 50 2.0 1.0 125.0 1.39 38.5 0.079 20.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 95 2150

51100F

C172 150 172 51 2.0 1.0 144.0 1.40 43.2 0.060 20.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 95 2150

51600F

C200 200 200 52 2.0 1.0 192.0 1.35 57.6 0.037 20.0 2.0 2.0 1.5 95 2850

NOTES:

*2.5 kHz is maximum carrier frequency.

Table A3-1. Parameters Related to GPD 515 Capacity

o2-04 C6-01 C6-02 E2-01 E2-02 E2-03 E2-05 E2-06 L2-02 L2-03 L2-04 L8-02

&&&&&

E5-01 E5-02 E5-03 E5-05 E5-06 E2-10

(kHz) (kHz) (Amps) (Hz) (Amps) (ohms) (%) (sec.) (sec.) (sec.) (sec.) (watts)

Table A3-1. Parameters Related to GPD 515 Capacity

PARAMETER

NEW OLD NOMINAL OUTPUT

DRIVE

MODEL MODEL

HP AMPS

NO. NO.

CIMR-G5M GPD515C–

o2-04 C6-01 C6-02 E2-01 E2-02 E2-03 E2-05 E2-06 L2-02 L2-03 L2-04 L8-02

&&&&&

E5-01 E5-02 E5-03 E5-05 E5-06 E2-10

(kHz) (kHz) (Amps) (Hz) (Amps) (ohms) (%) (sec.) (sec.) (sec.) (sec.) (watts)

A3-3

b3-01 Speed Search Selection 1 0, 1 0 1 0 1

b3-02 Speed Search Deactivation 1 % 0 - 200 150 — 100 —

Current Level

b8-04 Automatic 0.1 0.0 - 10.0 — — 0.7 1.0

Energy-Saving Gain

b8-05 Automatic 0.01 0.00 - 10.00 — — 0.50 0.01

Energy-Saving Time Constant sec

C3-01 Slip Compensation Gain 0.1 0.0 - 2.5 0.0 — 1.0 1.0

C3-02 Slip Compensation Primary 1 ms 0 - 10000 2000 — 200 —

Delay Time

C4-02 Torque Compensation Time 1 ms 0 - 10000 200 200 20 —

Constant

C5-01 ASR Proportional Gain 1 0.01 0.00 - 300.00 — 0.20 — 20.00

C5-02 ASR Integral Time 1 0.001 0.000 - — 0.200 — 0.500

sec 10.000

C5-03 ASR Proportional Gain 2 0.01 0.00 - 300.00 — 0.02 — 20.00

C5-04 ASR Integral Time 2 0.001 0.000 - — 0.050 — 0.500

sec 10.000

E1-07, Mid. Output Frequency A 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 —

E4-04

E1-08, Mid. Output Voltage A V 0.0 - 250.0 17.2 17.2 12.6 —

E4-05 0.0 - 510.0 (1) 34.5 (1) 34.5(1) 25.3(1)

0.0 - 733.1 (2) 49.5 (2) 49.5 (2) 36.3 (2)

E1-09, Min. Output Frequency 0.1 Hz 0.0 - 400.0 1.5 1.5 0.5 0.0

E4-06

E1-10, Min. Output Voltage 0.1 V 0.0 - 250.0 10.3 10.3 2.3 —

E4-07 0.0 - 510.0 (1) 20.7(1) 20.7(1) 4.6(1)

0.0 - 733.1 (2) 29.6 (2) 29.6 (2) 6.5 (2)

F1-09 Overspeed Detection 0.1 0.0 - 2.0 — 1.0 — 0.0

Delay Time sec

NOTES:

1. Values are for 460V ratings.

2. Values are for 600V ratings.

Table A3-2. Parameters Related to Control Method ( A1-02 )

FACTORY SETTING

PARAMETER INCRE-

SETTING

V / F Open Loop

NUMBER FUNCTION NAME

MENT

RANGE

V/F with PG Vector Flux Vector

A1-02 = 0 A1-02 = 1 A1-02 = 2 A1-02 = 3

A3-4

A4-1

1. Record all parameters that have been changed from their factory settings, by writing

down all settings that appear under the “Modified Constants” menu.

2. Record the Control Method (“Initialize” menu, A1-02 ).

3. Record the drive’s kVA selection ( o2-04 ). This parameter is available only when

the Access Level is set to “Advanced” ( A1-01 = 4).

4. Remove power, remove the old control board, and install the new control board.

5. Reapply power to the drive. An “ oPE01 KVA Selection ” fault may appear –

if so, step 7 will correct it.

6. Set the Access Level to “Advanced” from the “Initialize” menu ( A1-01 = 4).

7. Program the new control board for the correct drive size by setting parameter

o2-04 to the value that was recorded in step 3.

8. Set parameter o2-09 to “American Spec” to ensure that all parameters are reset

to the “American” values when the initialization is performed in step 10.

9. Set the new control board to the correct Control Method under the “Initialize” menu

( A1-02 ).

10. Reset the drive from the “Initialize” menu using the “Init Parameters” function

( A1-03 ). Entering “ 2220” will reset the drive for 2-wire control. Entering

“ 3330” will reset the drive for 3-wire control. NOTE: After a successful

initialization, the “Init Parameters” display will return to “ No Initialize ”.

11. Program all parameter settings with the data that was recorded in step 1.

Appendix 4. GPD 515/G5 SPARE PARTS

PROCEDURE FOR INSTALLING REPLACEMENT CONTROL PCB

A4-2

Old Drive

Model No.

GPD515C–

Power Module

Part No.

5P30– Transistor Module

Part No.

5P30– Diode Module

Part No.

5P50–

A003

A006

A008

A011

A017

A025

A033

A049

A064

A080

A096

A130

A160

A224

A300

New Drive

Model No.

CIMR-G5M

20P41F

20P71F

21P51F

22P21F

23P71F

25P51F

27P51F

20111F

20151F

20181F

20221F

20300F

20370F

20550F

20750F

0174

0175

0178

0154

0155

0156

0157

0180

0160

0161

0176

0477

0478

0479

0480

0481

0482

0177

Power PCB

Part No.

5P90– Gate Drive PCB

Part No.

5P90– Control PCB

0423

0422

0424

0425

0426

0427

0428

0429

0430

0410

0414

0416

0417

Part No.

5P90–0535

0415

Cooling Fan

Part No.

5P16– DC Bus Fuse

Part No.

5P17–

Control Fuse Part No.

5P17–

0057

0058

0059

0061

0050

0062

0051

0504

0505

0488

0481

0482

0501

0480

0483

0484

0487

0500

0485

IMPORTANT

Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive. To determine adequate inventory of spare parts, Yaskawa suggests using listed

value for quantities 2 and below. If listed value is greater than 2, factory suggests 1/3 of total listed.

No Diode Module in these

Drive Model No's; diodes are

contained in Power Module.

0490

A003

A006

A008

A011

A017

A025

A033

A049

A064

A080

A096

A130

A160

A224

A300

Old Drive

Model No.

GPD515C–

New Drive

Model No.

CIMR-G5M

20P41F

20P71F

21P51F

22P21F

23P71F

25P51F

27P51F

20111F

20151F

20181F

20221F

20300F

20370F

20550F

20750F

A003

A006

A008

A011

A017

A025

A033

A049

A064

A080

A096

A130

A160

A224

A300

Old Drive

Model No.

GPD515C–

New Drive

Model No.

CIMR-G5M

20P41F

20P71F

21P51F

22P21F

23P71F

25P51F

27P51F

20111F

20151F

20181F

20221F

20300F

20370F

20550F

20750F

A4-3

Power Module

Part No.

5P30– Transistor Module

Part No.

5P30– Diode Module

Part No.

5P50–

0171

0162

0163

0164

0165

0166

0167

0181

0150

0151

0483

0484

0485

0486

0488

0496

0152

0289

0290

0153

Power PCB Gate Drive PCB Control PCB

Part No.

5P90– 0535

0491 0492

No Diode Module in these

Drive Model No's; diodes are

contained in Power Module.

IMPORTANT

Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive. To determine adequate inventory of spare parts, Yaskawa suggests using listed

value for quantities 2 and below. If listed value is greater than 2, factory suggests 1/3 of total listed.

str/Heatsink

Assy

Part

5P30–

0487

0288

Consult

Yaskawa

Consult

Yaskawa

Old Drive

Model No.

GPD515C–

B001

B003

B004

B008

B011

B014

B021

B027

B034

B041

B052

B065

B080

B096

B128

B165

B224

B302

B380

B450

B605

40P41F

40P71F

41P51F

43P71F

44P01F

45P51F

47P51F

40111F

40151F

40181F

40221F

40301F

40371F

40451F

40551F

40750F

41100F

41600F

41850F

42200F

43000F

New Drive

Model No.

CIMR-G5M

Old Drive

Model No.

GPD515C–

B001

B003

B004

B008

B011

B014

B021

B027

B034

B041

B052

B065

B080

B096

B128

B165

B224

B302

B380

B450

B605

40P41F

40P71F

41P51F

43P71F

44P01F

45P51F

47P51F

40111F

40151F

40181F

40221F

40301F

40371F

40451F

40551F

40750F

41100F

41600F

41850F

42200F

43000F

New Drive

Model No.

CIMR-G5M

A4-4

Cooling Fan

Part No.

5P16– DC Bus Fuse

Part No.

5P17–

Control Fuse

Part No.

5P17–

0057

0058

0059

0061

0050

0062

0051

0064

0504

0060

0488

0489

0490

0500 0503 0502

0480

0491

0492

0478

0479

0477

IMPORTANT

Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive. To determine adequate inventory of spare parts, Yaskawa suggests using listed

value for quantities 2 and below. If listed value is greater than 2, factory suggests 1/3 of total listed.

No DC Bus Fuse in these Drive Model No's;

fuses are contained in Transistor/Heatsink Assembly.

Old Drive

Model No.

GPD515C–

B001

B003

B004

B008

B011

B014

B021

B027

B034

B041

B052

B065

B080

B096

B128

B165

B224

B302

B380

B450

B605

40P41F

40P71F

41P51F

43P71F

44P01F

45P51F

47P51F

40111F

40151F

40181F

40221F

40301F

40371F

40451F

40551F

40750F

41100F

41600F

41850F

42200F

43000F

New Drive

Model No.

CIMR-G5M

A4-5

Power Module

Part No. 5P30-

Diode Module

0179

0162

0163

0164

1217 1219

1220 1221 1200

0165 1201 0484 0485

0483 0491 0492

0488 SID30470487

Transistor Module

Part No. STR___ Part No. 5P50- Part No.

No Diode in these Drive Model Nos.; diodes are

contained in Power Module.

Power PCB

Part No. ETP615___

860

880

890

900 910 920 930 940

900 960 5P90-

0535

Control PCB

Gate Drive PCB

Part No. ETC615___

870

Cooling Fan

Part No. 5P16-

0057

0059

FU2067

50208016 50208017

DC Bus Fuse

Part No.

0058

FU2068 50205052 50205053 50205054 50208018 50208019 50208020

IMPORTANT

Numbers represent total quantity used in one Drive. To determine adequate inventory of spare parts, Yaskawa suggests

using listed value for quantities 2 and below. If listed value is greater than 2, factory suggests 1/3 of total listed.

51P51F

52P21F

53P71F

55P51F

57P51F

50111F

50151F

50181F

50221F

50301F

50371F

50451F

50551F

50751F

50900F

51100F

51600F

New Drive

Model No.

CIMR-G5M

C003

C004

C006

C010

C012

C017

C022

C027

C032

C041

C052

C062

C077

C099

C130

C172

C200

Old Drive

Model No.

GPD515C-

51P51F

52P21F

53P71F

55P51F

57P51F

50111F

50151F

50181F

50221F

50301F

50371F

50451F

50551F

50751F

50900F

51100F

51600F

New Drive

Model No.

CIMR-G5M

C003

C004

C006

C010

C012

C017

C022

C027

C032

C041

C052

C062

C077

C099

C130

C172

C200

Old Drive

Model No.

GPD515C-

51P51F

52P21F

53P71F

55P51F

57P51F

50111F

50151F

50181F

50221F

50301F

50371F

50451F

50551F

50751F

50900F

51100F

51600F

New Drive

Model No.

CIMR-G5M

C003

C004

C006

C010

C012

C017

C022

C027

C032

C041

C052

C062

C077

C099

C130

C172

C200

Old Drive

Model No.

GPD515C-

A4-6

NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS MOUNTING

HEAT LOSS

MODEL MODEL

NOMINAL ENCLOSURE

(IN.) DIM. (IN.)

WEIGHT

(Watts)

VOLTS NO. NO. HP TYPE (LB)

CIMR-G5M GPD515C– H W D H1 W1

Heatsink Internal

Total

20P41F A003 0.75 11.02 5.51 6.30 10.47 4.96 7 15 50 65

20P71F A006 1 &1.5 NEMA 1 11.02 5.51 6.30 10.47 4.96 7 25 65 90

21P51F A008 2 11.02 5.51 6.30 10.47 4.96 7 40 80 120

22P21F A011 3 NEMA 1 11.02 5.51 7.09 10.47 4.96 10 80 60 140

23P71F A017 5 11.02 5.51 7.09 10.47 4.96 10 135 80 215

225P51F A025 7.5 NEMA 1 11.81 7.87 8.07 11.22 7.32 12 210 90 300

327P51F A033 10 11.81 7.87 8.07 11.22 7.32 13 235 110 725

0 20111F A049 15 14.96 9.84 8.86 14.37 9.29 24 425 160 585

20151F A064 20 NEMA 1 15.75 9.84 8.86 14.37 9.29 24 525 200 725

20181F A080 25 & 30 24.02 12.99 11.22 17.13 10.83 71 655 230 885

20221F A096 30 NEMA 1 26.57 12.99 11.22 17.13 10.83 71 830 280 1110

20300F A130 40 & 50 Protected 26.57 16.73 13.78 25.59 12.60 134 930 440 1370

20370F A160 60 Chassis 26.57 16.73 13.78 25.59 12.60 137 1110 620 1730

20550F A224 75 Protected 31.50 18.70 13.78 30.51 14.57 176 1740 890 2630

20750F A300 100 Chassis 36.42 22.64 15.75 35.24 17.52 298 2050 1160 3210

40P41F B001 0.75 11.02 5.51 6.30 10.47 4.96 7 10 50 60

40P71F B003 1 & 2 NEMA 1 11.02 5.51 6.30 10.47 4.96 7 20 65 85

41P51F B004 3 11.02 5.51 7.09 10.47 4.96 9 30 80 110

43P71F B008 5 11.02 5.51 7.09 10.47 4.96 10 80 65 145

44P01F B011 7.5 NEMA 1 11.02 5.51 7.09 10.47 4.96 10 120 80 200

45P51F B014 10 11.81 7.87 8.07 11.22 7.32 13 135 85 220

47P51F B021 15 11.81 7.87 8.07 11.22 7.32 13 240 120 360

40111F B027 20 NEMA 1 14.96 9.84 8.86 14.37 9.29 24 305 150 455

440151F B034 25 14.96 9.84 8.86 14.37 9.29 24 390 180 570

6 40181F B041 30 24.02 12.99 11.22 17.13 10.83 68 465 195 660

0 40221F B052 40 NEMA 1 24.02 12.99 11.22 17.13 10.83 68 620 260 880

40301F B065 50 30.91 12.99 11.22 24.02 10.83 106 705 315 1020

40371F B080 60 NEMA 1 30.91 12.99 11.22 24.02 10.83 106 875 370 1245

40451F B096 75 33.46 12.99 11.22 24.02 10.83 106 970 415 1385

40551F B128 100 32.28 17.91 13.78 31.30 13.78 174 1110 710 1820

40750F B165 125 Protected 32.28 17.91 13.78 31.30 13.78 176 1430 890 2320

41100F B224 150 Chassis 36.42 22.64 14.76 35.24 17.52 298 1870 1160 3030

41600F B302 200& 250 36.42 22.64 15.75 35.24 17.52 320 2670 1520 4190

41850F B380 300 57.09 37.40 17.13 55.12 * 794 3400 1510 4910

42200F B450 350 Protected 57.09 37.40 17.13 55.12 * 794 4740 2110 6850

43000F B605 400 & 500 Chassis 62.99 37.80 17.91 61.02 * 926 6820 2910 9730

A5-1

Table A5-1. Drive Size and Weight

Table A5-1 lists dimensions for the drive in its standard enclosure. For information on

other types of enclosures available, consult your Yaskawa representative.

Appendix 5. GPD 515/G5 DIMENSIONS

A5-2

51P51F C003 2 NEMA 1 11.02 5.51 7.08 10.47 4.96 9 35 55 90

52P21F C004 3 NEMA 1 11.02 5.51 7.08 10.47 4.96 9 45 60 105

53P71F C006 5 NEMA 1 11.81 7.87 8.07 11.22 7.32 13 65 75 140

55P51F C010 7.5 NEMA 1 11.81 7.87 8.07 11.22 7.32 14 100 105 205

57P51F C012 10 NEMA 1 11.81 7.87 8.07 11.22 7.32 14 130 90 220

50111F C017 15 NEMA 1 14.96 9.84 8.85 14.37 9.29 29 180 150 330

50151F C022 20 NEMA 1 14.96 9.84 8.85 14.37 9.29 29 250 210 460

50181F C027 25 NEMA 1 29.53 15.75 11.22 28.74 11.81 97 310 230 540

50221F C032 30 NEMA 1 29.53 15.75 11.22 28.74 11.81 97 380 340 720

50301F C041 40 NEMA 1 33.47 22.64 11.81 32.48 18.70 159 430 390 820

50371F C052 50 NEMA 1 33.47 22.64 11.81 32.48 18.70 159 680 540 1220

50451F C062 60 NEMA 1 33.47 22.64 11.81 32.48 18.70 159 900 750 1650

50551F C077 75 NEMA 1 41.34 22.64 12.80 40.35 18.70 198 1000 750 1750

50751F C099 100 NEMA 1 41.97 22.64 12.80 40.35 18.70 198 1100 1150 2250

50900F C130 125 Protected 49.21 22.64 12.99 48.23 18.70 267 1150 1200 2350

51100F C172 150 62.99 22.64 13.98 61.81 18.70 324 1400 1800 3200

51600F C200 200 Chassis 62.99 22.64 13.98 61.81 18.70 335 1870 2830 4700

NEW DRIVE OLD DRIVE

PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS MOUNTING

HEAT LOSS

MODEL MODEL

NOMINAL ENCLOSURE

(IN.) DIM. (IN.)

WEIGHT

(Watts)

VOLTS NO. NO. HP TYPE (LB)

CIMR-G5M GPD515C– H W D H1 W1

Heatsink Internal

Total

Table A5-1. Drive Size and Weight

A6-1

GENERAL. Dynamic braking (DB) enables the motor to be brought to a smooth and

rapid stop. This is achieved by dissipating the regenerative energy of the AC motor

across the resistive components of the Dynamic Braking option. For further details on

dynamic braking operation, see the instruction sheet shipped with dynamic braking

components.

The GPD515C-A003 thru -A033 (CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 27P51F), -B001 thru -B034

(40P41F thru 40151F), and -C003 thru -C032 (51P51F thru 50221F) have an integral

braking transistor and require the addition of a Remote Mount Resistor Unit or a Heat Sink

Mount Resistor. All higher rated drives require the use of a Braking Transistor Unit and a

Remote Mount Resistor Unit.

Remote Mount Resistor Units typically mount outside of an electrical enclosure. Braking

Transistor Units mount inside of an electrical enclosure. Heat Sink Mount Resistors mount

to the back of the drive, attaching directly to the heat sink.

Available dynamic braking components are listed in Table A6-1 through A6-4.

Appendix 6. DYNAMIC BRAKING CONNECTIONS

Height Width Depth

20P41F 50185430 1 200 150 220 7.16 1.73 0.51

20P71F 50185430 1 200 150 220 7.16 1.73 0.51

21P51F 50185431 1 100 150 125 7.16 1.73 0.51

22P21F 50185432 1 70 150 120 7.16 1.73 0.51

23P71F 50185433 1 62 150 100 7.16 1.73 0.51

230 V

Part No.

Table A6-1. D

namic Brakin

- 3% Dut

cle - 230V

Rated

Input Model No.

CIMR-G5M

Drive

Dimensions

(

Inches

)

Heat Sink Mount Resistor

Qty

Reqd

Resistance

(Ohms)

(Each)

Power

(Watts)

(Each)

Approx.

Braking.

Torque

(%)

40P41F 50185530 1 750 150 165 7.16 1.73 0.51

40P71F 50185531 1 400 150 120 7.16 1.73 0.51

41P51F

A003

A006

A008

A011

A017

Model No.

Old Drive New Drive

GPD515C-

B001

B003

B004 50185531 1 200 150 150 7.16 1.73 0.51

460 V

Height Width Depth Height Width Depth

20P41F - - - - 48 - - - - - - 0825 1 200 250 150 5.00 14.00 4.00

20P71F - - - - 48 - - - - - - 0826 1 100 250 150 5.00 14.00 4.00

21P51F - - - - 16 - - - - - - 0826 1 100 250 115 5.00 14.00 4.00

22P21F - - - - 16 - - - - - - 0827 1 70 250 110 5.00 14.00 4.00

23P71F - - - - 16 - - - - - - 0828 1 40 846 115 5.00 14.00 7.00

25P51F - - - - 9.6 0829 1 3 824 105 5.00 14.00 7.00

27P51F - - - - 9.6 0830 1 20 1260 115 5.00 14.00 10.00

20111F 0010 1 9.6 11.00 5.53 5.91 0831 1 13.6 1500 115 5.00 14.00 13.00

20151F 0020 1 6.3 11.00 5.53 5.91 0832 1 10 1920 115 5.00 14.00 13.00

20181F 0020 1 6.3 11.00 5.53 5.91 0833 1 8 2592 100 5.00 21.00 10.00

20221F 0020 2 6.3 11.00 5.53 5.91 0834 2 6.8 2760 150 5.00 21.00 10.00

20300F 0020 2 6.3 11.00 5.53 5.91 0834 2 6.8 2760 135 5.00 21.00 10.00

20370F 0020 2 6.3 11.00 5.53 5.91 0834 2 6.8 2760 115 5.00 21.00 10.00

20550F 0020 3 6.3 11.00 5.53 5.91 0834 3 6.8 2760 135 5.00 21.00 10.00

20750F 0020 3 6.3 11.00 5.53 5.91 0834 3 6.8 2760 105 5.00 21.00 10.00

Table A6-2. Dynamic Braking - 10% Duty Cycle - 230V

Dimensions

(Inches)

Drive Remote Mount Resistor Unit

Rated

Input Model No.

CIMR-G5M

Approx

Braking

Torque (%)

Qty

Reqd

Part No.

5P41-

Dimensions

(Inches)

230V

Resistance

(Ohms)

(Each)

Power

(Watts)

(Each)

Brakin

Transistor Unit

Minimum

Connectable

Resistance

Each (Ohms)

Qty

Reqd

Part No.

46S03331-

A003

A006

A008

A011

A017

A025

A033

A049

A064

A080

A096

A130

A160

A224

A300

Model No.

Old Drive New Drive

GPD515C-

- - - - - -

A6-2

Height Length Depth Height Length Depth

40P41F - - - - 96 - - - - - - 0835 1 750 600 150 5.00 14.00 7.00

40P71F - - - - 96 - - - - - - 0836 1 400 500 115 5.00 14.00 4.00

41P51F - - - - 64 - - - - - - 0837 1 250 500 125 5.00 14.00 4.00

43P71F - - - - 32 - - - - - - 0838 1 150 500 125 5.00 14.00 4.00

44P01F - - - - 32 - - - - - - 0839 1 100 975 125 5.00 14.00 7.00

45P51F - - - - 32 - - - - - - 0840 1 75 1050 125 5.00 14.00 10.00

47P51F - - - - 32 - - - - - - 0841 1 50 1600 125 5.00 14.00 13.00

40111F

B001

B003

B004

B008

B011

B014

B021

B027 - - - - 20 - - - - - - 0842 1 40 2050 120 5.00 21.00 10.00

40151F - - - - 20 - - - - - - 0843 1 32 2340 120 5.00 21.00 10.00

40181F 0050 1 20 11.00 5.53 5.91 0844 1 27 3000 115 5.00 21.00 13.00

40221F 0060 1 12.7 11.00 5.53 5.91 0845 1 20 3850 120 5.00 21.00 13.00

40301F 0060 1 12.7 11.00 5.53 5.91 0846 1 16 5440 120 5.00 28.00 13.00

40371F 0060 1 12.7 11.00 5.53 5.91 0847 1 13.6 5715 115 5.00 28.00 13.00

40451F

B034

B041

B052

B065

B080

B096 0060 2 12.7 11.00 5.53 5.91 0845 2 20 3850 125 5.00 21.00 13.00

40551F 0060 2 12.7 11.00 5.53 5.91 0847 2 13.6 5715 135 5.00 28.00 13.00

40750F 0060 2 12.7 11.00 5.53 5.91 0847 2 13.6 5715 110 5.00 28.00 13.00

41100F 0090 1 3 14.50 10.63 7.25 0848 1 5.2 17,280 120 14.00 29.00 18.00

41600F 0090 1 3 14.50 10.63 7.25 0849 1 4 19,600 95 14.00 29.00 18.00

0090 1 3 14.50 10.63 7.25 0849 1 4 19,600 80 14.00 29.00 18.00

42200F 0090 1 3 14.50 10.63 7.25 0849 1 4 19,600 70 14.00 29.00 18.00

43000F

41850F

0090 2 3 14.50 10.63 7.25 0849 2 4 19,600 95 14.00 29.00 18.00

Resistance

(Ohms)

(Each)

Power

(Watts)

(Each)

460 V

Brakin

Transistor Module

Minimum

Connectable

Resistance

Each (Ohms)

Qty

Reqd

Part No.

46S03331-

Table A6-3. D

namic Brakin

- 10% Dut

cle - 460V

Dimensions

(Inches)

Drive Remote Mount Resistor Unit

Rated

Input Model No.

New Drive

CIMR-G5M

Model No.

Old Drive

GPD515C-

Approx

Braking

Torque (%)

Qty

Reqd

Part No.

5P41-

Dimensions

(Inches)

0090 1 3 14.50 10.63 7.25 0849 1 4 19,600 80 14.00 29.00 18.00

- -

0090 1 3 14.50 10.63 7.25 0849 1 4 19,600 70 14.00 29.00 18.00

B128

B165

B224

B302

B380

B450

B605

B380

B506

B675 0090 2 3 14.50 10.63 7.25 0849 2 4 19,600 95 14.00 29.00 18.00

460 V

GPD506V-B041 thru GPD506V-B302 cannot be connected for D

namic Brakin

Height Length Depth Height Length Depth

51P51F - - - - 150 - - - - - - 0851 1 150 840 150 5.00 14.00 7.00

52P21F - - - - 150 - - - - - - 0851 1 150 840 150 5.00 14.00 7.00

53P71F

C003

C004

C006 - - - - 130 - - - - - - 0851 1 150 840 150 5.00 14.00 7.00

55P51F - - - - 90 - - - - - - 0851 1 150 840 130 5.00 14.00 7.00

57P51F - - - - 65 - - - - - - 0852 1 100 1400 145 5.00 14.00 10.00

50111F - - - - 44 - - - - - - 0853 1 75 1680 130 5.00 14.00 13.00

50151F - - - - 32 - - - - - - 0854 1 50 2520 145 5.00 21.00 10.00

50181F - - - - 26 - - - - - - 0855 1 40 3000 145 5.00 21.00 10.00

50221F

C010

C012

C017

C022

C027

C032 - - - - 26 - - - - - - 0856 1 38 3248 130 5.00 21.00 13.00

50301F 0080 1 24 11.00 5.53 5.91 0857 1 33 3800 110 5.00 21.00 13.00

50371F 0080 1 24 11.00 5.53 5.91 0858 1 27 4464 110 5.00 28.00 13.00

50451F 0080 2 24 11.00 5.53 5.91 0858 2 27 4464 150 5.00 28.00 13.00

50551F 0080 2 24 11.00 5.53 5.91 0858 2 27 4464 145 5.00 28.00 13.00

50751F 0080 2 24 11.00 5.53 5.91 0858 2 27 4464 110 5.00 28.00 13.00

50900F 0080 3 24 11.00 5.53 5.91 0858 3 27 4464 130 5.00 28.00 13.00

51100F 0080 3 24 11.00 5.53 5.91 0858 3 27 4464 110 5.00 28.00 13.00

51600F

C041

C052

C062

C077

C099

C130

C172

C200 0080 4 24 11.00 5.53 5.91 0858 4 27 4464 110 5.00 28.00 13.00

Dimensions

(Inches) Resistance

(Ohms)

(Each)

Power

(Watts)

(Each)

Brakin

Transistor Module

Minimum

Connectable

Resistance

Each (Ohms)

Qty

Reqd

Part No.

46S03331-

Table A6-4. D

namic Brakin

- 10% Dut

cle - 600V

600V

Dimensions

(Inches)

Drive Remote Mount Resistor Unit

Rated

Input Model No.

New Drive

CIMR-G5M

Model No.

Old Drive

GPD515C-

Approx

Braking

Torque (%)

Qty

Reqd

Part No.

5P41-

A6-3

INSTALLATION

This option should only be installed by a TECHNICALLY QUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL who is

familiar with this type of equipment and the hazards involved.

WARNING

Hazardous voltage can cause severe injury or death. Lock all power

sources feeding the drive in the "OFF" position.

CAUTION

Failure to follow these installation steps may cause equipment damage or

personnel injury.

Preliminary Procedures

1. Disconnect all electrical power to the

drive.

2. Remove drive front cover.

3. Use a voltmeter to verify that voltage

is disconnected from incoming power

terminals.

Heat Sink Mount Resistor Installation

1. Remove the drive from its mounting for

access to the rear of the heat sink.

2. Attach the Heat Sink Mount Resistor on

the back of the drive’s heat sink, as

shown in Figure A6-1.

3. Reinstall the drive in its mounting

position.

4. Connect the leads from the Heat Sink

Mount Resistor to drive terminals

according to Figure A6-2.

5. Proceed to "ADJUSTMENTS" on page

A6-7.

Figure A6-1. Attaching Heat Sink Mount Resistor

on Heat Sink

HEAT SINK

MOUNT

RESISTOR

Figure A6-2. Lead Connections For Heat Sink

Mount Resistor

B1 B2

HEAT SINK MOUNT

RESISTOR

GPD 515/G5

A6-4

Remote Mount Resistor Unit Installation (for GPD515C-A003 thru -A033

[CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 27P51F], -B001 thru -B034 [40P41F thru 40151F],

C003 thru C032 [51P51F thru 50221F])

IMPORTANT

Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking

operation, install it in a location away from other equipment.

1. Attach the Remote Mount Resistor Unit, maintaining a minimum 1.97 inch (50 mm)

clearance on each side and a minimum 7.87 inch (200 mm) clearance on top.

2. Remove the Remote Mount

Resistor Unit cover to access

its terminal block. Connect

the Remote Mount Resistor

Unit to the drive and to

external control circuitry

according to the chart at right

and Figure A6-3.

3. Reinstall and

secure

Remote

Mount Resistor

Unit cover and

drive front

cover.

4. Proceed to

"ADJUSTMENTS"

on page A6-8.

Figure A6-3. Wiring Remote Mount Resistor Unit to Drive

(GPD515C-A003 thru -A033 [CIMR-G5M20P41F thru 27P51F],

-B001 thru -B034 [40P41F thru 40151F], and -C003 thru -C032 [51P51F thru 50221F])

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

T1 (U)

T2 (V)

T3 (W)

CONTROL

PCB

311

PART OF USER SUPPLIED

EXTERNAL CIRCUIT B

1THG

THRX

FAUL

CONTAC

THRX

POWER

OFF

B1 B2

GPD 515/G5

REMOTE

MOUNT

RESISTOR

UNIT

Terminals B, P 1, 2 *

Lead Size (AWG) 12-10 18-14 *

Lead Type 600V ethylene propylene

rubber insulated, or equivalent

Terminal Screw M4

* Power leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of

electrical noise; these signal leads must be grouped separately.

A6-5

Braking Transistor Unit(s) and Remote Mount Resistor Unit(s) Installation

(for GPD515C-A049 [CIMR-G5M20111F] and above, -B041 [40181F] and

above, C041 [50301F] and above)

IMPORTANT

Since the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generates heat during dynamic braking

operation, install it in a location away from other equipment.

Select mounting locations for the Braking Transistor Unit(s) and Remote Mount Resistor

Unit(s) so that wiring between the drive and the (Master) Braking Transistor Unit, and

between each Braking Transistor Unit and its associated Remote Mount Resistor Unit, is

less than 33 feet (10 m).

1. Mount the Braking Transistor Unit(s) on a vertical surface. A Braking Transistor Unit

requires a minimum 1.18 inches (30 mm) clearance on each side and a minimum 3.94

inches (100 mm) clearance top and bottom. Attach the Remote Mount Resistor Unit

maintaining a minimum 1.97 inches (50 mm) clearance on each side and a minimum

7.87 inches (200 mm) clearance on top.

2. In each Braking Transistor Unit, set the nominal line voltage jumper plug to the

correct setting for the installation; this is factory set at the 230V/460V/575V

position. To access jumper plugs, remove plexiglass cover.

3. If multiple Braking Transistor Units are being installed, the unit closest to the drive

should have the SLAVE/MASTER jumper plug on its PCB set to the "MASTER" position

(factory setting); all others must have this jumper plug moved to the "SLAVE"

position.

4. If a single Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit are being installed,

connect them to the drive and external control circuitry according to the chart below

and Figure A6-4.

If two or more Braking Transistor Units and Remote Mount Resistor Units are being

installed, connect them to the drive and to external circuitry according to the chart

below and Figure A6-5.

LEAD SIZE LEAD TERMINAL

UNIT TERMINALS (AWG) TYPE SCREWS

Remote Resistor Unit B, P 12-10 600V ethylene propylene M5

1, 2 * 18-14 * rubber insulated or equivalent M4

Braking Transistor Unit

P, Po, N, B 12-10 600V ethylene propylene M4

1, 2 * 18-14 * rubber insulated, or equivalent

* Power leads for the Remote Mount Resistor Unit generate high levels of electrical noise; these signal leads must be

grouped separately.

A6-6

5. The Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit MUST BE GROUNDED.

Observe the following precautions:

•Use grounding leads conforming to National Electrical Code.

•If the installation requires the Remote Mount Resistor Unit to be used without its

enclosure (with grounding terminal), ground it by attaching a ground lead

at one of the mounting screws.

•Grounding resistance of the Braking Transistor Unit should be 100 ohms or less.

(1) For 600V Units, use terminal ⊕1.

(2) Fuse required only if UL/CUL certification is needed. See separate instruction sheet

02Y00025-0393 for details.

Figure A6-4. Wiring Single Braking Transistor Unit and Remote Mount Resistor Unit to Drive

(GPD515C-A049 thru -A080 [CIMR-G5M20111F thru 20181F], -B041 thru -B080 [40181F thru 40371F],

and -C041(1) and -C052(1) [50301F(1) and 50371F(1)])

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

T1 (U)

T2 (V)

T3 (W)

CONTROL

PCB

311

PART OF USER SUPPLIED

EXTERNAL CIRCUIT

31OL

120VAC

FAUL

CONTAC

THRX

IFU(2)

See Note(1)

THRX

POWER

OFF

1THG

GND

(E)

—

+ 3

GPD 515/G5

BRAKING

TRANSISTOR

UNIT

REMOTE

MOUNT

RESISTOR

UNIT

A6-7

Figure A6-5. Wiring Multiple Braking Transistor Units and Remote Mount Resistor Units to Drive

(GPD515C-A130 thru -A300 [CIMR-G5M20300F thru 20750F], -B096 thru -B605 [40451F thru 43000F],

and -C062 (1) thru -C200 (1) [50451F(1) thru 51600F(1)])

L1 (R)

L2 (S)

L3 (T)

T1 (U)

T2 (V)

T3 (W)

GPD 515/G5

CONTROL

PCB

311

PART OF USER SUPPLIED

EXTERNAL

CIRCUIT

BRAKING

31OL

120VAC

FAUL

CONTAC

THRX

POWER

OFF

21THG

(E)

GND

MASTER

BRAKING

31OL

21THG

(E)

GND

SLAVE

BRAKING

31OL

21THG

(E)

GND

SLAVE

BRAKING

31OL

1THG

(E)

GND

SLAVE

NOT RECOMMENDED

WIRING CONFIGURATION

PoPo

+ 3–

BRAKING

TRANSISTOR

UNIT

BRAKING

TRANSISTOR

UNIT

REMOTE MOUNT

RESISTOR UNIT

NOTE: Connect only the number of braking

transistor units and remote mount resistor

units required for the application.

REMOTE

MOUNT

RESISTOR

UNIT

REMOTE

MOUNT

RESISTOR

UNIT

REMOTE

MOUNT

RESISTOR

UNIT

REMOTE

MOUNT

RESISTOR

UNIT

IFU(2)

See Note (1)

TRANSISTOR UNIT #1

TRANSISTOR UNIT #2

TRANSISTOR UNIT #3

TRANSISTOR UNIT #4

(1) For 600V Units, use terminal + 1.

(2) Fuse required only if UL/CUL certification is needed. See separate instruction sheet

02Y00025-0393 for details.

A6-8

6. IMPORTANT: After wiring, test insulation resistance of each Braking Transistor

Unit/Remote Mount Resistor Unit with a 900V megger as follows:

a. Disconnect leads between the Braking Transistor Unit and the drive. If

equipment with semiconductors is connected across terminals 1 & 2 of the

Braking Transistor Unit,

remove the wiring.

b. Connect common leads

(jumpers) across Braking

Transistor Unit terminals

N, P, Po, and B, and across

3 & 4, as shown in

Figure A6-6.

c. Measure the insulation

resistance at points a, b,

and c in Figure A6-6 with

the megger.

ADJUSTMENTS

7. ALL drives: Program L3-04 to " 0 ", to disable stall prevention during deceleration.

8. Only with Heat Sink Mount Resistor: Program L8-01 to " 1 ", to enable overheat

protection for the braking resistor.

OPERATION CHECK

9. During dynamic braking operation, verify that the "BRAKE" lamp inside the Braking

Unit is lit.

10. During dynamic braking operations, ensure that the required deceleration

characteristic is obtained. If not, contact MagneTek for assistance.

11. Reinstall and secure covers on the Braking Transistor Units, Remote Mount Resistor

Units, and the drive.

CAUTION

During normal operation, the Braking Transistor Unit and the Remote Mount

Resistor Unit enclosures must be kept closed, since high voltage is applied to

the dynamic braking circuit.

GND (E)

REMOTE MOUNT

RESISTOR

UNIT

BRAKING

TRANSISTOR

UNIT

Figure A6-6. Megger Testing Set-up

I-1

INDEX

- A -

Accel/Decel Time ............................................ 5-3

Setting Unit .................................................. 5-5

Acceleration

Stall Prevention Level During ..................... 5-86

Stall Prevention. Limit During ..................... 5-86

Stall Prevention. Selection During ............. 5-86

Time 1 .......................................................... 5-3

Time 2 .......................................................... 5-3

Time 3 .......................................................... 5-3

Time 4 .......................................................... 5-3

Access Level ................................................... 5-7

Analog Inputs, Multi-function

(Term. 14 & 16) ......................................5-53

Analog Monitor Output, Multi-function

(Term. 21-23) ........................................ 5-57

Bias ............................................................ 5-57

Gain ........................................................... 5-57

Signal Level Selection ................................ 5-57

Output Selection ........................................ 5-57

At Set Frequency (Output Signal) ................. 5-73

Automatic Speed Regulator (ASR) ................. 5-9

ASR Integral Reset .................................... 5-59

Integral Time 1 ............................................. 5-9

Integral Time 2 ........................................... 5-11

Proportional Gain 1 ...................................... 5-9

Proportional Gain 2 .................................... 5-11

Output Lag Time ........................................ 5-11

Auto Restart .................................................... 5-7

Fault Contact Status During ......................... 5-8

No. of Attempts ............................................ 5-7

Auto-Tuning, Running

in Open Loop Vector Control ....................... 2-4

in Flux Vector Control ................................... 2-9

Auto-Tuning Faults & Corrective Actions ......... 6-6

Auxiliary Input and Output

Power Option Devices ...........................1-11

- B -

Base Block, External ..................................... 5-63

Base Block Time, Min. ................................... 5-63

Basic Programming ......................................... 4-8

Baud Rate, Ser. Comm.

(MODBUS Control) ........................... 5-49

Bias, Frequency Reference ........................... 5-29

Braking, DC Injection .................................... 5-14

Current ........................................................ 5-15

Start Frequency .............................. 5-15, 5-103

Time at Start ..................................... 5-14, 5-15

Time at Stop ............................................... 5-15

Braking, Dynamic .......................................... A6-1

- C -

Calculating Motor Parameters

[for Initial Start-up] ................................ 2-20

Capacity Related Parameters ....................... A3-1

Carrier Frequency ......................................... 5-12

Lower Limit ................................................. 5-12

Proportional Gain ....................................... 5-12

Upper limit .................................................. 5-12

Changing the Language on

the Digital Operator .............................. 2-19

Checking Encoder Pulses

[Troubleshooting] .................................. 6-29

Communication Error, Stop Method at

(MODBUS Control) ............................ A1-17

Conformance to European EMC

Directive ................................................. 1-13

Connections, Vector Control Motor ............... 1-24

Blower Motor .............................................. 1-26

Encoder Feedback (PG) ............................ 1-27

Motor Windings .......................................... 1-24

Control Circuit

Terminals .................................................... 1-17

Terminal (13, 14) Input Voltage

[Monitor Items] ................................... A1-28

Wiring ......................................................... 1-15

Control Method [Monitor Item] .................... A1-27

Control Method Related Parameters ............ A3-3

Control Method Selection ................................ 2-2

CPU ID No. [Monitor Item] .......................... A1-29

Critical Frequency Rejection ......................... 5-13

Current, DC Injection Braking ....................... 5-15

Current Meter (Analog Monitor) .................... 5-57

Current, Motor Rated (FLA) ................. 2-20, 5-90

- D -

DATA/ENTER Key .................................... 4-1, 4-3

DC Bus Voltage [Monitor Item] ................... A1-27

Deactivation Time, Power Loss Ride-thru ..... 5-50

Deceleration

Stall Prevention Selection During .............. 5-86

Time 1 .......................................................... 5-3

Time 2 .......................................................... 5-3

Time 3 .......................................................... 5-3

Time 4 .......................................................... 5-3

Deadband, Prohibited Frequency ................. 5-13

Delay Time, Excessive Speed Deviation

Detection (PG) .................................. 5-23

Derivative Time (PID) .................................... 5-80

Detection, Frequency (Output Signal) ........... 5-73

Detection, Speed (Output Signal) ................. 5-73

Diagnostics — see Troubleshooting

Digital "Motor Operated Pot" ......................... 5-45

Digital Operator ............................................... 4-1

Changing the Language on ....................... 2-19

Display Selection ....................................... 5-17

Menu Trees .................................................. 4-4

Mode Selection ............................................ 4-9

Monitor Selection (At Power-up) ................ 5-19

Test Run Using ........................................... 2-24

Dimensions ................................................... A5-1

Diode and IGBT (Transistor) Module

Resistance Test .................................... 6-27

Displaying Faults ............................................. 6-7

“Down Arrow” Key .................................... 4-1, 4-3

DRIVE Indicator Lamp ............................. 4-1, 4-2

Droop ............................................................. 5-19

Dwell .............................................................. 5-20

Dynamic Braking ........................................... A6-1

Dynamic Braking Resistor

Protection, Internal ............................... 5-46

- E -

Elapsed Operation Time [Monitor Item] ...... A1-28

Elapsed Timer

Selection .................................................... 5-46

Setting ........................................................ 5-45

Encoder (PG) Constant ................ 2-7, 2-15, 5-21

Encoder (PG) Parameters ............................. 5-21

Energy Saving Operation .............................. 5-27

Gain ........................................................... 5-27

Enclosure ...................................................... A5-1

Environment .......................................... 1-1, A2-3

ESC Key ................................................... 4-1, 4-4

European EMC Directive,

Conformance to ......................................1-13

Excessive Speed Deviation

Detection Delay Time ................................. 5-23

Detection Level .......................................... 5-23

External Fault Inputs ..................................... 5-28

- F -

Fast-Stop Decel Time .............................. 5-3, 5-4

Fault Contact Status

During Auto Restart .................................... 5-8

Fault Indication & Troubleshooting .................. 6-1

Faults & Corrective Action, Auto-Tuning .......... 6-6

FLA, Motor ........................................... 2-20, 5-90

Flash ID No. [Monitor Item] ......................... A1-28

Frequency

Base ......................................................... 5-108

Carrier ........................................................ 5-12

Detection Output Signal.............................. 5-73

Max. Output .............................................. 5-108

Meter (Analog Monitor) .............................. 5-57

Mid. Output ............................................... 5-108

Min. Output ............................................... 5-108

Prohibited ................................................... 5-13

I-2

INDEX – Continued

Frequency Detection Multi-

function Output ..................................... 5-73

Frequency Reference 1 ................................. 5-39

Frequency Reference 2 ................................. 5-39

Frequency Reference 3 ................................. 5-39

Frequency Reference 4 ................................. 5-39

Frequency Reference

Bias ............................................................ 5-29

Gain ........................................................... 5-29

Input Signals (Auto/Manual) ....................... 5-32

Jog .................................................... 5-36, 5-38

Limit, Lower ................................................ 5-34

Limit, Upper ................................................ 5-34

Loss Detection ........................................... 5-33

Retention .................................................... 5-33

FWD Indicator Lamp ................................ 4-1, 4-2

FWD/REV Key ......................................... 4-1, 4-2

- G -

Gain

Analog Monitor ........................................... 5-57

Energy Saving ............................................ 5-26

Frequency Reference ................................. 5-29

Proportional (PID) ...................................... 5-80

Torque Compensation ................................ 5-93

Zero-Servo ............................................... 5-110

Grounding ...................................................... 1-11

- H -

Hunting Prevention ........................................ 5-35

- I -

Indicator Lamps ....................................... 4-1, 4-2

Initial Start-up ("Local" Control) ....................... 2-1

Initialize Parameters (Reset Codes) ............. 5-83

Input and Output Power Option

Devices, Auxiliary ................................. 1-11

Input Phase Loss Detection .......................... 5-77

Input Selection

Analog, Multi-function ................................ 5-53

Multi-function Terminals ............................. 5-58

Input Terminal Status [Monitor Item] ........... A1-27

Input Voltage ................................................. A2-1

Inputs

Analog ........................................................ 5-53

Frequency Reference ................................. 5-31

Inspection (Receiving) ..................................... 1-1

Installation

Physical ........................................................ 1-1

Electrical ...................................................... 1-2

Integral Time (PID) ........................................ 5-80

Integral Value Limit (PID) .............................. 5-80

Integral Reset, ASR (PID) ............................. 5-82

Integral Value During Accel/

Decel Selection (PG) ............................ 5-24

Interconnection

2-wire Control ............................................. 1-20

3-wire Control ............................................. 1-22

Internal Dynamic Braking

Resistor Protection ............................... 5-46

- J -

Jog Frequency Reference .................... 5-35, 5-36

JOG Key .................................................. 4-1, 4-2

- K -

Keypad — see Digital Operator

- L -

Lag Filter Time, Output (PID) ........................ 5-81

Lamps, Indicator .............................. 4-1, 4-2

LCD Display ............................................ 4-1

Limit, Integral Value (PID) ..................... 5-80

Line-to-Line Resistance, Motor ................... A1-13

Listing of Parameters .................................... A1-1

LOCAL/REMOTE Key ..................................... 4-1

Selection .................................................... 5-44

Local/Remote Reference

Selection .................................................... 5-39

Lower Limit, Frequency Reference ............... 5-34

- M -

Main Circuit

Block Diagrams ............................1-8, 1-9, 1-10

Terminals .............................................. 1-3, 1-5

Input/Output Wiring ...................................... 1-2

Max. Output Frequency ...................... 2-20, 5-108

Max. Voltage ....................................... 2-21, 5-108

Mechanical resonance — see

Critical Frequency Rejection

MENU Key ............................................... 4-1, 4-3

Menu Trees, Digital Operator .......................... 4-5

Mid. Output Frequency ................................ 5-108

Mid. Output Voltage ..................................... 5-108

Min. Base Block Time .................................... 5-65

Min. Output Frequency ................................ 5-108

Min. Output Voltage ..................................... 5-108

Miscellaneous Parameters ............................ 5-44

Miscellaneous Protective Features ............... 5-46

MODBUS Control .......................................... 5-48

Operation Mode Selection ......................... 5-48

Reference Selection ................................... 5-48

Ser. Comm. Baud Rate ..................... 5-48, 5-49

Ser. Comm. Parity Selection ............. 5-48, 5-49

Ser. Comm. Station Address ............ 5-48, 5-49

Stopping Method at Ser.

Comm. Error ................................... A1-17

Mode Selection ............................................... 4-8

Model Numbers, Drive .................. xvii, A2-1,

A3-1, A5-1

Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru ................. 5-50

Deactivation Time ...................................... 5-50

Protection ................................................... 5-50

Monitor Selection (At Power-Up) ................... 5-19

Motor

Exciting Current [Monitor Item] ................ A1-28

Line-to-Line Resistance ........................... A1-13

Mechanical Loss ...................................... A1-13

Overload Protection Selection ................... 5-90

No-Load Current (NLA) .................. 2-20, A1-13

Parameters, Calculating

[Initial Start-up] ..................................... 2-20

Rated Current (FLA) ............. 5-90, 2-20, A1-13

Rated Voltage ................................ 2-20, A1-13

Secondary Current (Iq)

[Monitor Item] ..................................... A1-28

Selection (for OL Protection) ..................... 5-90

Speed [Monitor Item] ............................... A1-27

Stopping Method Selection ............... 5-14, 5-88

Switching — see Speed Search

Wiring .................................................. 1-2, 1-25

Mounting

Clearances ................................................... 1-1

Dimensions ................................................ A5-1

Location .............................................. 1-1, A2-4

Multi-function Analog Inputs

(Term. 14 & 16) ..................................... 5-53

Multi-function Input Terminals

(Term. 3-8) ............................................ 5-58

Multi-function Output Terminals

(Term. 9 & 10; 25-27) ........................... 5-71

Multi-step Speed Operation .......................... 5-40

- N -

Number of PG Gear Teeth 1 ......................... 5-25

Number of PG Gear Teeth 2 ......................... 5-25

- O -

Off-delay Timer .............................................. 5-66

Offset (PID) ................................................... 5-80

OH (Overheat) Protection Alarm Level ......... 5-46

OH Stopping Method Selection .................... 5-46

On-delay Timer .............................................. 5-66

Operation Method for Frequency

Reference Loss Detection .................... 5-33

Operation Mode Selection ............................. 5-39

Operation Selection

at Overspeed (PG) ..................................... 5-22

at PG Open Circuit ..................................... 5-22

at Speed Deviation (PG) ............................ 5-23

Operation Status [Monitor Item] .................. A1-28

Operator Detection Selection ........................ 5-45

I-3

INDEX – Continued

Operator Display (LCD) ................................... 4-1

Options — see Peripheral Devices

Output, Analog Monitor ................................. 5-57

Output Current [Monitor Item] ..................... A1-27

Output Frequency

Max. .............................................. 5-108, A1-12

Mid. ............................................... 5-108, A1-12

Min. ............................................... 5-108, A1-12

[Monitor Item] ........................................... A1-27

Output Lag Filter Time (PID) ......................... 5-81

Output Phase Loss Detection ....................... 5-77

Output Power [Monitor Item] ....................... A1-27

Output Selection, Analog Monitor ................. 5-57

Output Terminal Status [Monitor Item] ........ A1-27

Output Voltage [Monitor Item] ..................... A1-27

Output Voltage Ref. (Vd) [Monitor Item] ...... A1-29

Output Voltage Ref. (Vq) [Monitor Item] ...... A1-29

Outputs

Analog Monitor ........................................... 5-57

Contact/Open Collector .............................. 5-70

Overload Prot. Selection, Motor .................... 5-90

Overspeed Detection Level (PG) .................. 5-22

Overtorque Detection

Function Selection ..................................... 5-98

Level ........................................................... 5-98

Time ........................................................... 5-98

- P -

Parameter Selection/Initialization

(Reset Codes) ....................................... 5-83

Parameters

Factory Reset (Initialize) ............................ 5-83

Listing of .................................................... A1-1

Quick Reference For ..................................... xiv

Programming ............................................. 4-10

Related to Capacity ................................... A3-1

Related to Control Method ........................ A3-3

Parity Selection, Ser. Comm.

(MODBUS Control) ........................... 5-49

Peripheral devices

AC reactor .................................................. 1-12

Molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) ........ A2-1

Noise filter .................................................. 1-12

PG Open Circuit Detection Delay Time ........ 5-21

PG Open Circuit, Operation Selection at ...... 5-21

PG Rotation ................................................... 5-24

PG Setup ....................................................... 5-21

Phase Loss Detection

Input ........................................................... 5-77

Output ........................................................ 5-77

Physical Installation ......................................... 1-1

PID Control .................................................... 5-78

Disable ....................................................... 5-60

Feedback Amount [Monitor Item] ............ A1-29

Feedback Signal Selection ........................ 5-79

Integral Value Limit .................................... 5-80

Offset ......................................................... 5-80

Output Filter Lag Time ............................... 5-81

PID Limit .................................................... 5-80

PID Selection ............................................. 5-78

PID Settings

Derivative Time ....................................... 5-80

Integral Time ........................................... 5-80

Proportional Gain ................................... 5-80

Potentiometer (External Speed) ........................ vii

Power Loss Ride-thru Time ........................... 5-51

Power On and Preliminary Checks

(Initial Start-up) ....................................... 2-2

Power Supply ......................................... 1-5, A2-1

Power Voltage Selection in

460V GPD 515 ....................................... 2-1

Pre-Operation Considerations ....................... 2-27

Preset Speeds — see Multi-step Speeds

Programmable Features .................................. 5-1

Prohibited Frequency 1 ................................. 5-13

Prohibited Frequency 2 ................................. 5-13

Prohibited Frequency 3 ................................. 5-13

Prohibited Frequency 4 ................................. 5-13

Prohibited Frequency Deadband .................. 5-13

Proportional Gain (PID) ................................. 5-80

Protection

Overcurrent, Instantaneous ....................... A2-3

Overheat, Heatsink .................................... A2-3

Overtorque ................................................. 5-98

Overvoltage ............................................... A2-3

Thermal Overload ...................................... 5-90

Undervoltage ............................................. A2-3

PWM Frequency — see

Carrier Frequency

- R -

Rated Current, Motor ........................... 2-20, 5-90

Ratings .................................................. xvii, A2-1

Receiving ......................................................... 1-1

Reference Selection (Local/Remote) ............ 5-39

REMOTE Indicator Lamps ....................... 4-1, 4-2

Reset Codes ................................................. 5-83

RESET Key .............................................. 4-1, 4-3

Resistance, Motor Line-to-Line ................... A1-13

REV Indicator Lamp ................................. 4-1, 4-2

Reverse Run Prohibit .................................... A1-2

Ride-thru, Momentary Power Loss ................ 5-51

Deactivation Time ...................................... 5-51

"Right Arrow" Key ..................................... 4-1, 4-3

Rotation, PG .................................................. 5-24

RUN Indicator Lamp ................................ 4-1, 4-2

RUN Key .................................................. 4-1, 4-2

Running

Forward ...................................................... 2-24

Reverse ...................................................... 2-24

Stall Prevention Level During ..................... 5-87

Stall Prevention Selection During .............. 5-87

- S -

Sample/Hold Function ....................................5-67

Scaling Display (Digital Operator) ................. 5-17

S-Curve Characteristics .................................. 5-6

Shock Resistance –– see S-Curve

Skip Frequency –– see Prohibited Frequency

Slip Compensation ........................................ 5-84

Gain ........................................................... 5-84

Limit ........................................................... 5-84

Primary Delay Time ................................... 5-84

Selection During Regeneration .................. 5-84

Soft Start — see S-Curve

Spare Parts ................................................... A4-1

Specifications ................................................ A2-1

Speed

Detection Output Signal ............................. 5-74

Range ........................................................ A2-1

Search ........................................................ 5-64

Speed Reference, Multiple (Multi-step

Speed Operation) ................................. 5-39

Speed Search Level ...................................... 5-64

Stall Prevention

Level During Accel ..................................... 5-86

Level During Running ................................ 5-87

Limit During Accel ...................................... 5-86

Selection During Accel ............................... 5-86

Selection During Decel .............................. 5-86

Selection During Running .......................... 5-87

Start-up, Initial ................................................. 2-1

Start-up Procedure, Simplified ............................ i

Station Address, Ser. Comm.

(MODBUS Control) ........................... 5-49

STOP Indicator Lamp .............................. 4-1, 4-2

STOP Key ................................................ 4-1, 4-2

Function During Remote Run .................... 5-45

Stop Method Sel. (OH) ............................... A1-46

Stopping Method .................................. 5-14, 5-88

Stopping Method at Comm. Error

(MODBUS Control) ............................... 5-50

Storage Function ........................................... 2-27

Switching Frequency, Accel/Decel .................. 5-5

- T -

Temperature

Ambient .............................................. 1-1, A2-4

Storage ...................................................... A2-4

Terminals

Description .......................................... 1-6, 1-17

Functions ............................................ 1-6, 1-17

Screw Sizes ................................................. 1-3

Test Run Using Digital Operator

("Local" Control) ................................... 2-24

I-4

INDEX – Continued

Thermal Overload Protection ........................ 5-90

Motor OL Protection Selection ................... 5-90

Motor OL Protection Time Constant .......... 5-90

Motor Rated Current .................................. 5-90

Motor Selection .......................................... 5-91

Torque Compensation ................................... 5-93

Gain [K

] .................................................... 5-93

Time Constant ............................................ 5-93

Torque Control (Command) ........................... 5-95

Selection .................................................... 5-95

Simplified Block Diagram ........................... 5-97

Speed/Torque Control Selection Timer ...... 5-95

Speed Limit ................................................ 5-96

Speed Limit Selection ................................ 5-96

Torque Reference Delay Time .................... 5-96

Torque Detection ........................................... 5-98

Overtorque Detection Level ....................... 5-98

Overtorque Detection Time ........................ 5-98

Selection .................................................... 5-98

Torque Limit ................................................. 5-101

Forward Torque Limit ............................... 5-101

Forward Regenerative Torque Limit ......... 5-101

Reverse Torque Limit ............................... 5-101

Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit ......... 5-101

Torque Reference (Internal) [Monitor Item] . A1-27

Trim Control ................................................... 5-69

± Speed Limits ........................................... 5-69

Troubleshooting ............................................... 6-1

Flowcharts .................................................. 6-10

- U -

Up/Down Function ......................................... 5-68

Upper Limit, Freq. Ref. .................................. 5-34

"Up Arrow" Key ........................................ 4-1, 4-3

User Parameters ......................................... 5-106

- V -

V/f Pattern

Custom ..................................................... 5-108

Standard .................................................. 5-106

Voltage

Input ............................................... 5-108, A2-1

Max. ......................................................... 5-108

Mid. Frequency ........................................ 5-108

Motor Rated ........................................ 2-5, 2-10

- W -

Weight ........................................................... A5-1

Wiring

2-wire Control ................................. 1-10b, 1-20

3-Wire Control ................................. 1-10b, 1-22

Control Circuit ............................................ 1-15

Diagrams .......................................... 1-15, 1-23

Distances ............................................ 1-2, 1-15

Main Circuit Input/Output ............................. 1-2

Encoder/PG-X2 Connections ..................... 1-24

- Z -

Zero-Servo Control ...................................... 5-110

Zero-Servo Gain ...................................... 5-111

Zero-Servo Completion Width .................. 5-111

Zero Speed Control ..................................... 5-112

Zero Speed Operation ............................. 5-112

Min. Output Frequency ............................. 5-112

GPD 515/G5 Technical Manual 04/01/02 SWV: 01114

GPD 515/G5 Drive

Technical Manual

Models: GPD515C- and CIMR-G5M Document Number: TM 4515

GPD 515/G5 Drive

YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.

Drives Division 16555 W. Ryerson Rd., New Berlin, WI 53151, U.S.A.

Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (262) 782-3418

Internet: http://www.drives.com

YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.

Chicago-Corporate Headquarters

2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.

Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) Fax: (847) 887-7310

Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com

MOTOMAN INC.

805 Liberty Lane, West Carrollton, OH 45449, U.S.A.

Phone: (937) 847-6200 Fax: (937) 847-6277

Internet: http://www.motoman.com

YASKAWA ELECTRIC CORPORATION

New Pier Takeshiba South Tower, 1-16-1, Kaigan, Minatoku, Tokyo, 105-0022, Japan

Phone: 81-3-5402-4511 Fax: 81-3-5402-4580

Internet: http://www.yaskawa.co.jp

YASKAWA ELETRICO DO BRASIL COMERCIO LTDA.

Avenida Fagundes Filho, 620 Bairro Saude Sao Paolo-SP, Brasil CEP: 04304-000

Phone: 55-11-5071-2552 Fax: 55-11-5581-8795

Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com.br

YASKAWA ELECTRIC EUROPE GmbH

Am Kronberger Hang 2, 65824 Schwalbach, Germany

Phone: 49-6196-569-300 Fax: 49-6196-888-301

MOTOMAN ROBOTICS AB

Box 504 S38525, Torsas, Sweden

Phone: 46-486-48800 Fax: 46-486-41410

MOTOMAN ROBOTEC GmbH

Kammerfeldstrabe 1, 85391 Allershausen, Germany

Phone: 49-8166-900 Fax: 49-8166-9039

YASKAWA ELECTRIC UK LTD.

1 Hunt Hill Orchardton Woods Cumbernauld, G68 9LF, Scotland, United Kingdom

Phone: 44-12-3673-5000 Fax: 44-12-3645-8182

YASKAWA ELECTRIC KOREA CORPORATION

Paik Nam Bldg. 901 188-3, 1-Ga Euljiro, Joong-Gu, Seoul, Korea

Phone: 82-2-776-7844 Fax: 82-2-753-2639

YASKAWA ELECTRIC (SINGAPORE) PTE. LTD.

Head Office: 151 Lorong Chuan, #04-01, New Tech Park Singapore 556741, Singapore

Phone: 65-282-3003 Fax: 65-289-3003

TAIPEI OFFICE (AND YATEC ENGINEERING CORPORATION)

10F 146 Sung Chiang Road, Taipei, Taiwan

Phone: 886-2-2563-0010 Fax: 886-2-2567-4677

YASKAWA JASON (HK) COMPANY LIMITED

Rm. 2909-10, Hong Kong Plaza, 186-191 Connaught Road West, Hong Kong

Phone: 852-2803-2385 Fax: 852-2547-5773

BEIJING OFFICE

Room No. 301 Office Building of Beijing International Club,

21 Jianguomanwai Avenue, Beijing 100020, China

Phone: 86-10-6532-1850 Fax: 86-10-6532-1851

SHANGHAI OFFICE

27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China

Phone: 86-21-6553-6600 Fax: 86-21-6531-4242

SHANGHAI YASKAWA-TONJI M & E CO., LTD.

27 Hui He Road Shanghai 200437 China

Phone: 86-21-6533-2828 Fax: 86-21-6553-6677

BEIJING YASKAWA BEIKE AUTOMATION ENGINEERING CO., LTD.

30 Xue Yuan Road, Haidian, Beijing 100083 China

Phone: 86-10-6232-9943 Fax: 86-10-6234-5002

SHOUGANG MOTOMAN ROBOT CO., LTD.

7, Yongchang-North Street, Beijing Economic & Technological Development Area,

Beijing 100076 China

Phone: 86-10-6788-0551 Fax: 86-10-6788-2878

YEA, TAICHUNG OFFICE IN TAIWAIN

B1, 6F, No.51, Section 2, Kung-Yi Road, Taichung City, Taiwan, R.O.C.

Phone: 886-4-2320-2227 Fax:886-4-2320-2239

Document Number: TM4515 (Supercedes: YEA-TOA-S616-10.11 and 10.12) 04/01/2002 Software Version: 01114

Data subject to change without notice.

SWV2563 Yaskawa G5 Drive Manual 2 15 12

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation